Home

OmniSwitch 6250/6450 Switch Management Guide

1. 1 34 Closing a Secure Shell FTP Session 1 34 Verifying Directory Contents 1 35 Installing Software Licenses 1 36 EaCensed aves 1 37 Setting the System Clock EAE A 1 39 Setting Date and Time 1 39 Date taii nueia beans ins Randi Revie eines 1 39 Timne 1 39 1 40 Daylight Savings Time Configuration 0 ecceceeseceeccecececeseceeeceeceeeceeecneceeneenes 1 41 Enabling dees an a aes Me oli tenis 1 42 Chapter 2 Logging Into the Switch 2 1 Di This Chapter 2 1 2 3 merdin E A 2 3 Quick Steps for Logging Into the Switch 2 5 Overview of Switch Login Components 2 6 Management Interfaces ciecen a a a 2 6 Logsing motie ist austenite a o ae ies 2 6 Using the WebVie
2. 2 17 Closing a Secure Shell Session oo cece esecesesecseceeceseeseseeceecsecseesesssesaeseseeeeas 2 19 Log Into the Switch with Secure Shell FTP 2 19 Closing a Secure Shell FTP Session 2 20 Modifying the Login 2 21 Modifying the Text Display Before Login 00 cc eesceseeceescececeeeeeceeceneceeeeeneeeeeesneess 2 22 Configuring Login Parameters 2 23 Configuring the Inactivity Timer 2 23 Enabling the DNS RESOIVEr 2 24 Verifying Login Settings 2 25 Chapter 3 Sing 9 tes ities Sed ee ths ee eat eth ah eee E estas ale amt eae 3 1 Ini This 3 1 SNMP Specifications eo telat 3 2 3 2 Quick Steps for Setting Up An SNMP Management Station 3 4 Quick Steps for Setting Up Trap Filters 0 0 eee 3 5 Filtering by Trap Families 3 5 Filtering by Individ
3. 10 10 Configuring the Default Setting 10 10 secite Shel alec 10 11 Configuring Accounting for ASA sercsesccricniegios eukittie AEA 10 12 Verifying the ASA Configuration reena o o 10 13 Chapter 11 Using WebView ainmnean nnn ren aE R EAN R RR 11 1 Di This ona EER E AO A E A A 11 1 WebView CLI De a R 11 2 Browser Setup uniin Dla Sedat 11 2 Web View CLI 11 3 Enabling Disabling WebVieW 11 3 Changing the HTTP Port et deterrents 11 3 Enabling Disabling SSE trinii ainn AA AA 11 4 Changing the HTTPS Port ea arrori anoei T A AEAT 11 4 Quick Steps for Setting Up WebDVieW 11 5 WeED View OVerview 11 5 WebMView Page Layout eii 11 5 e greet EOE 11 6 601 11 6 Feature 11 7 View Configuration Area eneeier er 11 7 Configuring the Switch With 11 8 ACCESSING WED VIEW
4. B 1 SNMP Traps Table 2 Index 1 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 About This Guide This OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide describes basic attributes of your switch and basic switch administration tasks The software features described in this manual are shipped standard with your OmniSwitch 6250 6450 switches These features are used when readying a switch for integration into a live network environment Supported Platforms This information in this guide applies to the following product OmniSwitch 6250 Series OmniSwitch 6450 Series Unsupported Platforms The information in this guide does not apply to the following products OmniSwitch 9000 Series OmniSwitch 6400 Series OmniSwitch 6600 Family OmniSwitch 6800 Family OmniSwitch 6850 Series OmniSwitch 6855 Series OmniSwitch original version with no numeric model name OmniS witch 7700 7800 OmniSwitch 8800 Omni Switch Router OmniStack OmniAccess OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page xi Who Should Read this Manual About This Guide Who Should Read this Manual The audience for this user guide are network administrators and IT support personnel who need to config ure maintain and monitor switches and routers in a live network However anyone wishing to gain k
5. 8 4 eine tte 8 5 Basic Operatii srona aroaren ie eeo 8 5 Network Components 2 8 6 Information Provided by DHCP Server 8 6 Information Provided by Instruction File 8 6 File Servers and Download Process ccccsseessecesseeeseeececeseeeesceeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaes 8 7 LED Status eeun rl ated trated bas a Saad 8 7 Interaction With Other 8 8 UDP DHCP Relay A EOE EET lanier 8 8 AO 8 8 8 8 ain 8 8 Dynamic Link Aggregation LACP oo eee eee cseceeeseeeseeceeetseeseeesaeeaeenseas 8 8 Automatic Remote Configuration Download Process ccccceeseeesseeetseeeseeeeseeeeeeeneneeees 8 9 Process ei ei E EE 8 11 Additional Process Notes 8 12 Download Component Files 8 13 8 13 Instruction File Syntax eieae 8 14 Instruction File Usage Guidelines
6. 6 22 Listing Other User Sessions 6 22 Listing Your Current Login Session olone eeren iea a E eee iNET ei 6 23 Terminating Another Session ereitean heini ei eE 6 24 Application Example ssc cccicc sis dosssssessedscsssbedesssaaedee dees ssnecdunostavee sees ssedgvesceasanssessdbasvndecess 6 25 Using a Wildcard to Filter Table Information 0 0 eee eeceesecseeceecececeeeceeeeeneeseeess 6 25 Verifying CLL USage A A 6 27 Chapter 7 Working With Configuration Files 0 0 0 0 ccccecceeeseseeeeseeseeceeeeseeeeseeseeeeneeneaes 7 1 Ine EhisChapter ic tees 7 1 Configuration File Specifications 7 2 Tutorial for Creating a Configuration File 7 2 Quick Steps for Applying Configuration Files 00 0 ces ceeeeeeseceneeeneceseeseceseeeseeeseeaeeeneees 7 4 Setting a File for Immediate Application 0 0 0 cei essceceseceneceeceeseseeeseceaeeeaeeeneeeaees 7 4 Setting an Application Session for a Date and Time 7 4 Setting an Application Session for a Specified Time Period 7 5 Configuration Files Overview s peraan 7 6 Applying Configuration Files to the Switch oo cee cesesesseeseeeseeeeeeseceseeeeeeeeenreeees 7 6 V
7. 8 15 Firmware Upgrad 8 15 Bootup Configuration File 8 15 Debug Configuration File a 8 16 8 16 Script File 8 16 LACP Auto Detection and Automatic Link Aggregate Association 8 17 DHCP Client Auto Configuration Process ccecessceeseeseeseeeseeeseceeeeecesceseeeeceseeeneenes 8 18 DHCP Client Preference to DHCP Server 8 19 Nearest Edge Mode Operations A AE 8 21 Zero Touch License U 8 23 Eroubleshootung soner eerie TA 8 24 Error R solution ee ae ed end a 8 24 Server Connection Failure and File Download Errors ccccecscceesseeeseeeteeeeneeeees 8 24 Error Description Fable 8 25 Script EE e TE 8 25 Error Description 8 26 Managing Switch User Accounts 9 1 In This Chapter EES E EAEN E sos rdes 9 1 User Database Specifications nee aeaee EAA N a E 9 2 User Account Defaults
8. 9 2 Overview of User is aa a a a a a a aaia 9 4 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 ix Contents Startup isinsi aanne ei are EE E E 9 6 Quick Steps for Network Administrator User Account 9 7 Quick Steps for Creating Customer Login User Accounts 6 9 8 Default tiser Settings deus a 9 9 Account and Password Policy Settings 0 0 seecesceseseceeceseesesseeseseaeteeseeeas 9 10 How User Settings Are Saved oo ce cescscessesseeeseceeeeseeeseeseeeceseeseeceesseseeeeeesseeess 9 11 086 ode E duh EA 9 12 REMOVING a Tse vendeur 9 13 User Configured Password 9 14 Configuring Password Policy Settings 0 0 0 ceseesceesceceeseeesceeseeeeeeeeeceeeeceeseceeeeseeeeeens 9 16 Setting a Minimum Password Size ccc eeceesessceeseeseeesceeseeesceececseeeeceeeeeecseeeeeees 9 17 Configuring the Username Password Exception 9 18 Configuring Password Character Requirements ecceccceseececeeeeeeceeeceneeeeeeeeeeee 9 19 Configuring Password Expiration 9 20 Default Password Expiration 0 cccceccccesccesseceeeceeceeeeeseeeeseeneeesceenseeseeeenes 9 20 Specific User Password Expiration ccesceesecesecececece
9. 11 8 Accessing WebView with Internet Explorer Version 7 8 11 9 HomePage e E S EEE N E ban ENE R AN 11 10 Configuration Page E TAARA 11 12 Global Configuration Page ena n a 11 12 Table Configuration Page veiii inai A 11 13 Table Features orenera roana OARE A OIE EOE EO 11 17 eao A AAAA 11 23 Web View e a lean E E A 11 24 G neral Web View Help n aiao eai aa aait 11 24 Specific page Help 11 24 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 xi Contents Appendix A Appendix B Software License and Copyright Statement 1 Alcatel Lucent License Agreement 1 ALCATEL LUCENT SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT 1 Third Party Licenses and Notices eiea a a eE 4 A Booting and Debugging Non Proprietary Software A 4 B The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2 8 17 August 2003 A 4 E E A EA cues A E A E A E S E wt A 5 D GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 A 5 Univesity Of Califor
10. page 5 22 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant Show Currently Used Configuration When a switch is booted the certified and working directories are compared If they are the same the switch runs from the working directory If they are different the switch runs from the certified directory A switch running from the certified directory cannot modify directory contents This topic is covered in Where is the Switch Running From on page 5 4 To check the directory from where the switch is currently running enter the following command gt show running directory CONFIGURATION STATUS Running CMM PRIMARY CMM Mode DUAL CMMs Current CMM Slot z i Running configuration WORKING Certify Restore Status CERTIFY NEEDED SYNCHRONIZATION STATUS Flash Between CMMs SYNCHRONIZED Running Configuration NOT AVAILABLE Stacks Reload on Takeover ALL STACKs SW Activation The command returns the directory the switch is currently running from working or certified and which CMM is currently controlling the switch primary or secondary It also displays whether the working and certified directories are the same and if a synchronization is needed between the primary and secondary CMM The show running directory command is described in detail in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Refer ence Guide OmniSwitch 6250 6450
11. 5 13 Copying the Running Configuration to the Working Directory 5 16 Rebooting from the Working Directory 00 ceceeeeseeeeeseecececececeecececeeeceeceeeeenes 5 18 Copying the Working Directory to the Certified Directory 5 21 Copying the Certified Directory to the Working Directory 5 22 Show Currently Used Configuration 5 23 SHOWS Witchy 5 24 Managing Redundancy in a Stack occ eeceesceeeeeeeceeeeececeeeeceeceeeececeeeeeeeees 5 25 Rebooting the Switch 5 25 Copying the Working Directory to the Certified Directory 5 26 Synchronizing the Primary and Secondary CMMs 5 27 Swapping the Primary CMM for the Secondary CMM 5 29 Show Currently Used Configuration 5 30 NI Module Behavior During Takeover 5 31 Using the USB Flash Drive 5 32 Transferring Files Using USB oo ce eeceeeceesecesecessesecececeeccecsceceecsesceseeeeseeess 5 32 Automatically Upgrading Code Using USB 5 32 Disaster Recovery Using USB ou ceseeseesccesecseceneceseceseeeseeeaeeneeeneceseees
12. Netscape for Sun OS 2 8 version 4 79 Netscape for HP UX 11 0 version 4 79 Secure Shell clients supported Any standard Secure Shell client Secure Shell Version 2 Secure Shell DSA public key authentication Password DSA Public Key SNMP clients supported Login Defaults Any standard SNMP manager such as HP Open View Access to managing the switch is always available for the admin user through the console port even if management access to the console port is disabled Parameter Description Command Default Session login attempts allowed session login attempt 3 attempts before the TCP connection is closed Time out period allowed for session login timeout 55 seconds session login before the TCP connection is closed Inactivity time out period The session timeout 4 minutes length of time the switch can remain idle during a login session before the switch will close the session OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 2 3 Login Defaults Logging Into the Switch The following table describes the maximum number of sessions allowed on an OmniSwitch Session OmniSwitch 6250 OmniSwitch 6450 Telnet v4 or v6 4 FTP v4 or v6 4 SSH SFTP v4 or v6 secure 8 sessions HTTP 4 Total Sessions 20 SNMP 50 page 2 4 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Logging Into the Switch Quick Steps for Logging Into the S
13. gt end user profile Profile3 no vlan range 7 This command removes VLANs 7 and 8 from Profile3 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 35 Setting Up End User Profiles Managing Switch User Accounts Associating a Profile With a User To associate a profile with a user enter the user command with the end user profile keywords and the relevant profile name For example gt user Customer2 end user profile Profile3 Profile3 is now associated with Customer2 When Customer2 logs into the switch Customer2 will have access to command areas port ranges and VLAN ranges specified by Profile3 The user information stored on an external server can include a profile name When the user attempts to log into the switch the switch will attempt to match the profile name to a profile stored on the switch page 9 36 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Setting Up End User Profiles Removing a Profile From the Configuration To delete a profile from the configuration enter the no form of the end user profile command with the name of the profile you want to delete For example gt no end user profile Profile3 Profile3 is deleted from the configuration Note If the profile name is associated with a user and the profile is deleted from the configuration the user will not have access to the switch OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June
14. In addition to global password settings the switch also includes global user lockout settings that deter mine when a user account is locked out of the switch and the length of time the user account remains locked See Configuring Password Policy Settings on page 9 16 and Configuring Global User Lockout Settings on page 9 22 for more information page 9 10 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Overview of User Accounts How User Settings Are Saved Unlike other settings on the switch user settings configured through the password command are saved to the switch configuration automatically These settings are saved in real time in the local user database At bootup the switch reads the database file for user information rather than the boot cfg file The write memory copy running config working or configuration snapshot commands are not required to save user or password settings over a reboot Note Password settings configured through the user password policy commands are not automatically saved to the switch configuration For information about using the write memory copy running config working and configuration snapshot commands see Chapter 5 Managing CMM Directory Content Chapter 7 Working With Configuration Files and the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide OmniS witch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 11 Creating a U
15. flash certified working newdir 173 17 173 12 gt 14 14 14 14 12 14 25 17 16 17 14 17 14 14 17 14 1 boot cfg Ksecu img Kbase img Kos img Removing Directory and its Contents The rmdir command removes the specified directory and all its contents If the following command is issued from the flash directory shown in the drawing on page 1 8 the working directory would be removed from the certified directory gt rm r flash certified working Note Your login account must have write privileges to execute the rmdir command OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 13 File and Directory Management Managing System Files File Commands The file commands apply to files located in the flash file directory and its sub directories Note Each file in any directory must have a unique name If you attempt to create or copy a file into a directory where a file of the same name already exists you will overwrite or destroy one of the files Creating or Modifying Files The switch has an editor for creating or modifying files The editor is invoked by entering the vi command and the name of the new file or existing file that you want to modify For example gt vi flash my_file This command puts the switch in editor mode for my_file If my_file does not already exist the switch will create the file in the flash directory In the editing mode
16. 1 Switch boots from certified directory by using factory configura tion settings Since the working and certified directories are the same it will be running from the working direc tory UII III W 2 Changes are made to the run ning configura tion stored in the running configura tion saved to the working direc tory and then saved to the certi fied directory 3 Power is inter rupted and the switch goes down 11111 W 4 Switch reboots from certified directory by using saved configura tion file in the cer tified directory Since the working and certified direc tories are the same it will be running from the working directory Running Configuration is Saved to Working then to the Certified Directory OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 7 CMM Files Managing CMM Directory Content Scenario 4 Roll back to Previous Version of Switch Software Later that year an upgraded image file is released from Alcatel Lucent The network administrator loads the new file through FTP to the working directory of the switch and reboots the switch from the working directory Since the switch is booted from the working directory the switch is running from the working directory After the reboot loads the new image file from the working directory it is discovered t
17. 6 Using the CLI Command Line Interface CLI is a text based configuration interface that allows you to configure switch applications and to view switch statistics Each CLI command applicable to the switch is defined in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide All command descriptions listed in the Reference Guide include command syntax definitions defaults usage guidelines example screen output and release history This chapter describes various rules and techniques that help use the CLI to its best advantage This chapter includes the following sections e CLI Overview on page 6 3 e Command Entry Rules and Syntax on page 6 4 e CLI Services on page 6 11 e Logging CLI Commands and Entry Results on page 6 17 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 1 Using the CLI CLI Specifications CLI Specifications The following table lists specifications for the Command Line Interface Platforms Supported OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Configuration Methods e Online configuration through real time sessions using CLI commands e Offline configuration using text file holding CLI commands Command Capture Feature Snapshot feature captures switch configurations in a text file User Service Features Command Line Editing Command Prefix Recognition CLI Prompt Option Command Help Keyword Completion Command History up to 30 commands Command Logging up to 100 commands de
18. CONFIGURATION STATUS Running CMM PRIMARY CMM Mode DUAL CMMs Current CMM Slot et Running configuration WORKING Certify Restore Status CERTIFY NEEDED SYNCHRONIZATION STATUS Flash Between CMMs SYNCHRONIZED Running Configuration NOT AVAILABLE Stacks Reload on Takeover ALL STACKs SW Activation The command returns the name of the directory the switch is currently running from working or certi fied and also displays the CMM which is currently controlling the switch primary or secondary It also displays whether the working and certified directories are the same and whether a synchronization is needed between the primary and secondaryCMM In addition the command output displays how many modules in the stack are reloaded in the event of a management module takeover Options include NONE ALL or a list of specific modules Refer to the following section for additional information on NI module behavior during a redundant CMM takeover The show running directory command is described in detail in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Refer ence Guide page 5 30 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content Managing Redundancy in a Stack and CMM NI Module Behavior During Takeover If there are no unsaved configuration changes and the flash directories on both the primary and secondary management modules have been synchronized through the copy flash synchro command no NIs is r
19. O O ha O Powe ee o2 Jags Address http 10 255 73 iastan html J Links gt 2 wxTarget 10 255 73 12 guration Help ut Telnet Log Out IP Site M Click configuration alip icme T TRIPRIPV2 Home Control RIP Not Loaded option to Global Statistics Routes RDP 8 OSPF display the Forwarding Global Parameter OSPF Not Loaded Static Interfaces configuration Summary 9 BGP4 Intert 5 page of Service ug Global Parameters PETE DoS Configuration View ARP Table Redistribution Create ARP a coor Click browser Route Mans Proxy Sequences Back button to Statistics Parameters th 6 WRRP WARP2 IPv4 Access Lists return to the a Global Configuration s Virtual Routers Home Page Statistics 3 Tracks Ports Track Associations Statistics 2 IP Site OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 11 11 Configuring the Switch With WebView Using WebView Configuration Page Feature configuration options are displayed in the drop down menus at the top of each page The same menus are displayed on every configuration page within a feature To configure a feature on the switch select a configuration option from the drop down menu There are two types of configuration pages in WebView a Global configuration page and a Table configurati
20. Qa O x Favortes gt H p 3 Address ja http 10 255 73 12 web content lagin html BE 9 a i Banner L Confi gura Alcatel Lucent w About Telnet Log Out tion Basal k Feature options ChassisMgmt Chassis Home Refresh Site Map Print Toolbar Health The Chassis Management feature provides detailed information about switch hardware and software including specific information for each switch in a stack if applicable The feature is also used to reboot reload a single switch an individual switch in a stack or all switches in a stack J View Configuration Area Ethemet So System Information Console Port IP Address 10 255 73 12 Name vxTarget 5 A Confi gura wh i Chassis Type OmniSwitch 6850 Stackable Chassis in i H Location Unknown tion Adiacendes Contact Alcatel Lucent http alcatel lucent comwps portal enterprise Feature UpTime 0008 00hours 1LOminutes 19seconds Running Version Working Software Version 6 1 5 393 01 Development April 24 2007 Certify Status Need to Certify Synchronization Status One CMM Networking E Time since last refresh 0 00 00 01 WebView Chassis Home Page Banner The following features are available in the WebView Banner e Options Brings up the User Options Page which is used to change the user login password e Save Config Bri
21. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE F Carnegie Mellon University Provided with this product is certain BOOTP Relay software developed by Carnegie Mellon University G Random c PR 30872 B Kesner created May 5 2000 PR 30872 B Kesner June 16 2000 moved batch_entropy_process to own task iWhirlpool to make code more efficient random c A strong random number generator Version 1 89 last modified 19 Sep 99 Copyright Theodore Ts o 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice and the entire permission notice in its entirety including the disclaimer of warranties 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission ALTERNATIVELY this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU Public License in which case the provisions of the GPL are required INSTEAD OF
22. accepted by the switch Authenticated Sets Authenticated Gets and Get Nexts Encrypted Sets Encrypted Gets and Get Nexts SNMP traps Refer to the table on page 3 10 for a complete list of traps and their definitions Maximum number of SNMP 50 sessions that can be established on an OmniSwitch SNMP Defaults The following table describes the default values of the SNMP protocol parameters Parameter Description Command Default Value Comments SNMP Management Station snmp station UDP port 162 SNMPv3 Enabled Community Strings snmp community map Enabled SNMP Security setting snmp security Privacy all highest security Trap filtering snmp trap filter Disabled Trap Absorption snmp trap absorption Enabled page 3 2 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using SNMP SNMP Defaults Parameter Description Command Default Value Comments Enables the forwarding of traps to snmp trap to webview Enabled WebView Enables or disables SNMP snmp authentication trap Disabled authentication failure trap forwarding OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 3 3 Quick Steps for Setting Up An SNMP Management Station Using SNMP Quick Steps for Setting Up An SNMP Management Station An SNMP Network Management Station NMS is a workstation configured to receive SNMP traps from the switch To set up an SNMP NMS by using the switch s CLI proceed as follows 1 Specify
23. 1 7 Directory Commands aeryen ar 1 8 Determining Your Location in the File Structure 1 8 Changing Directories eraran 1 9 Displaying Directory Contents 1 10 Making a New Directory 0 c cceccceescceessceeceeseeeeseceaeeeeseeeeseeceaeenseecsseeeseneneneenes 1 11 Displaying Directory Contents Including Subdirectories 1 12 Copying an Existing Directory i E ree 1 12 Removing a Directory its Content 1 13 Fale Commands ouders dec lees besos tees deh loch sed deh E Era 1 14 Creating or Modifying Files ea 1 14 Existing File as cei AE 1 14 Secure Copy an Easting FIE 1 15 Move an Existing File or Directory 1 15 Change File Attribute and Permissions 0 ccesesceseceseceseeeeceseeeseeeneeeeeeneees 1 16 Dele an Existing File dened 1 16 Managing Files Switches n i roa On 1 17 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 iii
24. Using SNMP SNMP MIB Information MIB Name Description Dependencies ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the Chassis Super SNMPv2 SMI MAC SERVER MIB vision MAC Server subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF ENTIT Y MIB ALCATEL IND 1 CHASSIS MIB ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of the Multicast Listener Discovery SNMPv2 SMI MLD MIB MLD subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF INET ADDRESS MIB IF MIB ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of the Network Time Protocol NTP sub SNMPv2 SMI NTP MIB system SNMPv2 TC ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of the user Partitioned Manager sub SNMPv2 SMI PARTITIONED MGR system SNMPv2 TC MIB SNMPv2 CONF Q BRIDGE MIB SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB SNMPv2 TC ALCATEL IND 1 Definition of managed objects for the Coronado SNMPv2 SMI PCAM MIB Layer3 Hardware Routing Engine SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND1 PIM Definitions of managed objects for the Protocol Inde SNMPv2 SMI MIB pendent Multicast Sparse Mode PIM SM and Proto SNMPv2 TC col Independent Multicast Dense Mode PIM DM SNMPv2 CONF subsystem ALCATEL IND 1 BASE ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the Policy Manager SNMPv2 SMI POLICY MIB subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the Port Manager SNMPv2 SMI PORT MIB subsystem SNMPv2 CONF IF MIB ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the Port Mirroring SNMPv2 SMI
25. ficiary to the Software License Agreement The provisions of the Software License Agreement as applied to MeterWorks RMON are made expressly for the benefit of Apptitude Inc and are enforceable by Apptitude Inc in addition to ALCATEL LUCENT IN NO EVENT SHALL APPTITUDE INC OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES INCLUDING COSTS OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SERVICES LOST PROFITS OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT Agranat Provided with this product is certain web server software EMWEB PRODUCT licensed from Agranat Systems Inc Agranat Agranat has granted to Alcatel Lucent certain warranties of performance which warranties or portion thereof Alcatel Lucent now extends to Licensee IN NO EVENT HOWEVER SHALL AGRANAT BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF LICENSEE OR A THIRD PARTY AGAINST LICENSEE ARIS ING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS DISTRIBUTION OF EMWEB PRODUCT TO LICENSEE In case of any termination of the Software License Agreement between Alcatel Lucent and Licensee Licensee shall immediately return the EMWEB Product and any back up copy to Alcatel Lucent and will certify to Alcatel Lucent in writing that all EMWEB Product components and any copies of the software have been returned or erased by the memory of Licensee s computer or made non
26. 2 5 Address ja http 10 255 73 12 web content login html gt gt i ir LAN Administration VLAN Mgmt VLAN SVLAN Description Admin Traffic Operational Flat STP 1x1 STP Authentication IP VLANTag Priority y Status Type Status Status Status Mobile Port a Spanning Tree Status 1 VLAN 1 Enabled Active Enabled Enabled Disabled Off Disabled 0 T T 1 T 1 J 73 VLAN 73 Enabled Active Enabled Enabled Disabled On Disabled o Link Aggregation ieee 5 Summary View Port Security Admin Status Flat STP Status 1x1 STP Status Add Add SVLAN Enabled Enabled Enabled z Modify Delete Refresh Help Apply Apply Apply Networking Security E 1 Time since last refresh 0 00 00 03 internet Table View Feature Expanded View Sorting Basic Sort Table entries can be sorted by column in ascending or descending order Initially tables are sorted on the first column in ascending order the number 1 appears in the first column To sort in descending order click on the column heading Click again to return to the ascending order To sort on a different column click on the column heading the table sorts on that column and the number 1 appears at the top of the column Click again to sort the data in descending order Note You can also click on the Flip icon at th
27. 4 WebView Options Save Configuration Help About Telnet Log Out vxTarget 10 2 Alcatel Lucent Physical Layer 2 Then 4 click on me VLAN Description Admin Status Operational status Y Flat STP Status x1 STP Status Authentication P E primary VLAN 34 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled or A Spanning Tree Click on 35 VLAN 35 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off second erint the Sort 25 32 VLAN 32 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off icon Link Aggregation B 33 VLAN 33 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off column headings 37 VLAN 37 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off E 38 VLAN 38 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off Port Security L L K 4 4 i 36 VLAN 36 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off 27 VLAN 27 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off 28 VLAN 28 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off a 26 VLAN 26 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off 30 VLAN 30 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off 1 VLAN 31 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled of 29 VLAN 29 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off 47 VLAN 47 Enabled Inactive En
28. All Rights reserved OmniSwitch TM is a trademark of Alcatel Lucent registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office You are now logged into the CLI For information about changing the welcome banner see Modifying the Login Banner on page 2 21 For information about changing the login prompt see Chapter 6 Using the CLI For information about setting up additional user accounts locally on the switch see Chapter 9 Managing Switch User Accounts OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 2 5 Overview of Switch Login Components Logging Into the Switch Overview of Switch Login Components Switch access components include access methods or interfaces and user accounts stored on the local user database in the switch and or on external authentication servers Each access method except the console port must be enabled or unlocked on the switch before users can access the switch through that interface OmniSwitch Server EEE remote user local user database Login via Secure Shell Telnet FTP HTTP or SNMP local user Login via the console port Switch Login Components Management Interfaces Logging into the switch may be done locally or remotely Remote connections may be secure or insecure depending on the method Management interfaces are enabled using the aaa authentication comm
29. Automatic Remote Configuration Download does not occur page 8 4 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Overview Overview The Automatic Remote Configuration feature provides the advantage of automatic download and installation of critical configuration and image files at initial bootup or when firmware upgrade is required for the OmniSwitch Automatic Remote Configuration download occurs when e There is no bootup configuration file boot cfg in the working directory of the switch e During a takeover or reboot on the new Primary unit or CMM e The initialization process of the switch is complete and the network interfaces or ports are ready e There is connectivity with a DHCP server through the default VLAN 1 or through a tagged VLAN 127 from a Management Switch using the Nearest Edge mode operation e There is connectivity with TFTP file server The following sections provide more information about the automatic configuration and download process Basic Operation Automatic remote configuration process is initialized on the OmniSwitch if the boot cfg file is not found in the working directory of the switch The following illustration shows the basic setup required for Automatic Remote Configuration Download operation Provides Switch IP TFTP server IP and instruction file name DHCP Network Server with Router or Gateway Alcatel Lucent Om
30. C Allen I Holub All rights reserved University of Toronto Provided with this product is a code that is modified specifically for use with the STEVIE editor Permis sion is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose on any computer system and to redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The author is not responsible for the consequences of use of this software no matter how awful even if they arise from defects in it 2 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented either by explicit claim or by omission 3 Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software Version 1 5 Copyright C 1986 by University of Toronto and written by Henry Spencer AA Free OpenBSD Copyright c 1982 1986 1990 1991 1993 The Regents of University of California All Rights Reserved page A 16 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 B SNMP Trap Information This appendix lists the supported SNMP traps along with their descriptions OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 1 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table The following table provides information on all SNMP traps supported by the switch Each row includes the trap name its ID number any objects if applicable its command family and a description of the condition the SNMP agent in the switch is reporting to the
31. Enabled Enabled Delete Refresh Apply Apply Apply Table Configuration Page OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 11 13 Configuring the Switch With WebView Using WebView Adding a New Entry To add a new entry to the table 1 Click Add on the Configuration page The Add window appears e g Add IP Static Route 2 Complete the fields then click Apply The new configuration takes effect immediately and the new entry appears in the table Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add additional entries http 10 255 73 12 Add LAN Microsoft Internet Explorer Add VLANs VLAN Description 7 Admin Status Enabled gt STP Status Flat STP Status Enabled gt 1x1 STP Status Enabled Authentication Disabled VLAN Tag Mobile Port Status Disabled Restore Cancel Help g jpeg iment _ 2 Add Window page 11 14 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using WebView Configuring the Switch With WebView Modifying an Existing Entry To modify an existing entry 1 Click on the checkbox to the left of the entry on the Configuration page and click Modify The Modify window appears e g Modify IP Static Route The current configuration is displayed in each field 2 Modify the applicable field s then click Apply If successful the Modify window disappears The new configuration takes effect immediately and the modified entry ap
32. Note Optional To verify the SNMP Management Station enter the show snmp station command The display is similar to the one shown here gt show snmp station ipAddress udpPort status protocol user 210 1 2 1 162 enable v3 usermark2 The usermark2 account is established on the SNMP station at IP address 210 1 2 1 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 3 5 Quick Steps for Setting Up Trap Filters Using SNMP Filtering by Individual Traps The following example enables trap filtering for the coldstart warmstart linkup and linkdown traps The identification numbers for these traps are 0 1 2 and 3 When trap filtering is enabled these traps are filtered This means that the switch does not pass them through to the SNMP management station All other traps are passed through 1 Specify the IP address for the SNMP management station and the trap identification numbers gt show snmp trap filter 210 1 2 101 2 3 gt snmp trap filter 300 1 13 4 Note Optional You can verify which traps will not pass through the filter by entering the snmp trap filter command The display is similar to the one shown here gt show snmp trap filter ipAddress list The SNMP management station with the IP address of 210 1 2 1 will not receive trap numbers 0 1 2 and 3 For trap numbers refer to the Using SNMP For Switch Sec
33. SNMPv2 CONF BRIDGE MIB IP FORWARD MIB IP Forwarding Table MIB SNMPv2 SMI RFC 2096 SNMPv2 TC IP MIB SNMPv2 CONF IP MIB 2011 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the SNMPv2 SMI Internet Protocol by using SMIv2 Includes Internet SNMPv2 TC work Control Message Protocol ICMP SNMPv2 CONF IPv6 TC RFC 2465 This MIB defines the management information for SNMPv2 SMI IPv6 Textual conventions and general group SNMPv2 TC IPv6 ICMP MIB Management Information base for IPv6 Group SNMPv2 SMI RFC 2466 SNMPv2 CONF IPv6 MIB IPv6 TCP MIB Management Information Base for the Transmission SNMPv2 SMI RFC 2452 Control Protocol SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF IPv6 UDP MIB Management Information Base for User Datagram SNMPv2 SMI RFC 2454 Protocol SNMPv2 CONF IPv6 TC MAU MIB Management Information for IEEE 802 3 Medium SNMPv2 SMI RFC 2668 Attachment Units SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF PIM MIB Protocol Independent Multicast MIB for IPv4 SNMPv2 SMI RFC 2934 SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF IF MIB IPMROUTE STD MIB Q BRIDGE MIB The Bridge MIB Extension module for managing Pri SNMPv2 SMI 2674 ority and Multicast Filtering defined by IEEE 802 1D SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB BRIDGE MIB P BRIDGE MIB page 3 18 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using SNMP SNMP MIB Information MIB Name Description Dependencies RIPv2 MIB Routing Information Protocol RIP Version 2 MIB SNMPv2 SMI RE
34. The scp command prompts you to enter the admin password On entering the admin password the names and the path of the files being copied will be displayed SCP is not supported between OmniSwitch and Windows in the current release Note You must have write privileges in order to execute the sep command Move an Existing File or Directory The move and mv commands have the same function and use the same syntax Use these commands to move an existing file or directory to another location You can specify the path and name for the file or directory being moved If no path is specified the command assumes the current path You can also specify a path and a new name for the file or directory being moved If no name is specified the existing name will be used Note Your login account must have write privileges to use the move or mv command Flash Directory Certified Directory Testfiles Directory Files File Working Directory Network Directory testfile2 Files File policy cfg OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 15 File and Directory Management Managing System Files In this first example the user current directory is the flash directory The following command syntax moves the testfile2 file from the user created testfiles directory into the working directory as shown in the illustration above The screen displays a warning that the file is being renamed or in this case redirected gt
35. Using SNMP for Switch Management The Alcatel Lucent switch can be configured using the Command Line Interface CLI SNMP or the WebView device management tool When configuring the switch by using SNMP an NMS application such as Alcatel Lucent s OmniVista or HP OpenView is used Although MIB browsers vary depending on which software package is used they all have a few things in common The browser must compile the Alcatel Lucent switch MIBs before it can be used to manage the switch by issuing requests and reading statistics Each MIB must be checked for dependencies and the MIBs must be compiled in the proper order Once the browser is properly installed and the MIBs are compiled the browser software can be used to manage the switch The MIB browser you use depends on the design and management requirements of your network Detailed information on working with MIB browsers is beyond the scope of this manual However you must know the configuration requirements of your MIB browser or other NMS installation before you can define the system to the switch as an SNMP station Setting Up an SNMP Management Station An SNMP management station is a workstation configured to receive SNMP traps from the switch You must identify this station to the switch by using the snmp station CLI command The following information is needed to define an SNMP management station e The IP address of the SNMP management station device The UDP destination p
36. Using the CLI Command Entry Rules and Syntax Command Entry Rules and Syntax When you start a session on the switch you can execute CLI commands as soon as you are logged in The following rules apply Enter only one command per line No command can be extended across multiple lines Passwords are case sensitive Commands are not case sensitive The switch accepts commands entered in upper case lower case or a combination of both Press Enter to complete each command line entry To use spaces within a user defined text string enclose the entry in quotation marks If you receive a syntax error that is ERROR Invalid entry double check your command as written and re enter it exactly as described in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Be sure to include all syntax option parameters To exit the CLI type exit and press Enter Text Conventions The following table contains text conventions and usage guidelines for CLI commands as they are documented in this manual bold text Indicates basic command and keyword syntax Example show snmp station Quotation Marks Used to enclose text strings that contain spaces Example vlan 2 name new test vlan OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 4 Command Entry Rules and Syntax Using the CLI Using Show Commands The CLI contains show commands that allow you to view configuration and switch status on
37. flash A screen similar to the following will be displayed rw 327 Sep 13 16 46 boot params drw 1024 Sep 13 16 46 certified drw 1024 Sep 13 16 45 working rw 64000 Sep 13 16 46 swlog1 log rw 64000 Sep 8 21 24 swlog2 log drw 1024 Sep 13 16 45 switch drw 1024 Sep 10 17 34 network rw 256 Sep 13 16 41 drw 1024 Jun 22 1986 tk dir OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 17 File and Directory Management Managing System Files Utility Commands The utility commands include freespace fsck and newfs These commands are used to check memory and delete groups of files Displaying Free Memory Space The freespace command displays the amount of free memory space available for use in the switch file system You may issue this command from any location in the switch directory tree gt freespace flash 16480256 bytes free Performing a File System Check The fsck command performs a file system check and can repair any errors found It displays diagnostic information in the event of file corruption Note that the fsck command only applies to the primary and secondary CMM in an OmniSwitch chassis based switch or the primary and secondary switch in an OmniSwitch stack There are two options available with the fsck command no repair and repair Specifying the no repair option performs only the file system check on the flash directory whereas specifying the repair option performs
38. http server command 11 3 http ssl command 11 4 https service esd alcatel lucent com portal page portal ESer vice LicenseGeneration 1 36 https portcommand 11 4 image files 5 3 ip domain lookup command 2 24 ip domain name command 2 24 ip name server command 2 24 K keywords 6 6 L LDAP accounting servers Authenticated Switch Access 10 12 LDAP servers for switch security 10 4 logging into the switch application examples 2 5 login defaults 2 3 specifications 2 3 Index 2 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 login banner 2 21 login settings verify information about 2 25 ls command 1 6 1 10 6 12 ls r command 1 13 M Management Information Bases see MIBs MD5 authentication 3 11 memory 1 18 MIBs enterprise 3 21 industry standard 3 17 mkdir command 1 11 more command 6 20 7 9 mv command 1 30 network administrator user accounts application examples 9 7 Network Management Station see NMS Network Time Protocol see NTP NI modules behavior during takeover 5 31 NMS 3 8 NTP 4 1 application examples 4 3 configuring 4 9 client 4 9 defaults 4 2 overview 4 5 specifications 4 2 stratum 4 6 using in a network 4 6 ntp broadcast command 4 9 ntp broadcast delay command 4 9 NTP client broadcast delay 4 9 broadcast mode 4 9 ntp client command 4 3 4 9 NTP Configuration verify information about 4 13 ntp key command 4 12 ntp key load command 4 12 NTP server designating 4 10 mini
39. much larger number of secondary servers and clients connected by a common network In order to do this a distributed network clock synchronization protocol is required which can read a server clock transmit the reading to one or more clients and adjust each client clock as required Protocols that do this include NTP Note The OmniSwitch can only be an NTP client in an NTP network It cannot act as an NTP server OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 4 5 NTP Overview Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP Stratum Stratum is the term used to define the relative proximity of a node in a network to a time source such as a radio clock Stratum 1 is the server connected to the time source itself In most cases the time source and the stratum 1 server are in the same physical location An NTP client or server connected to a stratum 1 source would be stratum 2 A client or server connected to a stratum 2 machine would be stratum 3 and so on as demonstrated in the diagram below UTC Time Source Stratum 1 Stratum 2 Stratum 3 The farther away from stratum 1 a device is the more likely there will be discrepancies or errors the time adjustments done by NTP A list of stratum 1 and 2 sources available to the public can be found on the Internet Note It is not required that NTP be connected to an officially recognized time source for example a radio clock NTP can use any time source to synchroniz
40. nounced 4 6 OARA 4 8 Cont Surin gs NER 4 9 Configuring the OmniSwitch as a Client 0 ee eeecessesceeseeeseeeseeeeesececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 9 NTP Servers 4 10 Using 4 12 Verifying NTP Configuration 4 13 Chapter 5 Managing CMM Directory Content 5 1 5 1 CMM Specifications 5 2 USB Flash Drive Specifications A ERARA A a 5 2 CMMUPIIOSS tah 5 3 CMM Software Directory Structure 5 3 Where is the Switch Running From iine 5 4 Software Rollback Feature a E A E 5 4 Software Rollback Configuration Scenarios for a Single Switch 5 5 Redundancy 5 9 5 a 5 9 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Contents Chapter 6 Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant 5 13 Rebooting the Switch
41. the switch uses command keystrokes similar to any vi UNIX text editor For example to quit the edit session and save changes to the file type ZZ to return to the CLI prompt Copy an Existing File Use the cp command to copy an existing file You can specify the path and filename for the original file being copied as well as the path and filename for the new copy being created If no path is specified the command assumes the current directory The following syntax copies the Kos img file from the working directory to the certified directory gt cp flash working Kos img flash certified This second example presumes that the user current directory is the flash working directory Here it is not necessary to specify a path for the original file A copy of Kos img will appear in the flash certified directory once the following command is executed gt cp Kos img flash certified This third example presumes that the user current directory is the flash directory To copy a file into the same directory where the file currently exists the user must specify a new filename The following command will result in the Kbase img file being copied into the flash working directory under the new name of newfile img Both Kos img and its copy newfile img will appear in the flash working directory gt cp flash working Kbase img newfile img In these examples a new file will be written to the specified or assumed path with the new filename If you
42. 5 17 Z Zmodem 1 25 Index 5 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Index 6 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013
43. 97 E Enabled nactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off Disabled Link Aggregation 98 VLAN 98 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off Disabled A 99 VLAN 99 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off Disabled Bi 100 VLAN 100 Enabled inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off Disabled EER Summary View Click Next to view the nomh mme EX group of entries Note If the Prev or Next arrow centered below the table is not visible use the scrollbar Admin Status Flat STP Status 1x1 STP Status Add Add SVLAN Enabled gt Enabled Enabled Modify Delete Refresh Apply Apply Networking aE Apply Policy Security System 4 Time since last refresh 0 00 00 03 2 Table Paging Feature page 11 22 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using WebView Configuring the Switch With WebView Adjacencies WebView provides a graphical representation of all AMAP supported Alcatel Lucent switches and IP phones adjacent to the switch The following information for each device is also listed e IP address e MAC address e Remote slot port By clicking on a device the Web based device manager if available is displayed for that device If a Web based device manager is not available a Telnet session can be launched A route to the adjacent switch must exist in the IP routing table for a Web based device manager or Telnet session to be launched T
44. AUTO ATTRIB ALIAS CMM Chassis Supervision COPY WRITE POWER TEMP THRESHOLD TAKEOVER SYSTEM SHOW RRM RPUT RLS RGET RELOAD RDF RCP NO DEBUG CONFIGURE Source Learning SOURCE LEARNING SHOW PORT SECURITY NO MAC ADDRESS TABLE DEBUG Spanning Tree SHOW BRIDGE VLAN VLAN SHOW NO MAC ADDRESS TABLE DEBUG Link Aggregation STATIC SHOW NO LINKAGG LACP Miscellaneous HTTP TRACEROUTE SNMP SHOW RMON PORT POLICY PING NO MAC RANGE MAC LANPOWER IP IPV6 ICMP HTTPS HRE HEALTH GMAP DEBUG CLEAR ARP AMAP 802 1X AAA amp Configuration USER SHOW PASSWORD NO END USER DEBUG Manager CONFIGURATION AAA Interface TRAP SHOW NO INTERFACES FLOW DEBUG 10GIG page 6 7 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using the CLI Command Help Command Set Name Commands TP Routing amp Multicast DEBUG TRACEROUTE6 SHOW PING6 NO IPV6 IP CLEAR QoS SHOW QOS POLICY NO DEBUG Debug UPDATE SHOW NO DEBUG OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 8 Command Help Using the CLI Tutorial for Building a Command Using Help The Help feature allows you to figure out syntax for a CLI command by using a series of command line inquiries together with some educated guesses If you do not know the correct CLI command you can use the Help feature to determine the syntax This tutorial shows you how to use help to find the CLI syntax t
45. CD About This Guide User Manual CD Some products are shipped with documentation included on a User Manual CD that accompanies the switch This CD also includes documentation for other Alcatel Lucent data enterprise products All products are shipped with a Product Documentation Card that provides details for downloading docu mentation for all OmniSwitch and other Alcatel Lucent data enterprise products All documentation is in PDF format and requires the Adobe Acrobat Reader program for viewing Acro bat Reader freeware is available at www adobe com Note In order to take advantage of the documentation CD s global search feature it is recommended that you select the option for searching PDF files before downloading Acrobat Reader freeware To verify that you are using Acrobat Reader with the global search option look for the following button in the toolbar Note When printing pages from the documentation PDFs de select Fit to Page if it is selected in your print dialog Otherwise pages may print with slightly smaller margins Technical Support An Alcatel Lucent service agreement brings your company the assurance of 7x24 no excuses technical support You will also receive regular software updates to maintain and maximize your Alcatel Lucent product s features and functionality and on site hardware replacement through our global network of highly qualified service delivery partners Additionally with 24 hour a day access to
46. Configuration Files Working With Configuration Files Example Snapshot File Text The following is the text of a sample snapshot file created with the configuration snapshot all command Chassis system name FujiCmm mac alloc 91 0 1 00 d0 95 6b 09 41 Configuration VLAN VLAN SL IP ip service all icmp unreachable net unreachable disable ip interface vlan 1 address 10 255 211 70 mask 255 255 255 192 vlan 1 mtu 1500 ifindex 1 IPMS AAA aaa authentication default aaa authentication console PARTM 802 1x QOS local local Policy manager Session manager SNMP snmp security no security snmp community map mode off IP route manager static route 0 0 0 0 mask 0 0 0 0 gateway 10 255 211 65 metric 1 RIP IP multicast IPv6 RIPng Health monitor Interface Link Aggregate VLAN AGG 802 10 Spanning tree bridge mode 1x1 Bridging source learning chassis hardware Bridging Port mirroring UDP Relay Server load balance System service Web AMAP Module Lan Power NTP RDP page 7 12 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Working With Configuration Files Creating Snapshot Configuration Files This file shows configuration settings for the Chassis IP AAA SNMP IP route manager Spanning tree and Bridging services Each of these services hav
47. Gets and Get Nexts You can configure different levels of SNMP security by entering snmp security followed by the command parameter for the desired security level For example the following syntax sets the SNMP security level as authentication all as defined in the table below gt snmp security authentication all The command parameters shown in the following table define security from the lowest level no security to the highest level traps only as shown Security Level SNMP requests accepted by the switch no security All SNMP requests are accepted authentication set v2 Gets Non authenticated v3 Gets and Get Nexts Authenticated v3 Sets Gets and Get Nexts Encrypted v3 Sets Gets and Get Nexts authentication all Authenticated v3 Sets Gets and Get Nexts Encrypted v3 Sets Gets and Get Nexts privacy set Authenticated v3 Gets and Get Nexts Encrypted v3 Sets Gets and Get Nexts privacy all Encrypted v3 Sets Gets and Get Nexts traps only All SNMP requests are rejected page 3 12 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using SNMP Working with SNMP Traps Working with SNMP Traps The SNMP agent in the switch has the ability to send traps to the management station It is not required that the management station request them Traps are messages alerting the SNMP manager to a condition on the network A trap message is sent through a PDU issued from the switch s network man
48. Guide June 2013 SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name Objects Family Description 29 mirrorUnlikeNi mirmonPrima pmm The mirroring configuration is rySlot deleted due to the swapping of mirmonPrimary different NI board type The Port Port Mirroring session which was mitroringSlot active on a slot cannot continue mirroringPort with the insertion of different NI mirMonErrorNi type in the same slot mirmonPrimarySlot Slot of mirrored or monitored interface mirmonPrimaryPort Port of mirrored or monitored interface mirroringSlot Slot of mirroring interface mirroringPort Port of mirroring interface mirMonErrorNi The NI slot number mirMonError The Error returned by the NI which failed to configure Mirroring Monitoring 30 sIPCAMStatusTrap sIPCAMSlot bridge The trap status of the Layer 2 Number pesudoCAM for this NI sIPCAMSlice Number sIPCAMStatus sIPCAMSlotNumber tThe slot number of this Coronado switching routing ASIC sIPCAMSliceNumber tThe slice number of this Coronado switching routing ASIC sIPCAMStatus The Layer 2 pesudoCAM status of this Coronado switching routing ASIC 31 unused N A N A 32 unused N A N A 34 ifMauJabberTrap ifMauJabber interface This trap is sent whenever a man State aged interface MAU enters the jabber state ifMauJabberState The value other 1 is returned if the jabber state is not 2 3 or 4 The agent MUST always return other 1 for MAU type
49. IP Home Refresh SiteMap Print Home Global Parameters About IP onfigurati Internet Protocol IP is a network layer Layer 3 protocol that contains addressing information and some Page pe ct raion Parae ET control information that enables packets to be forwarded IP is documented in RFC 791 and is the primary Feature Biro oai network layer protocol in the Internet protocol suite Along with the Transmission Control Protocol TCP IP Default TTL 64 represents the heart of the Internet protocols IP has two primary responsibilities providing connectionless Overview IP Forwarding Yes best effort delivery of datagrams through an internetwork and providing fragmentation and reassembly of datagrams to support data links with different maximum transmission unit MTU sizes More Dynamic Routing Protocol Protocol Loading OSPF Protocol Load Stats Not Loaded NotLoaded gt NotLoaded BGP Not Loaded Apply Restore Apply Restore Apply Restore RIP Not Loaded Administrative State OSPF Disabled not loaded BGP Disabled not loaded RIP Disabled not loaded http 10 255 73 12jipicontentjip_ctxt html agp internet 2 IP Home Page page 11 10 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using WebView Configuring the Switch With WebView 10 255 73 12 Microsoft Inti File Edit View Favorites Tools
50. Location FTP SFTP TFTP Server Download location flash working directory Debug configuration file Script file File name AlcatelDebug cfg Location FTP SFTP TFTP Server Download location flash working directory File name Any name Location FTP SFTP TFTP Server Download location flash working directory Firmware version Firmware or image files OS_ _ _RO1 _ represents version number File name extension img represents image filename Location FTP SFTP TFTP Server Download location flash working directory File download server Primary FTP SFTP TFTP Server Backup server for file download Secondary FTP SFTP TFTP Server Password for FTP SFTP Server Same as username OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 8 3 Quick Steps for Automatic Remote Configuration Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Quick Steps for Automatic Remote Configuration 1 Configure the DHCP server in the network to provide IP address gateway and TFTP server addresses to the OmniSwitch DHCP client 2 Store the instruction file on the TFTP server 3 Store the configuration image and script files on the primary and or secondary FTP SFTP servers 4 When the OmniSwitch is integrated in to the network as a new device with no boot cfg file in the working directory the automatic remote configuration process is initiated 5 A DHCP client is automatically co
51. Mac Forced Forwarding license PPPoE If a unit is inserted in the stack without metro license and primary unit has a metro license new added unit will be put into Pass Thru Unit in Pass thru can be recovered by installing the metro license If the unit is inserted in the stack with metro license and primary unit does not have metro license newly added unit will be put into Pass Thru Unit in Pass thru can be recovered by removing the Metro license If unit is inserted in the stack with metro license and primary unit has metro license newly added unit will not be put into Pass thru When removing license from primary element it will be removed for all stack elements GIG Enables gigabit interfaces on No reboot required lite models Copper ports will be upgraded to provide gigabit capacity Individual units in a stack can be upgraded OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 37 Installing Software Licenses Managing System Files License Features Installation Notes 10GIG Enables 10 Gigabit non combo No reboot required SFP ports Non combo SFP ports will be upgraded to provide 10G capacity Individual units can be upgraded Temporary Unlocks any licensed feature for No license file required can be enabled a period of 15 days with CLI Can only be unlocked if no boot cfg file exists Can be re installed after expiration as long as no boot cfg file exists
52. Model USM for version 3 of the SNMPv2 SMI SM MIB RFC 2574 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv3 SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 COMF SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB SNMPv2 MIB Management Information Base for Version 2 of the SNMPv2 SMI RFC 1907 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF SNMP VIEW BASED _ View based Access Control Model VACM for the SNMPv2 SMI ACM MIB RFC 2575 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 COMF SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB TCP MIB 2012 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the SNMPv2 SMI Transmission Control Protocol by using SMIv2 SNMPv2 CONF TUNNEL MIB IP Tunnel MIB SNMPv2 SMI RFC 2667 SNMPvy2 TC SNMPv2 CONF IF MIB UDP MIB 2013 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the User SNMPv2 SMI Datagram Protocol by using SMIv2 SNMPv2 CONF page 3 20 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using SNMP SNMP MIB Information Enterprise Proprietary MIBs The following table lists the supported enterprise proprietary MIBs Note The ALCATEL IND1 BASE MIB is required for all MIBs listed in this table MIB Name Description Dependencies ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the Authentication SNMPv2 SMI AAA MIB Authorization and Accounting AAA subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMP v2 CONF ALCATEL INDI BASE This module provides base definitions for modules SNMPv2 SMI developed to manage Alcatel Lucent Internetworking net
53. Naming Options When the snapshot syntax does not include a file name the snapshot file is created using the default file name asc n snap Here the character holds the place of a number indicating the order in which the snapshot file name is generated For example the following syntax may generate a file named 1 gt configuration snapshot all Subsequent snapshot files without a name specified in the command syntax will become asc 2 snap asc 3 snap and so on The following command produces a snapshot file with the name testfile snap gt configuration snapshot testfile snap Editing Snapshot Files Snapshot files can be viewed edited and reused as a configuration file You also have the option of editing the snapshot file directly using the switch s Vi text editor or you may upload the snapshot file to a text editing software application on your workstation The snapshot file contains both command lines and comment lines You can identify the comment lines because they each begin with the exclamation point character Comment lines are ignored by the switch when a snapshot file is being applied Comment lines are located at the beginning of the snapshot file to form a sort of header They also appear intermittently throughout the file to identify switch features or applications that apply to the commands that follow them OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 7 11 Creating Snapshot
54. OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCURE MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE OpenLDAP is a trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation Copyright 1999 2000 The OpenLDAP Foundation Redwood City California USA All Rights Reserved Permission to copy and distributed verbatim copies of this document is granted page A 4 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Software License and Copyright Statements Third Party Licenses and Notices Linux Linux is written and distributed under the GNU General Public License which means that its source code is freely distributed and available to the general public GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 675 Mass Ave Cambridge MA 02139 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is fr
55. Obtain a long listing on the remote machine get Retrieve a file from the remote machine hash Print the hash symbol for every block of data transferred This command toggles hash enabling and disabling help Displays a list of FTP commands and their definitions Is Display summary listing of the current directory on the remote host put Send a file to the remote machine pwd Display the current working directory on the remote host quit Close session gracefully remotehelp List the commands that the remote FTP server supports user Send new user information Ipwd Display the current working directory on the local host mput Allows for the transfer of multiple files out of the local machine meget Allows for the transfer of multiple files into the local machine prompt Toggles the query for use with the mput and mget commands 115 Lists the contents files and directories of the local directory Icd Change to a new local directory user Sends new user information If you lose communications while running FTP you may receive a message similar to the following Waiting for reply Hit to abort In this case you can press Crtl C to abort the session or wait until the communication failure is resolved and the FTP transfer can continue Note You must use the binary mode bin to transfer files via FTP Using Secure Shell FTP 1 Log on to the OmniSwitch and issue the sftp CLI command The command syntax req
56. OmniSwitch connects to a Secure Shell server the server accepts the connection and responds by sending back an identification string The client will parse the server s identi fication string and send an identification string of its own The purpose of the identification strings is to validate that the attempted connection was made to the correct port number The strings also declare the protocol and software version numbers This information is needed on both the client and server sides for debugging purposes At this point the protocol identification strings are in human readable form Later in the authentication process the client and the server switch to a packet based binary protocol which is machine readable only Algorithm and Key Exchange The OmniSwitch Secure Shell server is identified by one or several host specific DSA keys Both the client and server process the key exchange to choose a common algorithm for encryption signature and compression This key exchange is included in the Secure Shell transport layer protocol It uses a key agreement to produce a shared secret that cannot be determined by either the client or the server alone The key exchange is combined with a signature and the host key to provide host authentication Once the exchange is completed the client and the server turn encryption on using the selected algorithm and key The following elements are supported Host Key Type DSA Cipher Algorithms AES Bl
57. PORT MIRRORING and Monitoring subsystem SNMPv2 TC MONITORING MIB SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the Quality of Ser SNMPv2 SMI QOS MIB vice QoS subsystem SNMPv2 TC ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the Router Discov SNMPv2 SMI RDP MIB ery Protocol RDP subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 3 23 SNMP MIB Information Using SNMP MIB Name Description Dependencies ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the Routing Infor SNMPv2 SMI RIP MIB mation Protocol RIP subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the Routing Infor SNMPv2 SMI RIPNG MIB mation Protocol RIPng subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF IPv6 TC ALCATEL IND1 Definitions of managed objects for the User Session SNMPv2 SMI SESSION MGR MIB Manager subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND1 Definitions of managed objects for the Simple Net SNMPv2 SMI SNMP AGENT MIB work Management Protocol SNMP Agent sub SNMPv2 TC system SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND1 Definitions of the managed objects for Stack Manager SNMPv2 SMI STACK MANAGER Chassis Stack Manager Statistics and Stack Manager SNMPv2 TC Traps SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND1 Definitions of managed objects for the System Ser SNMPv2 SMI SYSTEM MIB vices subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND1 Definitions of managed objects for the Omn
58. QUENTIAL SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OR LOST PROFITS EVEN IF ALCATEL LUCENT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDEN TAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION TO INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES MAY NOT APPLY TO LICENSEE 7 Export Control This product is subject to the jurisdiction of the United States Licensee may not export or reexport the Licensed Files without complying with all United States export laws and regula tions including but not limited to 1 obtaining prior authorization from the U S Department of Commerce if a validated export license is required and ii obtaining written assurances from licensees if required 8 Support and Maintenance Except as may be provided in a separate agreement between Alcatel Lucent and Licensee if any Alcatel Lucent is under no obligation to maintain or support the copies of the Licensed Files made and distributed hereunder and Alcatel Lucent has no obligation to furnish Licensee with any further assistance documentation or information of any nature or kind 9 Term This License Agreement is effective upon Licensee opening this package and shall continue until terminated Licensee may terminate this License Agreement at any time by returning the Licensed Materi als and all copies thereof and extracts therefrom to Alcatel Lucent and certifying to Alcatel Lucent in writ
59. SNMP management station No Trap Name Objects Family Description 0 coldStart none chassis The SNMP agent in the switch is reinitiating and its configuration may have been altered 1 warmsStart none chassis The SNMP agent in the switch is reinitiating itself and its configu ration is unaltered 2 linkDown IfIndex interface The SNMP agent in the switch ifAdminStatus recognizes a failure in one of the ifOperStatus communications links configured for the switch IfIndex A unique value greater than zero for each interface It is recommended that values are assigned con tiguously starting from 1 The value for each interface sub layer must remain constant at least from one re ini tialization of the entity s network management system to the next re initialization ifAdminStatus The desired state of the interface The testing 3 state indicates that no operational packets can be passed When a managed system initializes all interfaces start with ifAdminStatus in the down 2 state As a result of either explicit management action or per configuration information retained by the managed system ifAdminStatus is then changed to either the up 1 or testing 3 states or remains in the down 2 state ifOperStatus The current operational state of the interface The testing 3 state indicates that no operational packets can be passed If ifAdminStatus is down 2 then ifOperStatus should be down 2 If ifAdminStatus is change
60. Security Switch Security Specifications The following table describes the maximum number of sessions allowed on an OmniSwitch Session OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Telnet v4 or v6 4 FTP v4 or v6 4 SSH SFTP v4 or v6 secure 8 sessions HTTP 4 Total Sessions 20 SNMP 50 Note An IPv6 client session for Telnet FTP SSH SFTP and SNMP is supported on an OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Security Defaults Access to managing the switch is always available for the admin user through the console port even if management access to the console port is disabled for other users page 10 2 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch Security Switch Security Overview Switch Security Overview Switch security features increase the security of the basic switch login process by allowing management only through particular interfaces for users with particular privileges Login information and privileges can be stored on the switch and or an external server depending on the type of external server you are using and how you configure switch access The illustration here shows the components of switch security End User login request RADIUS LDAP or ACE management interface 3 Server local user Servers supply login infor E database mation about the user User privilege information is also 2 available on RADIUS and OmniSwitch LDAP servers Au
61. Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 23 Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant Managing CMM Directory Content Show Switch Files The files currently installed on a switch can be viewed using the show microcode command This command displays the files currently in the specified directory To display files on a switch enter the show microcode command with a directory as shown gt show microcode certified Release Package KFbase img KFeni img KFos img KFsecu img z311 R01 311 R01 312 R01 7372509 Alcatel Lucent Base Software 2486643 Alcatel Lucent NI Software 941331 Alcatel Lucent OS 371661 Alcatel Lucent Security Management If no directory is specified the files that have been loaded into the running configuration are shown page 5 24 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content Managing Redundancy in a Stack and CMM Managing Redundancy in a Stack and CMM The following section describe circumstances that the user should be aware of when managing the CMM directory structure on a stack with redundant CMMs It also includes descriptions of the CLI commands designed to synchronize software between the primary and secondary CMMs Rebooting the Switch When you reload the primary switch CMM in a stack the secondary switch takes over the primary function If the stack is comprised of three or more switches then the original
62. The instruction file is the initial file required for the automatic remote configuration process to occur The instruction file is stored in the TFTP server with the alu extension For further details see Instruction File on page 8 13 Firmware upgrade files The firmware files or image files differ for different OmniSwitch platforms These image files contain executable code which provides support for the system Ethernet ports and network functions For further details see Firmware Upgrade Files on page 8 15 Bootup configuration file The file contains bootup configuration information for the switch The bootup configuration file stores the network configuration parameters For further details see Bootup Configuration File on page 8 15 Debug Configuration file The debug configuration file stores the default debug configuration information For further details see Debug Configuration File on page 8 16 Script file The script file consists of commands to be performed on the switch so that appropriate actions can be taken on the downloaded files For further details see Script File on page 8 16 Instruction File The instruction file is the initial file required for automatic remote configuration process to occur The instruction file is stored in the TFTP server with the alu extension The instruction file contains user information such as switch ID file version firmware version image file names and
63. The lockout threshold number specifies the number of failed login attempts allowed during any given lockout window period of time see Configuring the User Lockout Window on page 9 23 For exam ple if the lockout window is set for 30 minutes and the threshold number is set for 3 failed login attempts then the user is locked out when 3 failed login attempts occur within a 30 minute time frame By default the lockout threshold number is set to 0 this means that there is no limit to the number of failed login attempts allowed even if a lockout window time period exists To configure a lockout thresh old number use the user lockout threshold command For example gt user lockout threshold 3 A locked user account is automatically unlocked when the lockout duration time see Configuring the User Lockout Duration Time on page 9 25 is reached or the admin user manually unlocks the user account page 9 24 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Configuring Global User Lockout Settings Configuring the User Lockout Duration Time The user lockout duration time specifies the number of minutes a user account remains locked until it is automatically unlocked by the switch This period of time starts when the user account is locked out of the switch At any point during the lockout duration time the admin user can still manually unlock the user account By default the user lockout
64. Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name Objects Family Description 48 pethPsePortPowerMaintenanceStatus pethPsePortPow module Indicates the status of the power erMainte maintenance signature for inline nanceStatus power pethPsePortPowerMaintenanceStatus The value ok 1 indicates the Power Maintenance Signature is present and the overcurrent condition has not been detected The value overCurrent 2 indicates an overcurrent condition has been detected The value mPSAbsent 3 indicates that the Power Maintenance Signature is absent 49 pethMainPowerUsageOn pethMainPseC module Indicates that the power inline onsumption usage is above the threshold Power pethMainPseConsumptionPower Measured usage power expressed in Watts 50 pethMainPowerUsageOff pethMainPseC module Indicates that the power inline onsumption usage is below the threshold Power pethMainPseConsumptionPower Measured usage power expressed in Watts 53 httpServerDoS AttackTrap httpConnection webmgt This trap is sent to management Stats station s when the HTTP server httpsConnection is under Denial of Service attack Stats The HTTP and HTTPS connec tions are sampled at a 15 second interval This trap is sent every 1 minute while the HTTP server detects it is under attack httpConnectionStats The number of HTTP connection attempts over the past 15 seconds 54 alaStackMgrDuplicateRoleTrap alaStack chassis The element iden
65. Using SNMP For Switch Security on page 3 10 Filtering By Individual Trap You can configure the switch to filter out individual traps by using the snmp trap filter command This command allows you to suppress specified traps from the management station The following information is needed to suppress specific traps e The IP address of the SNMP management station that will receive the traps e The ID number of the individual traps to be suppressed Procedures for filtering individual traps can be found in the Quick Steps for Filtering by Individual Traps on page 3 6 For a list of trap names ID numbers and their descriptions refer to the table Using SNMP For Switch Security on page 3 10 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 3 13 Working with SNMP Traps Using SNMP Authentication Trap The authentication trap is sent when an SNMP authentication failure is detected This trap is a signal to the management station that the switch received a message from an unauthorized protocol entity This normally means that a network entity attempted an operation on the switch for which it had insufficient authorization When the SNMP authentication trap is enabled the switch forwards a trap to the manage ment station The following command enables the authentication trap gt snmp authentication trap enable The trap is suppressed if the SNMP authentication trap is disabled Trap Management Several C
66. access through any of these interfaces Users attempting to access the switch must have a valid username and password In This Chapter This chapter describes how to set up switch management interfaces through the Command Line Interface CLI CLI commands are used in the configuration examples for more details about the syntax of commands see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide An overview of switch security is given in this chapter In addition configuration procedures described in this chapter include e Configuring Authenticated Switch Access on page 10 6 Setting Up Management Interfaces for ASA on page 10 9 e Configuring Accounting for ASA on page 10 12 A user login procedure requires that users are authenticated for switch access via an external authentica tion server or the local user database For information about setting up user accounts locally on the switch see Chapter 9 Managing Switch User Accounts For information about setting up external servers that are configured with user information see the Managing Authentication Servers chapter in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide This chapter describes how to enable disable access for management interfaces For information about basic login on the switch see Chapter 2 Logging Into the Switch OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 10 1 Switch Security Specifications Managing Switch
67. and boots from the certified directory 2 The contents of the certified direc tory of the primary CMM switch are copied to the working directory of the secondary CMM switch The working directory is then copied to the certi fied directory Powering Up a Stack 3 The contents of the certified direc tory of the pri mary CMM switch are copied to the working directory of addi tional switches The working direc tory is then copied to the certified directory OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 9 CMM Files Managing CMM Directory Content This process occurs automatically when the switch boots The working and certified directory relationship described in the preceding figure in Software Rollback Feature on page 5 4 continues to apply to the primary CMM switch Generally speaking the switch assigned the lowest stack number is the primary CMM switch the switch with the next lowest stack number is the secondary CMM switch and all other switches are idle For more information on stack numbering see the Managing Stacks chapter found in the related OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Hardware Users Guide Scenario 2 Rebooting from the Working Directory Since changes to the boot cfg file and new img files are initially saved to the working directory sometimes it is necessary to boot from the working directory to check the validity of the new files The following diagram illustrates
68. and families See Configuring Privileges for a User on page 9 27 for more details e SNMP access Whether not the user is permitted to manage the switch via SNMP See Setting Up SNMP Access for a User Account on page 9 28 for more details e End User Profile The user s read and write access to command areas port ranges VLAN ranges used for customer login accounts See Setting Up End User Profiles on page 9 32 Typically options for the user privileges or end user profile SNMP access are configured at the same time the user is created An example of creating a user and setting access privileges for the account is given here gt user thomas techpubs read write domain policy md5 des For more details about command syntax see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide page 9 6 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Overview of User Accounts Quick Steps for Network Administrator User Accounts 1 Configure the user with the relevant username and password For example to create a user called thomas with a password of techpubs enter the following gt user thomas password techpubs For information about creating a user and setting up a password see Creating a User on page 9 12 2 Configure the user privileges and SNMP access if the user must have privileges that are different than those set up for the default user account For exampl
69. applied to the switch 1 Verify that there are no timer sessions pending on the switch gt show configuration status File configuration none scheduled 2 Apply the file by executing the configuration apply command followed by the path and file name If the configuration file is accepted with no errors the CLI responds with a system prompt gt configuration apply flash configfile 1 txt gt Note Optional You can specify verbose mode when applying a configuration file to the switch When the keyword verbose is specified in the command line all syntax contained in the configuration file is printed to the console When verbose is not specified in the command line cursory information number of errors and error log file name will be printed to the console only if a syntax or configuration error is detected To verify that the file was applied enter the show configuration status command The display is similar to the one shown here gt show configuration status File configuration lt flash configfile_ 1 txt gt completed with 0 errors For more information about this display see Configuration File Manager Commands in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Setting an Application Session for a Date and Time You can set a timed session to apply a configuration file at a specific date and time in the future The following example applies the bncom_cfg txt file at 9 00 a m on July 4 of the current year
70. at 11 00 a m the following command should be used gt system daylight savings time start fourth sun in Sept at 23 00 end fourth sun in march at 11 00 by 1 For more details on syntax for this command please refer to the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide You can also use the question mark character in the command syntax to invoke the CLI help feature as described in the Using the CLI chapter of this manual Note By default Daylight Savings Time is disabled OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 41 Setting the System Clock Managing System Files Enabling DST When Daylight Savings Time DST is enabled the switch clock will automatically set the default DST parameters for the time zone specified on the switch or for the custom parameters you can specify with the system daylight savings time command In this case it is not necessary to change the time setting on the switch when your time zone changes to and from DST To verify the DST parameters for your switch use the system daylight savings time command A screen similar to the following will be displayed gt system daylight savings time Daylight Savings Time DST is DISABLED PST Coordinated Universal Time UTC 8 hours Daylight Savings Time DST DST begins on the first sunday in april 4 7 at 2 00 DST ends on the last sunday in october 10 27 at 2 00 DST will change the time by 1 00 hour s The second line in
71. attempt command 2 23 session login timeout command 2 23 session prompt command 6 19 session timeout command 2 23 sftp command 1 23 2 19 sftp6 command 1 23 1 33 SHA authentication 3 11 show command log command 6 18 show command log status command 6 18 show configuration status command 7 3 7 7 show history command 6 15 show ip helper command 7 3 show microcode command 5 24 6 12 show ntp clientcommand 4 4 show ntp client server list command 4 3 show ntp server status command 4 3 show prefix command 6 14 show reload command 5 15 show running directory command 5 23 5 30 show snmp community map command 3 10 show snmp mib family command 3 16 6 25 show snmp station command 3 4 show snmp trap replay command 3 14 show user command 3 5 3 11 9 7 snapshots 7 10 7 14 SNMP access for user accounts 9 30 agent 3 7 application examples 3 4 browser 2 7 defaults 3 2 management station 3 8 manager 3 7 security 3 10 3 12 specifications 3 2 traps table 2 versions 3 8 snmp community map mode command 9 28 SNMP configuration verify information about 3 25 snmp security command 3 12 9 28 snmp trap filtercommand 3 6 software rollback configuration scenarios 5 5 specifications CLI 6 2 CMM 5 2 configuration file 7 2 file management 1 2 login 2 3 NTP 4 2 SNMP 3 2 switch security 10 2 user database 9 2 ssh command 2 17 2 19 SSL HTTPS port 11 4 see Secure Socket Layer startup defaults 9 6 switch rebootin
72. authentication serv ers This configuration is briefly mentioned in this chapter and described in detail in the Managing Authentication Servers chapter of the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide If you are using the local switch database to authenticate users user accounts must be set up on the switch Procedures for creating user accounts are described in this chapter See Chapter 9 Managing Switch User Accounts By default e Authenticated switch access is available only through the console port e Users are authenticated through the console port via the local user database on the switch These defaults provide out of the box security at initial startup Other management interfaces Telnet HTTP and so on must be specifically enabled before they can access the switch A summary of the commands used for configuring ASA is given in the following table Commands Used for aaa radius server Setting up the switch to communicate with external RADIUS or LDAP aaa tacacs server authentication servers aaa authentication Configuring the management interface and specifying the servers and or local user database to be used for the interface aaa accounting mac Optional Specifies servers to be used for accounting page 10 6 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch Security Quick Steps for Setting Up ASA Quick Steps for Setting Up ASA 1 If the local user da
73. directory Synchronizing a Stack with Three More Switches 3 The contents of the certified direc tory of the pri mary CMM switch are copied to the working directory of additional switches The working directory is then copied to the certified direc tory gt W C 4 In a stack of four or more switches the sec ondary CMM switch assists in the synchroniza tion process after it has been syn chronized with the primary CMM switch page 5 12 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant The following sections define commands that allow the user to manipulate the files in the directory struc ture of a single CMM Note All of the commands described in the following sections work on switches in a stack with redun dancy enabled However there can be special circumstances that apply when modifying parameters on a switch in a stack that do not apply to a single switch Redundant command usage is covered in Managing Redundancy in a Stack and CMM on page 5 25 See the related OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Hardware Users Guide for more information on switch redundancy Rebooting the Switch When booting the switch the software in the certified directory is loaded into the RAM memory of the switch and used as a running configuration a
74. displayed gt who Session number 0 User name at login Access type console Access port Local IP address 0 0 0 0 Read only domains None Read only families Read Write domains None Read Write families End User profile Session number 1 User name rrloginl Access type ssh Access port NI IP address 11 233 10 145 Read only domains None Read only families Read Write domains All Read Write families End User profile This display shows two sessions currently running on the remote OmniSwitch at IP address 11 133 30 135 Session number 0 is identified as the console session Session number 1 indicates the User name is rrlogin1 the IP address is 11 233 10 145 and the Access type is ssh which indicates a Secure Shell session Note You can use the ssh6 command followed by the IPv6 address or the hostname of the SSHv6 server to start an SSHV6 session It is mandatory to specify the name of the particular IPv6 interface if the SSHv6 server has been specified using its link local address page 2 18 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Logging Into the Switch Using Secure Shell Closing a Secure Shell Session To terminate the Secure Shell session issue the exit command The following is displayed gt exit Connection to 11 133 30 135 closed Using the example shown above this display indicates the Secure Shell session between the two switch
75. do not specify a new filename the new file will have the same name as the copied file If you copy a file to its own directory you must specify a new filename In each case the file being copied will remain in its original location Note You must have write privileges in order to execute the cp command page 1 14 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files File and Directory Management Secure Copy an Existing File Use the scp command to copy an existing file in a secure manner You can specify the path and filename for the original file being copied as well as the path and filename for a new copy being created If no path is specified the command assumes the current directory If SCP is not enabled on the switch use the scp sftp command to enable it The following syntax copies all of the image files in the working directory from a remote switch 172 17 11 13 to the local working directory gt scp admin 172 17 11 13 flash working img flash working admin s password for keyboard interactive method This second example helps copy all the image files from the user current working directory to the remote switch working directory A copy of all the image files will appear in the flash working directory of the remote switch 172 17 11 13 once the following command is executed gt scp flash working img admin 172 17 11 13 flash working admin s password for keyboard interactive method Note
76. dot3MauTypeAUI The value unknown 2 is returned when the MAU s true state is unknown for example when it is being initialized If the MAU is not jabbering the agent returns noJabber 3 This is the normal state If the MAU is in jabber state the agent returns the jabbering 4 value 35 sessionAuthenticationTrap sessionAc session An authentication failure trap is cessType sent each time a user authentica sessionUser tion is refused Name sessionUserl pAddress sessionAuthFail ure sessionAccessType tThe access type of the session sessionUserName The user name of the user logged in sessionUserIpAddress The IP address of the user logged in OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 9 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information No Trap Name Objects Family Description 36 trapAbsorptionTrap trapAbsorStamp none The absorption trap is sent when trapAbsorTrapId a trap has been absorbed at least trapAbsor once Counter trapAbsorTime trapAbsorStamp tThe time stamp of the absorbed trap trapAbsorTrapId tThe trap identifier of the absorbed trap trapAbsorCounter The number of the iterations of the absorbed trap trapAbsorTime The time stamp of the last iteration 37 alaStackMgrDuplicateSlotTrap alaStack chassis Two or more slots claim to have MerSlotNI the same slot number Number alaStackMgrSlotNINumber The numbers allocated for the stack NIs are from 1 to 8 38 alaStac
77. down sionID or comes up and both ports are alaDHLPort are part of some vlan map this From trap is sent to the Management alaDHLPortTo Entity with the DHL port infor alaDHLVlan mation MoveReason alaDHLSessionID The DHL Session ID for which alaDHLVlanMoveTrap needs to be sent to the Manage ment Entity alaDHLPortFrom the the port either linkA or linkB from whichvlan mapped vlans have joined to other port due to linkUp or linkDown as specified by alaDHLVlanMoveReason alaDHLPortTo The the port either linkA or linkB to which vlan mapped vlans have joined from other port due to linkUp or linkDown as specified by alaDHLVlanMoveReason alaDHLVlanMoveReason The reason for Vlan Movement from one port to another port 177 esmPortViolation ifIndex interface This trap is sent when an inter esmPortViola face is shut down by a feature tion Value due to violation ifIndex The interface that was shut down due to the violation esmPort Violation Value The reason the interface was shut down EniSecurityBlockPortNone 0 No App blocking this port EniSecurityBlockPortENI 1 ENI App blocking this port EniSecurityBlockPortSTP 2 STP App blocking this port EniSecurityBlockPortLPSS 3 LPS Shutdown App blocking this port EniSecurityBlockPortQoS 4 QoS App blocking this port EniSecurityBlockPortUDLD 5 UDLD App blocking this port EniSecurityBlockPortETHBLK 6 App blocking this port EniSecurityBlockPortNISUP 7 NISUP App b
78. duration time is set to 0 this means that there is no automatic unlocking of a user account by the switch The locked user account remains locked until it is manually unlocked by the admin user To configure a lockout duration time use the user lockout duration command For example gt user lockout duration 60 Do not configure a lockout duration time that is less than the lockout window time period see Configur ing the User Lockout Window on page 9 23 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 25 Configuring Global User Lockout Settings Managing Switch User Accounts Manually Locking and Unlocking User Accounts The user lockout unlock command is used to manually lock or unlock a user account This command is only available to the admin user or a user who has read write access privileges to the switch To lock a user account enter user lockout and the username for the account For example gt user lockout j_smith To unlock a user account enter user unlock and the username for the locked account For example gt user unlock smith In addition to this command the admin user or users with read write access privileges can change the user account password to unlock the account If a lockout duration time see Configuring the User Lockout Duration Time on page 9 25 is not config ured for the switch then it is only possible to manually unlock a user account with the user lockout command
79. errors into a text file that will appear in the flash directory The following display will result where the cfg_txt file contains three errors gt configuration apply cfg file Errors 3 Log file name cfg _txt 1l err In this case the error message indicates that the application attempt was unsuccessful It also indicates that the switch wrote log messages into a file named cfg_txt 1 err which now appears in your flash direc tory To view the contents of a generated error file use the view command For example view cfg_txt 1 err Note The keyword authkey along with a related alpha numeric text string are automatically included in many snapshot files e g configuration snapshot all The text string following the authkey keyword represents a login password that has been encrypted twice The first encryption occurs when a password is first created by a user the second encryption occurs when a configuration snapshot is taken This dual encryption further enhances switch security However it is important to note that any configuration file including a generated snapshot that includes this dual encrypted password information will result in an error whenever it is applied to the switch via the configuration apply command This is a valid switch function and does not represent a significant problem If an authkey related error is the only error detected simply remove all authkey related syntax using a text editor If a new password is
80. from the working directory or unsynchro nized stacks are at risk of mismanaging data traffic due to incompatibilities in different versions of switch software Certifying the working directory is described in Copying the Working Directory to the Certi fied Directory on page 5 21 while synchronizing the switch is described in Synchronizing the Primary and Secondary CMMs on page 5 27 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 17 Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant Managing CMM Directory Content Rebooting from the Working Directory Besides a regular boot of the switch from the certified directory you can also force the switch to boot from the working directory This is useful for checking whether a new configuration or image file boots up the switch correctly before committing it to the certified directory For information on saving the working directory to the certified directory see Copying the Working Directory to the Certified Direc tory on page 5 21 The following picture illustrates the case of a switch being rebooted from the working directory Certified Primary CMM In the above diagram 1 The certified directory is used to initially boot the switch 2 Changes are made to the configuration file and are saved to the configuration file in the working direc tory by using the copy running config working com
81. from which you initiated the FTP client session Use the pwd CLI command to verify your current directory ftp gt quit 221 Bye gt pwd flash working page 1 32 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files Application Examples for File Management Creating a File Directory Using Secure Shell FTP The following example describes the steps necessary to create a directory on a remote OmniSwitch and to transfer a file into the new directory by using Secure Shell FTP 1 Log on to the switch and issue the sftp CLI command with the IP address for the device you are connecting to The following command establishes a Secure Shell FTP interface from the local OmniSwitch to another OmniSwitch at IP address 10 222 30 125 gt sftp 10 222 30 125 login as Note If SFTP is not enabled use the scp sftp command to enable it You can use the sftp6 command followed by the IPv6 address or hostname of the SFTPv6 server to start an SFTPV6 session over an IPv6 environment For example gt sftp6 fe80 a00 20ff fea8 8961 intl login as Note SFTPv6 sessions are supported It is mandatory to specify the name of the particular IPv6 interface if the SFTPv6 server has been specified using its link local address 2 You must have a login and password that is recognized by the IP address you are logging in to When you enter your login the device will request your password Here the login trlogin2 is use
82. is a logical representation of the OmniSwitch file directory shown in the illustra tion on page 1 5 Flash Directory Certified Directory Working Directory Network Directory Files boot params cs_system pmd Files Files ile boot slot cfg Ksecu img Ksecu img policy cfg boot cfg 1 err Kos img Kbase img swlog 1 log Krelease img boot cfg swlog2 log boot cfg Sample Switch Directory Tree Determining Your Location in the File Structure Use the pwd command to display the path to your current directory When you first log into the switch your current directory is the flash directory If you enter the pwd command the following will be displayed gt pwd flash gt The display shows the name of the current directory and its path If your current directory is the certified directory and you enter the pwd command the following will be displayed gt pwd flash certified gt The display shows the path to your current directory page 1 8 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files File and Directory Management Changing Directories Use the cd command to navigate within the file directory structure The cd command allows you to move up or down the directory tree To go down you must specify a directory located in your current direc tory The following command example presumes your current directory is the flash file directory as shown in the directory on pag
83. it gets the DHCP lease on any of the two VLANs 4 IfaLLDP that is advertising the management VLAN ID is received on any of the switch ports the initial DHCP client on untagged VLAN and tagged VLAN 127 is stopped and a new DHCP client is started on this tagged management VLAN 5 Now the DHCP Client created on tagged management VLAN waits infinitely to get a lease Note If the initial DHCP clients untagged or VLAN 127 obtains an IP lease the LLDP detection mechanism is disabled to prevent the switch from starting a new DHCP client DHCP client is automatically stopped once a user logs in the switch through console port before getting the DHCP lease This condition applies for any type of DHCP client untagged tagged 127 or tagged with LLDP associated management VLAN Once the DHCP client gets the lease the Remote Config process does not stop even if the user logs on to the switch through console port DHCP Client Preference to OXO DHCP Server When the RCL is running and the DHCP client is created the following steps are followed in order to provide preference to the desired OXO DHCP server e If DHCPACK from Non OXO DHCP server is received and DHCP client is created on default VLAN 1 DHCP client stores this response if it is the first response otherwise response gets declined This stored response is applied only if the desired OXO DHCP response is not found within 30 secs window The desired OXO DHCP response is the respo
84. maximum number of entries sup ported The OmniSwitch will not generate new ARP request for new nexthops 111 ripRouteMaxLimitReached none 112 ripngRouteMaxLimitReached none 113 Reserved 118 rip ripng This trap is sent when the RIP database reaches the supported maximum number of entries When the maximum number is reached RIP discards any new updates This trap is sent when the RIPng database reaches the supported maximum number of entries When the maximum number is reached RIPng discards any new updates page B 20 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name 119 dot3OamThresholdEvent Objects dot3OamEventL dot3 oam ogTimestamp dot30amEventL ogOui dot30amEventL ogType dot30amEventL ogLocation dot30amEventL ogWindowHi dot30amEventL ogWindowLo dot30amEventL ogThresholdHi dot3OamEventL ogThresh oldLo dot3OamEventL ogValue dot3OamEventL ogRunningTo tal dot3OamEventL ogEventTotal Family Description This trap is sent when a local or remote threshold crossing event is detected A local threshold crossing event is detected by the local entity while a remote threshold crossing event is detected by the reception of an Ethernet OAM Event Notifica tion OAMPDU that indicates a threshold event dot30amEventLogTimestamp tThe sysUpTime at the time of the logged event dot30amEventLogOui The
85. move flash testfiles testfile2 flash working testfile2 WARNING renaming file flash testfiles testfile2 gt flash working testfile2 In the next example the user current directory is the flash testfiles directory as shown in the illustration so it is not necessary to specify a path for the file being copied However the command syntax specifies a path to the destination directory The screen displays a warning that the file is being renamed gt move testfile2 flash working newtestfile2 WARNING renaming file flash working newtestfile2 gt flash working newtestfile2 In this third example the user current directory is the flash directory Here it is not necessary to specify a path for the destination file but a path must be specified for the original file The screen displays a warning that the file is being renamed gt move flash testfiles testfile2 newfile2 WARNING renaming file flash testfiles testfile2 gt flash testfiles newfile2 In each of the above examples a new file will be written to the specified or assumed path with the new filename In each case the file being copied will be removed from its original location Change File Attribute and Permissions The chmod and attrib commands have the same function and use the same syntax Use these commands to change read write privileges for the specified file The following syntax sets the privilege for the config1 txt file to read write In this example the user cu
86. offset from UTC by increments of 15 30 or 45 minutes You must indicate by a plus or minus character whether the time should be added to or subtracted from the system time To set a time that offsets UTC by adding 5 hours and 45 minutes use the following command gt system timezone 05 45 Note that four digits must be used to specify an offset for minutes and the minutes must be specified in 15 30 or 45 minute increments To specify the number of hours offset from UTC such as ten hours use the following command syntax gt system timezone 10 Values to specify hours for offset range from 13 through 12 Time To display the current local time for your switch use the system time command If you do not specify a new time in the command line the current system time is displayed as shown gt system time 17 08 51 PST To modify the switch current system time enter the system time command When you specify the time you must use the hh mm ss syntax where hh is the hour based on a 24 hour clock The mm syntax repre sents minutes and ss represents seconds You must use two digits to specify the minutes and two digits to specify the seconds The following command will set the switch system time to 10 45 00 a m gt system time 10 45 00 gt The following command will set the switch system time to 3 14 00 p m gt system time 15 41 00 gt page 1 40 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 201
87. page 1 38 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files Setting the System Clock Setting the System Clock The switch clock displays time by using a 24 hour clock format It can also be set for use in any time zone Daylight Savings Time DST is supported for a number of standard time zones DST parameters can be programmed to support non standard time zones and time off set applications All switch files and directories listed in the flash directory bear a time stamp This feature is useful for file management purposes Setting Date and Time You can set the local date time zone and time for your switch or you can also set the switch to run on Universal Time Coordinate UTC or GMT If applicable you can also configure Daylight Savings Time DST or Summertime parameters Note If you have multiple switches in a stack you must set the date and time on both the primary and the secondary switch Otherwise if you experience a fail over situation the secondary switch time and date will not match You can use the takeover command to switch between primary and secondary switches to set time and date For more information on redundancy refer to Chapter 5 Managing CMM Directory Content Date To display the current system date for your switch use the system date command If you do not specify a new date in the command line the switch will display the current system date To modify the swit
88. polls the server 5 A rofi le J and receives login and privi OmniSwitch for login information which OmniSwitch lege information about the can reference a profile user name end user profiles are stored on the switch AAA Server LDAP or RADIUS For more information about types of users see Chapter 9 Managing Switch User Accounts Authentication only ACE Server Authentication only servers are able to authenticate users for switch management access but authoriza tion or what privileges the user has after authenticating are determined by the switch Authentication only servers cannot return user privileges or end user profiles to the switch The authentication only server supported by the switch is ACE Server which is a part of RSA Security s SecurID product suite RSA Security s ACE Agent is embedded in the switch page 10 4 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch Security Authenticated Switch Access The following illustration shows the two different user types attempting to authenticate with an ACE Server Network Administrator Customer login request login request ACE Server ACE Server user end user The switch polls the server privileges The switch polls the server profiles for login information privi for login information end leges are stored on the user profiles are stored on switch the switch OmniSwitch Omni
89. read able RSA Security Inc Provided with this product is certain security software RSA Software licensed from RSA Security Inc RSA SECURITY INC PROVIDES RSA SOFTWARE AS IS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY WHAT SOEVER RSA SECURITY INC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STAT UTORY AS TO ANY MATTER WHATSOEVER INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 11 Third Party Licenses and Notices Software License and Copyright Statements K Sun Microsystems Inc This product contains Coronado ASIC which includes a component derived from designs licensed from Sun Microsystems Inc L Wind River Systems Inc Provided with this product is certain software Run Time Module licensed from Wind River Systems Inc Licensee is prohibited from 1 copying the Run Time Module except for archive purposes consis tent with Licensee s archive procedures ii transferring the Run Time Module to a third party apart from the product 11 modifying decompiling disassembling reverse engineering or otherwise attempting to derive the source code of the Run Time Module iv exporting the Run Time Module or underlying tech nology in contravention of applicable U S and foreign export laws and regulations and v using the Run Time Module other than in connection with op
90. servers used for authenticated switch access can also be used with authenticated VLANs Authenticated VLANs are described in the Configuring Authenticated VLANs chapter of the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide The order of the specified servers is important The switch uses only one server for authentication the first available server in the list All authentication attempts will be tried on that server Other servers are not tried even if they are available If local is specified it must be last in the list since the local user data base is always available when the switch is up Servers can also be used for accounting or logging of authenticated sessions See Configuring Account ing for ASA on page 10 12 The following table describes the management access interfaces or methods and the types of authentica tion servers that can be used with them Server Type Management Access Method RADIUS Telnet FTP HTTP Secure Shell LDAP Telnet FTP HTTP Secure Shell SNMP ACE Server Telnet FTP HTTP Secure Shell local console FTP HTTP Secure Shell SNMP OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 10 9 Setting Up Management Interfaces for ASA Managing Switch Security Enabling Switch Access Enter the aaa authentication command with the relevant keyword that indicates the management inter face and specify the servers to be used for authentication In this example Telnet
91. sessions for example console Telnet FTP HTTP Secure Shell Secure Shell FTP whoami Displays the current user session show session config Displays session configuration information for example default prompt banner file name inactivity timer login timer login attempts show dns Displays the current DNS resolver configuration and status For more information about these commands refer to the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 2 25 Verifying Login Settings Logging Into the Switch page 2 26 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 3 Using SNMP The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that allows communication between SNMP managers and SNMP agents on an IPv4 as well as on an IPv6 network Network administrators use SNMP to monitor network performance and to manage network resources SNMP functionality over IPv6 environment can be configured only on an OmniSwitch 6250 In This Chapter This chapter describes SNMP and how to use it through the Command Line Interface CLI CLI commands are used in the configuration examples for more details about the syntax of commands see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Configuration procedures described in this chapter include e Setting Up An SNMP Management Station on page 3 4 e Setting Up Trap Filters on page 3 5 e U
92. software on the client device access SSH then Auth and then select the private key generated in Step 1 to start the authentication process 7 Toenforce Secure Shell PKA on a switch use the ssh enforce pubkey auth command Note If a public key file that is thomas_dsa pub exists in the flash network pub directory on the switch PKA is still used even if this method of authentication was disabled using the ssh enforce pubkey auth command Rename move or delete the public key file to ensure that PKA is disabled on the switch page 2 16 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Logging Into the Switch Using Secure Shell Starting a Secure Shell Session To start a Secure Shell session issue the ssh command and identify the IP address or hostname for the device you are connecting to You can use the ssh6 command to start an SSHv6 session followed by the relevant IPv6 address the hostname over an IPv6 environment Note You can only use a host name instead of an IP address if the DNS resolver has been configured and enabled If not you must specify an IP address See Chapter 1 Managing System Files for details Note Use of cmdtool OpenWindows support facility is not recommended over Secure Shell connec tions with an external server The following command establishes a Secure Shell interface from the local OmniSwitch to IP address 11 133 30 135 gt ssh 11 133 30 135 login as Note If
93. subsystem SNMPv2 TC PROTOCOL MIB SNMPv2 CONF IF MIB ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the IP Stack sub SNMPv2 SMI IP MIB system SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF IP MIB ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for IP Multicast Route SNMPv2 SMI IPMRM MIB Manager IPMRM global configuration parameters SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND1 Definitions of managed objects for the IP Multicast SNMPv2 SMI IPMS MIB Switching IPMS subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF IF MIB ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the IP Routing SNMPv2 SMI IPRM MIB Manager IPRM subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF IANA RTPROTO MIB ALCATEL IND 1 IPv6 MIB Definitions of managed objects for the IPv6 sub system SNMPv2 SMI SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF IPv7 TC IPv6 MIB ALCATEL IND 1 LAG MIB Definitions of managed objects for the IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation LAG subsystem SNMPv2 SMI SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF TEEE8023 LAG MIB IF MIB Q BRIDGE MIB ALCATEL IND 1 LPS MIB Definitions of the MIB module for the address learning MIB addresses entity SNMPv2 SMI SNMPv2 TC IF MIB Q BRIDGE MIB ALCATEL IND 1 SYSTEM MIB SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND 1 MAC ADDRESS MIB Definitions of managed objects for the Source Learn ing MAC Address subsystem SNMPv2 SMI SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONEF IF MIB Q Bridge MIB page 3 22 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013
94. the page A 10 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Software License and Copyright Statements Third Party Licenses and Notices above restrictions This clause is necessary due to a potential bad interaction between the GPL and the restrictions contained in a BSD style copyright THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ALL OF WHICH ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROF ITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABIL ITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Apptitude Inc Provided with this product is certain network monitoring software MeterWorks RMON licensed from Apptitude Inc whose copyright notice is as follows Copyright C 1997 1999 by Apptitude Inc All Rights Reserved Licensee is notified that Apptitude Inc formerly Technically Elite Inc a California corporation with principal offices at 6330 San Ignacio Avenue San Jose California is a third party bene
95. the switch and list the files in the flash working directory gt ls flash working Listing Directory flash working drw 2048 Aug 4 10 45 drw 2048 Aug 5 14 05 rw 670979 Aug 5 14 44 KFsecu img rw 2877570 Aug 4 10 33 KFbase img rw 217119 Aug 4 10 33 KFdiag img rw 727663 Aug 4 10 33 KFeni img rw 5519 Aug 4 10 34 KFrelease img rw 880 Sep 31 13 05 boot cfg This list verifies that the file is located on the switch in the flash working directory 7 Reboot the switch to register the security file KFsecu img The features and services supported by the Ksecu img image file are now available on the switch OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 29 Application Examples for File Management Managing System Files Creating a File Directory on the Switch In this example the user wants to store several test files on the switch for use at a later date The user has loaded the files into the switch flash working directory by using FTP Rather than leaving the files in the working directory the user may want to create a new directory The following steps describe how to create a directory on the switch how to transfer files into the directory and how to list the files 1 Log onto the switch and use the mkdir command to create a new directory called resources gt mkdir resources gt 2 Verify that the new directory was created using the Is command The resources directory i
96. the event log When the OUI is the IEEE 802 3 OUI of 0x0180C2 the following event types are defined erroredSymbolEvent 1 erroredFramePe riodEvent 2 erroredFrameEvent 3 erroredFrameSecondsEvent 4 linkFault 256 dyingGaspEvent 257 criticalLinkEvent 258 dot3O0amEventLogLocation Indicates whether this event occurred locally local 1 or was received from the OAM peer via Ethernet OAM remote 2 dot3OamEventLogWindowHi The time interval in seconds that is used to monitor the High threshold limit for this event A notification is sent every time the threshold is exceeded during any 5 second monitoring interval dot3OamEventLogWindowLo The time interval in seconds that is used to monitor the Low threshold limit for this event A notification is sent every time the threshold is exceeded during any 5 second monitoring interval dot3O0amEventLogThresholdHi The High threshold level set for the event dot3O0amEventLogThresholdLo tThe Low threshold level set for the event dot3OamEventLog Value tThe value of the event when it exceeded a threshold limit dot3O0amEventLogRunningTotal the total number of times this event has happened since the last reset dot3O0amEventLogEventTotal The total number of times this event has resulted in a notification 122 alaDot30amNonThresholdEventClear dot30amEventL dot3 oam This trap is sent is sent when a ogTimestamp local or remote non threshold dot30amEventL cr
97. to do use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License URLWatch For notice when this page changes fill in your email address Maintained by Webmaster Linux Online Inc Last modified 09 Aug 2000 02 03AM Views since 16 Aug 2000 177203 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page A 9 Third Party Licenses and Notices Software License and Copyright Statements Material copyright Linux Online Inc Design and compilation copyright 1994 2002 Linux Online Inc Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Tux the Penguin featured in our logo was created by Larry Ewing Consult our privacy statement URLWatch provided by URLWatch Services All rights reserved E University of California Provided with this product is certain TCP input and Telnet client software developed by the University of California Berkeley Copyright C 1987 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission
98. to use the group term in a CLI command you can change the syntax to gp as follows gt alias gp group To change unfamiliar command words into familiar words or patterns If you prefer the term privilege to the term attribute with reference to the read write capabilities of a login account you can change the CLI word from attrib to privilege by using the following command gt alias privilege attrib After an alias has been defined both the alias and the original CLI term are supported as valid CLI terms For example if privilege is defined as an alias as shown above both privilege and attrib work as CLI commands and both words are shown when you use the CLI help feature You can save command aliases for the current user account by executing the user profile save command If the aliases are not saved they are stored until the user session ends In this case once you log off the switch substitute terms configured with the alias command are destroyed To display aliases use the show alias command To set all alias values back to their factory defaults use the user profile reset command page 6 5 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using the CLI Command Entry Rules and Syntax Partial Keyword Completion The CLI has a partial keyword recognition feature that allows the switch to recognize partial keywords to CLI command syntax Instead of typing the entire keyword type only as many characte
99. user is seen by the switch as an end user and will attempt to match the profile name to a profile name configured on the switch If there is no match the user will not be able to log into the switch Note For information about setting up user information on an authentication AAA server see the Managing Authentication Servers chapter of the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide Users typically log into the switch through one of the following methods e Console port A direct connection to the switch through the console port Telnet Any standard Telnet client can be used for logging into the switch ETP Any standard FTP client can be used for logging into the switch e HTTP The switch has a Web browser management interface for users logging in via HTTP This management tool is called WebView Secure Shell Any standard Secure Shell client can be used for logging into the switch SNMP Any standard SNMP browser can be used for logging into the switch page 9 4 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Overview of User Accounts For more information about connecting to the switch through one of these methods see Chapter 2 Logging Into the Switch and the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Getting Started Guide For information about setting up the switch to allow user access through these interfaces see Chapter 10 Managing Switch Security O
100. user lockout settings configured for the switch apply to all user accounts e Lockout window the length of time a failed login attempt is aged before it is no longer counted as failed attempt e Lockout threshold the number of failed login attempts allowed within a given lockout window period of time e Lockout duration the length of time a user account remains locked until it is automatically unlocked In addition to the above lockout settings the network administrator also has the ability to manually lock and unlock user accounts The following subsections describe how to configure user lockout settings and how to manually lock and unlock user accounts Note Only the admin user is allowed to configure user lockout settings The admin account is protected from lockout therefore it is always available Lockout settings are saved automatically that is these settings do not require the write memory copy running config working or configuration snapshot command to save user settings over a reboot To view the current lockout settings configured for the switch use the show user lockout setting command For more information about this command and those used in the configuration examples throughout this section see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide page 9 22 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Configuring Global User Lockout Settings Configuring the User Locko
101. will use the local Switch Logging facility For more information about Switch Logging see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide Note To verify the switch access setup enter the show aaa authentication command The display is similar to the one shown here Service type Default lrst authentication server radl 2nd authentication server local Service type Console Authentication Use Default irst authentication server radl 2nd authentication server local Service type Telnet Authentication Use Default lrst authentication server radl 2nd authentication server local Service type Ftp Authentication Use Default lrst authentication server radl 2nd authentication server local Service type Http Authentication denied Service type Snmp Authentication Use Default ilrst authentication server radl 2nd authentication server local Service type Ssh Authentication Use Default lrst authentication server radl 2nd authentication server local For more information about this command see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide page 10 8 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch Security Setting Up Management Interfaces for ASA Setting Up Management Interfaces for ASA By default authenticated access is available through the console port Access through other management interfaces is disabled Other management interfaces in
102. you are prepared to reload all files OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 19 Loading Software onto the Switch Managing System Files Loading Software onto the Switch There are three common methods for loading software to and from your switch The method you use depends on your workstation software your hardware configuration and the location and condition of your switch These methods are discussed here e FTP Server You can use the switch as an FTP server If you have FTP client software on your work station you can transfer a file to the switch via FTP This is normally done to load or upgrade the switch software or configurations For details see Using the Switch as an FTP Server on page 1 20 e TFTP Client You can use the TFTP client functionality on an OmniSwitch 6250 to transfer software to from a TFTP server For details see Using TFTP to Transfer Files on page 1 25 e FTP Client You can use the switch as an FTP client by connecting a terminal to the switch console port and using standard FTP commands This feature is useful in cases where you do not have access to a workstation with an FTP client For details see Using the Switch as an FTP Client on page 1 21 e USB Flash Drive You can copy files to and from an Alcatel Lucent certified USB flash drive connected to the CMM The switch can also boot from the image files stored on the USB drive using the disaster recovery featur
103. your console screen The show syntax is used with other command keywords to display information pertaining to those keywords For example the show vlan command displays a table of all VLANs currently configured along with pertinent information about each VLAN Different forms of the show vlan command can be used to display different subsets of VLAN information For example the show vlan rules command displays all rules defined for a VLAN Using the No Form The OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide defines all CLI commands and explains their syntax Whenever a command has a no form it is described on the same page as the original command The no form of a command can be used for the following e Remove the configuration created by a command For example create a VLAN with the vlan command and delete a VLAN using the no vlan command e Reset a configuration value to its default For example create a static IGMP entry on a specified port of a specified VLAN with the ip multicast static group command You can remove the static IGMP entry from a specified port on a specified VLAN with the no ip multicast static group command Using Alias Commands Define substitute text for the CLI commands in the switch by using the alias command There are two main reasons for defining aliases To eliminate excess typing by reducing the number of characters required for a command To reduce the number of characters required
104. 00 110 111 Secondary protocol SFTP Secondary user admin page 8 14 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Download Component Files Instruction File Usage Guidelines e The instruction file is case sensitive and can contain only the keywords provided in the instruction file output example e The keywords can be placed in any order e If the Keyword Value format is incorrect the information on that line is discarded e Firmware version must be provided in the format as specified in the example e Pathnames provided must contain the complete path to the file location e If any file is not required the value is provided as None For example if a debug configuration file is not required to be downloaded the instruction file syntax is as follows Debug filename None Debug location None coy e The header line is the first line of the instruction file and begins with character e Header line contents are logged to the switch log along with the other contents of the instruction file e The header and comment lines begin with character Firmware Upgrade Files Firmware files are also known as image files These files have the img extension Firmware files are different for each OmniSwitch platform The relevant firmware files are downloaded from the location mentioned in the instruction file The filenames of the firmware fil
105. 00 a m ast Atlantic Standard 04 00 2nd Sunday in 1st Sunday in Nov at 1 00 Time at 2 00 a m 2 00 a m est Eastern Standard 05 00 2nd Sunday in Mar 1st Sunday in Nov at 1 00 Time at 2 00 a m 2 00 a m cst Central Standard 06 00 2nd Sunday Mar 1st Sunday in Nov at 1 00 Time at 2 00 a m 2 00 a m mst Mountain Standard 07 00 2nd Sunday in Mar 1st Sunday in Nov at 1 00 Time at 2 00 a m 2 00 a m pst Pacific Standard 08 00 2nd Sunday in 1st Sunday in Nov 1 00 Time at 2 00 a m 2 00 a m astcam Atlantic Standard 04 00 1st Sunday in at Last Sunday in Oct 1 00 Time 2 00 a m at 2 00 a m Central America estcam Eastern Standard 05 00 1st Sunday in Apr at Last Sunday in Oct 1 00 Time 2 00 a m at 2 00 a m Central America Central Standard 06 00 1st Sunday in Apr at Last Sunday in Oct 1 00 Time 2 00 a m at 2 00 a m Central America mstcam Mountain Standard 07 00 1st Sunday in at Last Sunday in Oct 1 00 Time 2 00 a m at 2 00 a m Central America pstcam Pacific Standard 08 00 1st Sunday in Apr at Last Sunday in Oct 1 00 Time 2 00 a m at 2 00 a m Central America akst Alaska 09 00 1st Sunday in Apr at Last Sunday in Oct 1 00 2 00 a m at 2 00 a m hst Hawaii 10 00 No default No default No default 7111 No standard name 11 00 No default No default No default OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 43 Setting th
106. 1 Verify that there are no current timer sessions pending on the switch gt show configuration status File configuration none scheduled 2 Apply the file by executing the configuration apply using the at keyword with the relevant date and time gt configuration apply bncom_cfg txt at 09 00 04 july page 7 4 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Working With Configuration Files Quick Steps for Applying Configuration Files Note Optional To verify that the switch received this configuration apply request enter the show configuration status command The display is similar to the one shown here gt show configuration status File configuration lt flash working bncom_cfg txt gt scheduled at 07 04 02 09 00 For more information about this display see Configuration File Manager Commands in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Setting an Application Session for a Specified Time Period You can set a future timed session to apply a configuration file after a specified period of time has elapsed In the following example the amzncom_cfg txt will be applied after 6 hours and 15 minutes have elapsed 1 Verify that there are no current timer sessions pending on the switch gt show configuration status File configuration none scheduled 2 Apply the file by executing the configuration apply command using the in keyword with the relevant time frame specified gt configuration apply amzn
107. 15 seconds the maximum number of hops is set to 3 and the IP address of the DHCP server is 128 251 16 52 This tutorial shows you how to accomplish the following tasks 1 Create a configuration text file containing CLI commands needed to configure DHCP Relay applica tion This example used MS Notepad to create a text file on a PC workstation The text file named dhcp_relay txt contains three CLI commands needed to configure the forward delay value to 15 seconds and the maximum number of hops to 3 The IP address of the DHCP server is 128 251 16 52 ip helper address 128 251 16 52 ip helper forward delay 15 ip helper maximum hops 3 2 Transfer the configuration file to the switch s file system To transfer the configuration file to the switch use an FTP transfer method For more information about transferring files onto the switch see Chapter 1 Managing System Files 3 Apply the configuration file to the switch by using the configuration apply command as shown here gt configuration apply dhcp_relay txt File configuration lt dhcp relay txt gt completed with no errors page 7 2 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Working With Configuration Files Tutorial for Creating a Configuration File 4 Use the show configuration status command to verify that the dhcp_relay txt configuration file was applied to the switch The display is similar to the one shown here gt show configuration status File c
108. 2013 Managing System Files Verifying Directory Contents Verifying Directory Contents To display a list of files the following CLI commands may be used Is Displays the contents of a specified directory or the current working directory dir Displays the contents of a specified directory or the current working directory rls Displays the content of a non primary switch in a stack For more information about these commands see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 35 Installing Software Licenses Managing System Files Installing Software Licenses Some features require a software license and are restricted only to a licensed user To activate licensed features a license serial number must be purchased along with an authorization code from Alcatel Lucent The authorization code can then be used to generate a license file To install the license file on the switch and to activate the licensed features perform the following steps 1 Log on to https service esd alcatel lucent com portal page portal EService LicenseGeneration and provide the serial number and MAC address of the switch along with the authorization code A license file for example JmLicense txt is generated 2 Save the generated mLicense txt file in the flash directory or any other directory of the primary CMM 3 To install the license on the switch use the license app
109. 2013 Using the CLI CLI Services Example for Using Prefix Recognition This example shows how the Prefix Recognition feature is used for entering multiple commands that have the same prefix This table lists the tasks to be accomplished in this example and the CLI syntax required for each task Task CLI Syntax 1 Create a VLAN with an identification number of 501 vlan 501 enable 2 Enable the spanning tree protocol for VLAN 501 vlan 501 stp enable 3 Enable authentication for VLAN 501 vlan 501 authentication enable To create VLAN 501 and configure its attributes using the CLI commands you could enter the vlan 501 prefix three times However VLAN commands support the prefix recognition capability so redundant entry of this prefix is not necessary For example when you enter gt vlan 501 enable The CLI automatically stores the prefix vlan 501 Now if you enter a related command for the same VLAN you are only required to enter suffix information In this case you can enter the commands to accomplish tasks 2 and 3 as follows gt stp enable gt authentication enable Prefix information is remembered by the CLI until you enter a command with a new prefix Note If you want to create or configure another VLAN reenter the full command prefix including the new VLAN ID Show Prefix You can view the current prefix by issuing the show prefix command If you issue this command when the prefix stored by the
110. 2013 page 9 37 Verifying the User Configuration Managing Switch User Accounts Verifying the User Configuration To display information about user accounts configured locally in the user database use the show commands listed here show user Displays information about all users or a particular user configured in the local user database on the switch show user password size Displays the minimum number of characters that are required for a user password show user password expiration Displays the expiration date for passwords configured for user accounts stored on the switch show user password policy Displays the global password settings configured for the switch show user lockout setting Displays the global user lockout settings configured for the switch show end user profile Displays information about end user profiles show aaa classification rule Displays hexadecimal values for command domains families For more information about the resulting displays from these commands see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide An example of the output for the show user command is also given in Quick Steps for Network Administrator User Accounts on page 9 7 page 9 38 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 10 Managing Switch Security Switch security is provided on the switch for all available management interfaces console Telnet HTTP FTP Secure Shell and SNMP The switch can be set up to allow or deny
111. 250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Index Symbols command 6 12 A aaa authentication command 10 7 10 8 10 10 11 5 aaa radius server command 10 7 accounting for Authenticated Switch Access ACE Servers 10 4 application examples applying configuration files 7 4 Authenticated Switch Access 10 7 CLI 6 9 6 25 CMM 5 5 configuration file 7 2 customer login user accounts 9 8 Emergency Restore 5 32 file management 1 29 logging into the switch 2 5 network administrator user accounts 9 7 NTP 4 3 Prefix Recognition SNMP 3 4 Trap Filters 3 5 WebView 11 5 applying configuration files application examples 7 4 ASA see Authenticated Switch Access ASA Configuration verify information about 10 13 Authenticated Switch Access 10 4 accounting 10 12 application examples 10 7 management interfaces 10 9 10 12 6 14 authentication MD5 3 11 SHA 3 11 traps 3 14 Automatic Remote Configuration 8 5 Bootup Configuration File 8 13 Debug Configuration File 8 13 Firmware upgrade Files 8 13 Instruction File 8 13 Script File 8 13 Troubleshooting 8 24 Automatic Remote Configuration network components 8 6 TFTP File Server 8 6 banner login 2 21 pre login text 2 22 boot cfg file 5 3 5 16 Emergency Restore 5 34 1 9 certified directory 5 3 copying to working directory 5 22 5 27 Chassis Management Module see CMM chmod command 1 16 CLI 6 1 application examples 6 9 6 25
112. 3 Managing System Files Setting the System Clock Daylight Savings Time Configuration The switch can be set to change the system clock automatically to adjust for Daylight Savings Time DST There are two situations that apply depending on the time zone selected for your switch If the time zone set for your switch shows DST parameters in the table on page 1 42 you need to only enable DST on your switch by using the following command gt system daylight savings time enable If the time zone set for your switch does not show DST parameters in the table on page 1 42 you must specify the start end and change parameters for DST by using the system daylight savings time command The following information is needed to specify DST e The day of the week and month of the year when DST will begin e The position of that day in the month e g first second third fourth or last Sunday of the month e The hour and minute of the day at which DST will begin e The day of the week and month of the year when DST will end e The position of that day in the month e g first second third fourth or last Sunday of the month The hour and minute of the day at which DST will end The number of hours the switch clock will be offset for DST one hour in most cases To set the switch DST parameters so that the clock will move back one hour on the fourth Sunday of September at 11 00 p m and move forward on the fourth Sunday of March
113. 450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Contents Chapter 1 amp teeta xi Supported Platforms 1 Who Should Read this Manual ei ea e edis xii When Should I Read this Manual xii Whatis 11 15 Manual iesean a a a a a i xii What is Notimtis xiii How is the Information Organized xiii Documentation Roadmap EROA ERA A xiv Related scoireann Gin a a AA xvi User Manual CD eiropa na r cance xviii Technical SUpport xviii Managing System Files 0 ec eccecceseesseeceseeseceeeeceseceeeeaeesecseeseeaecseeeeeeaeeeeeeeaes 1 1 n This Chapter 1 1 File Management Specifications 1 2 Switch Administration Overview sussie o aaa A o 1 3 Fie Tenisie A 1 3 S Witch Directories an dive es hahah S A 1 4 File and Directory Management aspror eee N E ie 1 5 UW sane Wald Cards cs ANT ATE 1 7 Multiple Charactets aire E EEE ER 1 7 Single Characters
114. 50 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using SNMP Quick Steps for Setting Up Trap Filters Quick Steps for Setting Up Trap Filters You can filter traps by limiting user access to trap command families You can also filter according to individual traps Filtering by Trap Families The following example creates a new user account This account is granted read only privileges to three CLI command families snmp chassis and interface Read only privileges is withheld from all other command families 1 Set up a user account named usermark2 by executing the user CLI command gt user usermark2 password 2 Remove all read only privileges from the user account gt user usermark2 read only none 3 Add read only privileges for the snmp chassis and interface command families gt user usermark2 read only snmp chassis interface Note Optional To verify the user account enter the show user command A partial display is shown here gt show user User name usermark2 Read right 0x0000a200 0 00000000 Write right 0x00000000 0 00000000 Read for domains Read for families snmp chassis interface Write for domains None Snmp authentication NONE Snmp encryption NONE The usermark2 account has read only privileges for the snmp chassis and interface command families 4 Set up an SNMP station with the user account usermark2 defined above gt snmp station 210 1 2 1 usermark2 v3 enable
115. 97 Oct 31 10 50 miniboot uboot rw 64000 Nov 8 10 56 swlog2 log rw 719 Nov 6 12 07 test020 rw 199567 Nov 5 11 16 rule930 txt 63308800 bytes free page 1 10 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files File and Directory Management If you specify a path as part of the Is or dir command your screen will list the contents of the directory at the specified path gt ls flash Listing Directory flash drw 1024 Nov 8 08 30 rw 276 Nov 8 09 59 rw 4890749 Oct 21 21 43 rw 256 Nov 8 09 57 rw 64000 Nov 8 09 59 drw 1024 Nov 8 08 31 drw 1024 Nov 8 08 29 drw 1024 Nov 8 08 29 rw 222 Nov 8 09 59 rw 524288 Oct 31 10 51 rw 834497 Oct 31 10 50 rw 64000 Nov 8 10 56 rw 719 Nov 6 12 07 rw 199567 Nov 5 11 16 63308800 bytes free Making a New Directory WORKING boot params cs_system pmd random seed swlog1 log certified NETWORK SWITCH boot cfg 1 err u boot bin miniboot uboot swlog2 log test020 rule930 txt To make a new directory use the mkdir command You may specify a path for the new directory Other wise the new directory will be created in your current directory The syntax for this command requires a slash and no space between the path and the new directory name Also a slash is required at the beginning of your path specification Note Your login account must have write privileges to execute the mkdir command The following command makes a new dire
116. Alcatel Lucent s Service and Support web page be able to view and update any case open or closed that you have reported to Alcatel Lucent s technical support open a new case or access helpful release notes technical bulletins and manuals For more information on Alcatel Lucent s Service Programs see our web page at service esd alcatel lucent com call us at 1 800 995 2696 or email us at esd support alcatel lucent com Documentation Feedback Alcatel Lucent values comments on the quality and usefulness of the documentation To send comments on the OmniSwitch documentation use the following email address feedback osdocs alcatel lucent com For document identification it s helpful to include the Document Title Part Number and Revision which be found on the title page with any comments page xviii OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 1 Managing System Files This chapter describes the several methods of transferring software files onto the OmniSwitch and how to register those files for use by the switch This chapter also describes several basic switch management procedures and discusses the Command Line Interface CLI commands used e File Management copy secure copy edit rename remove change and display file attributes e Directory Management create copy move remove rename and display directory information e System Date and Time set system clock CLI commands are used in the config
117. C 1724 Extension SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF RMON MIB RFC 2819 Remote Network Monitoring RMON Management SNMPv2 SMI Information Base SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF RS 232 MIB RFC 1659 Definitions of Managed Objects for RS 232 like SNMPv2 SMI Hardware Devices by using SMIv2 SNMPv2 CONF IF MIB SNMP COMMUNITY This MIB module defines objects to help support coex SNMPv2 SMI MIB RFC 2576 istence between SNMPv1 SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 SNMP FRAME WORK MIB SNMP TARGET MIB SNMPv2 CONF SNMP FRAMEWORK An Architecture for Describing SNMP Management SNMPv2 SMI MIB RFC 2571 Frameworks SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF SNMP MPD MIB Message Processing And Dispatching For The Simple SNMPv2 SMI RFC 2572 Network Management Protocol SNMP SNMPv2 CONF SNMP NOTIFICATION SNMP Applications Notifications SNMP Entity SNMPv2 SMI MIB RFC 2573 Remote Configuration SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB SNMP TARGET MIB SNMP PROXY MIB SNMP Applications Proxy SNMP Entity Remote SNMPv2 SMI RFC 2573 Configuration SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB SNMP TARGET MIB SNMP TARGET MIB SNMP Applications Proxy SNMP Entity Remote SNMPv2 SMI 2573 Configuration SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 3 19 SNMP MIB Information Using SNMP MIB Name Description Dependencies SNMP USER BASED _ User based Security
118. CLI is vlan 501 the following is displayed gt show prefix Current prefix vlan 501 If you issue the show prefix command when there is no prefix stored by the CLI a no prefix message is displayed OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 14 CLI Services Using the CLI Prefix Prompt You can set the CLI so that your screen prompt displays the stored prefix To display the stored prefix as part of the screen prompt for the VLAN example above enter the prompt prefix CLI command as follows gt prompt prefix The following is displayed gt vlan 501 Your screen prompt includes your stored prefix until a new prompt is specified To set the prompt back to the arrow gt enter the prompt string gt prompt string arrow syntax as follows gt vlan 501 prompt string gt gt The arrow displays to indicate that your prompt has changed back to the default For more general information about changing the prompt refer to Changing the CLI Prompt on page 6 19 Command History The history command allows you to view commands you have recently issued to the switch The switch has a history buffer that stores up to 30 of the most recently executed commands Note The command history feature differs from the command logging feature in that command logging stores up to 100 of the most recent commands in a separate command log file Also the command logging feature includes additional i
119. Contents Utility CONDA titi sian itil N 1 18 Displaying Free Memory Space occ eee eee ceeceeceseeeseeecesesesesseseseeseeeseaees 1 18 Performing a File System Check 1 18 Deleting the Entire File System a A A R I E 1 19 Loading Software onto the Switch 1 20 Using the Switch as an FTP Server inin ne 1 20 Using the Switch as an FTP Client 1 21 Using Secure Shell PUP A 1 23 Closing a Secure Shell FTP Session iaia 1 24 Using TELP to Files 1 25 Usine ZMOGDEM 1 25 Registering Software Image Files seeneniit aan iE 1 27 Directories om thesS Witch 1 27 Available Tma e Fese 1 28 Application Examples for File Management 1 29 Transferring a File to the Switch Using FTP 1 29 Creating a File Directory on the Switch wo eee eeceeeecsecsetseeeeeeeesaeseeeeeens 1 30 FTP Client Application Example 1 31 Creating a File Directory Using Secure Shell FTP 1 33 Transfer a File Using Secure Shell FTP
120. CtrlTestIndex A unique name to identify the entries in the table The name is unique across various SNMP users alaSaaEthoamResultsTestRunIndex lIdentifies the row entry that reports results for a single Eth LB DMM test run The value of this object starts from 1 and can go upto a maximum of alaSaaCtrlMaxHistoryRows alaSaaCtrIlLastRunResult tThe result of the latest SAA test iteration 1 Undetermined 2 Success 3 Failed 4 Aborted alaSaaCtrlLastRunTime The date and time at which the last iteration of the SAA was run 170 alaSaaMaclterationCompleteTrap alaSaaCtrlOwn system This trap is sent is sent when a erIndex MAC SAA iteration is alaSaaCtrlT completed estIndex alaSaaMacRe sultsTestRun Index alaSaaCtrlLas tRunResult alaSaaCtrlLas tRunTime alaSaaCtrlOwnerIndex An owner name to identify entries in the table This is currently not supported and its value will always be the string USER alaSaaCtrlTestIndex A unique name to identify the entries in the table The name is unique across various SNMP users alaSaaMacResultsTestRunIndex lIdentifies the row entry that reports results for a single test run The value of this object starts from 1 and can go upto a maximum of alaSaaCtrlMaxHistoryRows alaSaaCtrIlLastRunResult The result of the latest SAA test iteration 1 Undetermined 2 Success 3 Failed 4 Aborted alaSaaCtrILastRunTime tThe date and time at which the last iteration of the SAA
121. Delay When set to the broadcast mode a client needs to advertise a broadcast delay The broadcast mode is intended for operation on networks with numerous workstations and where the highest accuracy is not required In a typical scenario one or more time servers on the network broadcast NTP messages which are received by NTP hosts The correct time is determined from an NTP message based on a pre config ured latency or broadcast delay in the order of a few milliseconds To set the broadcast delay enter the ntp broadcast delay command as shown gt ntp broadcast delay 1000 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 4 9 Configuring NTP Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP NTP Servers An NTP client needs to receive NTP updates from an NTP server Each client must have at least one server with which it synchronizes unless it is operating in broadcast mode There are also adjustable server options Designating an NTP Server To configure an NTP client to receive updates from an NTP server enter the ntp server command with the server IP address or domain name as shown gt ntp server 1 1 1 1 or gt ntp server spartacus It is possible to remove an NTP server from the list of servers from which a client synchronizes To do this enter the ntp server command with the no prefix as shown gt no ntp server 1 1 1 1 Enabling Disabling NTP Server Synchronization Tests To enable an NTP client to
122. Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Networking Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled ee Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled 4 fa Time since last refresh 0 00 00 03 Table Sort Feature Modified Sort ee page 11 20 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using WebView Configuring the Switch With WebView Advanced Sorting You can also customize a sort by defining primary and secondary sort criteria To define primary and secondary column sorts click on the Sort icon in the upper right corner of the table the column head ings are highlighted Next click on the primary and secondary column headings the numbers 1 and 2 appear in the primary and secondary columns Click again on the Sort icon to sort the table Click on the Clear icon to clear the sort settings You can sort up to four columns at one time Webview 10 255 73 12 Microsoft Internet Explorer Fie Edit View Favorites Tools a ee 2 O O A G Dawe kom 2 12 B TAGS address het 10 255 73 12twebleontentfogintty Lk gt
123. F SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS page A 8 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Software License and Copyright Statements Third Party Licenses and Notices Appendix How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copy right line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyright C 19yy lt name of author gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program if not write to the Free Soft
124. Guide This chapter provides an overview of user accounts In addition configuration procedures described in this chapter include e Creating a User on page 9 12 e Configuring Password Policy Settings on page 9 16 e Configuring Privileges for a User on page 9 27 Setting Up SNMP Access for a User Account on page 9 28 Setting Up End User Profiles on page 9 32 For information about enabling management interfaces on the switch see Chapter 10 Managing Switch Security For information about connecting a management station to the switch see Chapter 1 Managing System Files and the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Getting Started Guide User information can also be configured on external servers in addition to or instead of user accounts configured locally on the switch except end user profiles which can only be configured on the switch For information about setting up external servers that are configured with user information see the Managing Authentication Servers chapter in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 1 User Database Specifications Managing Switch User Accounts User Database Specifications Platforms Supported OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Maximum number of alphanumeric characters in a 31 username Maximum number of alphanumeric characters in a 31 user password Maxim
125. IUS ACE or local server that is being used for authentication For example to configure switch management for HTTP using the local authentication server you would enter gt aaa authentication http local Open web browser 4 Enter the IP address of the switch you want to access in the Address field of the browser and press Enter The WebView login screen appears 5 Enter the appropriate user ID and password the initial user name is admin and the initial password is switch After successful login the Chassis Management Home Page appears WebView Overview The following sections provide an overview of WebView page layouts For information on configuring the switch with WebView see page 11 8 WebView Page Layout As shown below each WebView page is divided into four areas e Banner Used to access global options e g global help telnet and log out An icon is also displayed in this area to indicate the current directory Certified or Working Certified Working e Toolbar Used to access WebView features e Feature Options Used to access specific configuration options for each feature displayed in drop down menus at the top of the page e View Configuration Area Used to view configure a feature OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 11 5 WebView Overview Using WebView F Webview 10 255 73 12 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools
126. Jean loup Gailly BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION FREESCALE SEMICONDUCTOR SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT Provided with this product is a software also known as DINK32 Dynamic Interactive Nano Kernel for 32 bit processors solely in conjunction with the development and marketing of your products which use and incorporate microprocessors which implement the PowerPC TM architecture manufactured by Motorola The licensee comply with all of the following restrictions 1 This entire notice is retained without alteration in any modified and or redistributed versions 2 The modified versions are clearly identified as such No licenses are granted by implication estoppel or otherwise under any patents or trademarks of Motorola Inc The SOFTWARE is provided on an AS IS basis and without warranty To the maximum extent permit ted by applicable law MOTOROLA DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS O
127. LI commands allow you to control trap forwarding from the agent in the switch to the SNMP management station Replaying Traps The switch normally stores all traps that have been sent out to the SNMP management stations You can list the last stored traps by using the show snmp trap replay command This command lists the traps along with their sequence number The sequence number is a record of the order in which the traps were previously sent out You can replay traps that have been stored on the switch for testing or troubleshooting purposes This is useful in the event when any traps are lost in the network To replay stored traps use the snmp trap replay command followed by the IP address for an SNMP management station This command replays or re sends all stored traps from the switch to the specified management station on demand If you do not want to replay all of the stored traps you can specify the sequence number from which the trap replay starts The switch starts the replay with a trap sequence number greater than or equal to the sequence number given in the CLI command The number of traps replayed depends on the number of traps stored for this station Absorbing Traps The switch can send the same traps to the management station many many times You can suppress the transmission of identical repetitive traps by issuing the snmp trap absorption command When trap absorption is enabled traps that are identical to traps previously s
128. LI prompt can be configured as the current system name of the switch By default the system name is set to VxTarget This can be configured using the command session prompt default system name Every time the system name is modified the prompt also gets modified The new prompt takes effect after relogging to a new session Note System name is configured for the switch using the CLI command system name The system name can also be dynamically obtained from the DHCP server DHCP Option 12 The user defined system name configuration through CLI WebView SNMP gets priority over the DHCP server values For more information on the session prompt default command refer to the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Displaying Table Information The amount of information displayed on your console screen can be extensive especially for certain show commands By default the CLI immediately scrolls all information to the screen The more mode can be used to limit the number of lines displayed to your screen To use the more mode requires two steps as follows e Specify the number of lines displayed while in the more mode e Enter the more mode The more size command specifies the number of lines displayed to the screen while in the more mode The following syntax sets the switch to display six lines of data to the screen while in the CLI is in more mode gt more size 6 The following command enables the more feature gt more Af
129. License Agreement does not convey to Licensee an interest in or to the Licensed Materials but only a limited right to use revocable in accordance with the terms of this License Agreement OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page A 1 Alcatel Lucent License Agreement Software License and Copyright Statements 3 Confidentiality Alcatel Lucent considers the Licensed Files to contain valuable trade secrets of Alcatel Lucent the unauthorized disclosure of which could cause irreparable harm to Alcatel Lucent Except as expressly set forth herein Licensee agrees to use reasonable efforts not to disclose the Licensed Files to any third party and not to use the Licensed Files other than for the purpose authorized by this License Agreement This confidentiality obligation shall continue after any termination of this License Agreement 4 Indemnity Licensee agrees to indemnify defend and hold Alcatel Lucent harmless from any claim lawsuit legal proceeding settlement or judgment including without limitation Alcatel Lucent s reason able United States and local attorneys and expert witnesses fees and costs arising out of or in connec tion with the unauthorized copying marketing performance or distribution of the Licensed Files 5 Limited Warranty Alcatel Lucent warrants for Licensee s benefit alone that the program media shall for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of commencement of this License Agreeme
130. MPv2 TC immediate need for data types not directly supported in the SMIv2 This short term solution is meant to be deprecated as a long term solution is deployed IANAifType MIB This MIB module defines the IANAifType Textual SNMPv2 SMI Convention and thus the enumerated values of the SNMPv2 TC ifType object defined in the MIB II Table IANA RTPROTO MIB This MIB module defines the IANAipRouteProtocol SNMPv2 SMI IANAipMRouteProtocol textual conventions for SNMPv2 TC use in MIBs which need to identify unicast or multi cast routing mechanisms TEEE8021 PAE MIB This MIB modules defines 802 1X ports used for port SNMPv2 SMI based access control SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB IF MIB IF MIB RFC 2863 The Interfaces Group MIB Contains generic SNMPv2 SMI information about the physical interfaces of the entity SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF SNMPv2 MIB IANAifType MIB OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 3 17 SNMP MIB Information Using SNMP MIB Name Description Dependencies IGMP STD MIB Internet Group Management Protocol MIB SNMPv2 SMI RFC 2933 SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF IF MIB INET ADDRESS MIB Textual Conventions for Internet Network Addresses SNMPv2 SMI RFC 2851 SNMPv2 TC IP BRIDGE MIB The Bridge MIB Extension module for managing SNMPv2 SMI 2674 Priority and Multicast Filtering defined by IEEE SNMPv2 TC 802 1D
131. OUI of the entity defining the object type All IEEE 802 3 defined events as appearing in 802 3ah except for the Organizationally Unique Event TLVs use the IEEE 802 3 OUI of 0x0180C2 Organizations defining their own Event Notification TLVs include their OUI in the Event Notifica tion TLV that is reflected here dot3O0amEventLogType tThe type of event that generated this entry in the event log When the OUI is the IEEE 802 3 OUI of 0x0180C2 the following event types are defined erroredSymbolEvent 1 erroredFramePe riodEvent 2 erroredFrameEvent 3 erroredFrameSecondsEvent 4 linkFault 256 dyingGaspEvent 257 criticalLinkEvent 258 dot3O0amEventLogLocation Indicates whether this event occurred locally local 1 or was received from the OAM peer via Ethernet OAM remote 2 dot3OamEventLogWindowHi The time interval in seconds that is used to monitor the High threshold limit for this event A notification is sent every time the threshold is exceeded during any 5 second monitoring interval dot3OamEventLogWindowLo The time interval in seconds that is used to monitor the Low threshold limit for this event A notification is sent every time the threshold is exceeded during any 5 second monitoring interval dot3O0amEventLogThresholdHi The High threshold level set for the event dot3OamEventLogThresholdLo tThe Low threshold level set for the event dot3O0amEventLog Value tThe value of
132. Part No 060306 10 Rev D June 2013 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide Alcatel Lucent www alcatel lucent com This user guide documents release 6 6 4 of the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 The functionality described in this guide is subject to change without notice Copyright 2013 by Alcatel Lucent All rights reserved This document may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the express written permission of Alcatel Lucent Alcatel Lucent and the Alcatel Lucent logo are registered trademarks of Alcatel Lucent Xylan OmniSwitch OmniStack and Alcatel Lucent OmniVista are registered trademarks of Alcatel Lucent OmniAccess Omni Switch Router Policy View RouterView SwitchManager VoiceView WebView X Cell X Vision and the Xylan logo are trademarks of Alcatel Lucent This OmniSwitch product contains components which may be covered by one or more of the following U S Patents U S Patent No 6 339 830 0 5 Patent No 6 070 243 U S Patent No 6 061 368 0 5 Patent No 5 394 402 U S Patent No 6 047 024 U S Patent No 6 314 106 0 5 Patent No 6 542 507 U S Patent No 6 874 090 Alcatel Lucent 26801 West Agoura Road Calabasas CA 91301 818 880 3500 FAX 818 880 3505 esd support alcatel lucent com US Customer Support 800 995 2696 International Customer Support 818 878 4507 Internet eservice ind alcatel com OmniSwitch 6250 6
133. R IMPLIED INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY WARRANTY AGAINST INFRINGEMENT WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING ANY MODIFIED VERSIONS THEREOF AND ANY ACCOM PANYING WRITTEN MATERIALS To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER Copyright C Motorola Inc 1989 2001 All rights reserved Version 13 1 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page A 13 Third Party Licenses and Notices Software License and Copyright Statements Q Boost C Libraries Provided with this product is free peer reviewed portable C source libraries Version 1 33 1 Copyright C by Beman Dawes David Abrahams 1998 2003 All rights reserved THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE U Boot Provided with this product is a software licensed from Free Software Foundation Inc This is used as OS Bootloader and located in on board flash This product is standalone and not linked statica
134. Secure Shell is not enabled on a switch use the ssh enable command to enable it You must have a login and password that is recognized by the IP address you specify When you enter your login the device you are logging in to requests your password as shown here gt ssh 11 133 30 135 login as rrloginl rrlogini s password for keyboard interactive method Once the Secure Shell session is established you can use the remote device specified by the IP address on a secure connection from your OmniSwitch Note The login parameters for Secure Shell session login parameters can be affected by the session login attempt and session login timeout CLI commands OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 2 17 Using Secure Shell Logging Into the Switch The following drawing shows an OmniSwitch using IP address 11 233 10 145 establishing a Secure Shell session across a network to another OmniSwitch using IP address 11 133 30 135 To establish this session from the console in the figure below you would use the CLI commands shown in the examples above Once you issue the correct password you are logged into the OmniSwitch at IP address 11 133 30 135 OmniSwitch OmniSwitch 11 233 10 145 11 133 30 135 Console Secure Shell Session between Two OmniSwitches To view the parameters of the Secure Shell session issue the who command The following is
135. Switch Authentication Only Server ACE Server Note A RADIUS server supporting the challenge and response mechanism as defined in RADIUS RFC 2865 can access an ACE Server for authentication purposes The ACE Server is then used for user authentication and the RADIUS server is used for user authorization Interaction With the User Database By default switch management users can be authenticated through the console port via the local user data base If external servers are configured for other management interfaces such as Telnet or HTTP but the servers become unavailable the switch will poll the local user database for login information Access to the console port provides secure failover in case of misconfiguration or if external authentica tion servers become unavailable The admin user is always authorized through the console port via the local database provided the correct password is supplied even if access to the console port is disabled The database includes information about whether or not a user is able to log into the switch and which kinds of privileges or rights the user has for managing the switch The database can be set up by the admin user or any user with write privileges to the AAA commands See Chapter 9 Managing Switch User Accounts for more information about setting up the user data base ASA and Authenticated VLANs Layer 2 Authentication uses Authenticated VLANs to authenticate users through the s
136. The port number for the LPS port on which the violation occured systemServicesDate The current System Date in the following format MM DD YYYY systemServicesTime tThe current System Time in the following format HH MM SS 92 dotlagCfmFaultAlarm bridge A gmSubnetRuleTable Overloaded HW subnet rule table gmOverloadRuleSlice Overloaded slot Id 93 unused N A N A N A page B 16 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name Objects Family 94 IldpRemTablesChange IldptatsRemTa aip blesInserts IldptatsRemTa blesDeletes IldptatsRemTa blesDrops IldptatsRemTa blesAgeouts Description This trap is sent when the value ofthe LLDP Stats Rem Table Last ChangeTime changes It can be utilized by an NMS to trigger LLDP remote systems table maintenance polls IldptatsRemTablesInserts The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular of insufficient resources the information timeliness interval has expired 95 chassisTrapsPossibleDuplicateMac physicalIndex chassis baseMacAddress physicalIndex The Physical index of the involved object baseMacAddress The base MAC Address MSAP has been inserted into tables contained in IldpRemoteSystemsData and objects IldptatsRemTablesDeletes The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MSAP has bee
137. The pre banner text cannot be configured for FTP sessions To remove a text display before the login prompt delete the pre_banner txt file it is recreated at the next bootup and will be empty or modify the pre_banner txt file page 2 22 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Logging Into the Switch Configuring Login Parameters Configuring Login Parameters You can set the number of times a user may attempt unsuccessfully to log in to the switch s CLI by using the session login attempt command as follows gt session login attempt 5 In this example the user may attempt to log in to the CLI five 5 times unsuccessfully If the user attempts to log in the sixth time the switch will break the TCP connection You may also set the length of time allowed for a successful login by using the session login timeout command as follows gt session login timeout 20 In this example the user must complete the login process within 20 seconds This means that the time between a user entering a login name and the switch processing a valid password must not exceed 20 seconds If the time out period exceeds the switch will break the TCP connection Configuring the Inactivity Timer You can set the amount of time that a user must be inactive before the session times out By default the time out for each session type is 4 minutes To change the setting enter the session timeout command with the type of session cli h
138. TrapViolationType tThe type of violation that occurred on the LPS port systemServicesDate This object contains the current System Date in the following format MM DD YYYY systemServicesTime This object contains the current System Time in the following format HH MM SS 41 alaDoSTrap alaDoSType ip Indicates that the sending agent alaDoSDetected has received a Denial of Service DoS attack alaDoSType Index field for the alaDoSTable Integer indicating the DoS Type 0 portscan 1 tcpsyn 2 pingofdeath 3 smurf 3 pepsi 5 land and 6 teardropBonkBoink alaDoSDetected Number of attacks detected OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 11 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information No Trap Name Objects Family Description 42 gmBindRuleViolation gmBindRule vlan Occurs whenever a binding rule Type which has been configured gets gmBindRuleV violated lanId gmBindRulel PAddress gmBin dRuleMacAd dress gmBindRulePor tIfIndex gmBindRulePro toClass gmBindRu leEthertype gmBindRuleD sapSsap gmBindRuleType Type of binding rule for which trap sent gmBindRuleVlanId Binding Rule VLAN Id gmBindRuleIPAddress Binding Rule IP address gmBindRuleMacAddress Binding Rule Mac Address gmBindRulePortIfIndex tThe ifIndex corresponding to the mobile port on which the binding rule violation occurred gmBindRuleProtoClass The encoded protocol number used for binding VLAN classification g
139. UdldPre vState alaUdldCurrent State alaUdldPortIfIndex tThe interface index of the port which troggered the UDLD trap alaUdldPrevState The previous UDLD state of the port notapplicable 0 shutdown 1 undetermined 2 bidirectional 3 alaUdIdCurrentState he current UDLD state of the port notapplicable 0 shutdown 1 undetermined 2 bidirectional 3 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 19 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information No Trap Name Objects Family Description 106 healthMonIpcTrap health health This trap is sent when IPC Pools MonIpcPool exceed usage Status healthMonIpcPoolStatus The IPC Pools usage status 107 bemHashCollisionTrap eth This trap is sent when bemHashCollisionTrap the 108 healthMonCpuShutPortTrap healthModule health This trap is sent when port is shut Slot down because of a CPU spike ifIndex healthMod uleCpuLatest healthModuleSlot The slot on which anomaly is detected if Index tThe port on which anomaly is detected healthModuleCpuLatest The average module level CPU utilization over the latest sample period percent 109 arpMaxLimitReached none 110 ndpMaxLimitReached none ip ipv6 This trap is sent when the hard ware table has reached the maximum number of entries sup ported The OmniSwitch will not generate new ARP request for new nexthops This trap is sent when the hard ware table has reached the
140. WebView CLI Defaults Web Management Command Line Interface CLI commands allow you to enable disable WebView enable disable Secure Socket Layer SSL and view basic WebView parameters These configuration options are also available in WebView The following table lists the defaults for WebView configuration through the http and https commands Description Command Default WebView Status http server enabled Force SSL http ssl disabled HTTPS port https port 443 HTTP port http port 80 Browser Setup Set up your browser preferences or options as follows Cookies must be enabled This is the default JavaScript must be enabled supported Java must be enabled Style sheets must be enabled that is the colors fonts backgrounds and so on of web pages must always be used rather than any user configured settings Checking for new versions of pages must be set to Every time when your browser opens If you are using a proxy server the proxy settings must be configured to bypass the switch on which you are running WebView the local switch Typically many of these settings are configured as the default Different browsers and different versions of the same browser can have different dialogs for these settings Check your browser help pages if you need help page 11 2 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using WebView WebView CLI Commands WebView CLI Commands The following configura
141. a common heading e A configuration file named boot cfg which is an ASCII based text file sets and controls the config urable functions inherent in the image files provided with the switch This file can be modified by the user When the switch boots it looks for the file called boot cfg It uses this file to set various switch parameters defined by the image files e boot file on the OmniSwitch named boot slot cfg is an ASCII based text file that numbers the switches in a stack A boot file on the OmniSwitch named boot params is an ASCII based text file that sets the Ethernet Management Port EMP IP address gateway and mask It also controls the baud rate of the console port and displays directory loading information and is located in the Flash memory of the switch Modifications to the switch parameters affect or change the configuration file The image files are static for the purposes of running the switch though they can be updated and revised with future releases or enhancements Image and configuration files are stored in the Flash memory which is equivalent to a hard drive memory in specified directories When the switch is running it loads the image and configura tion files from the Flash memory into the RAM When changes are made to the configuration file the changes are first stored in the RAM The procedures for saving these changes through the CLI are detailed in the sections to follow CMM Software Directory Struct
142. a computer client or server to another server or reference time source such as a radio or satellite receiver It provides client time accuracies within a millisecond on LANs and up to a few tens of milliseconds on WANs relative to a primary server synchronized to Universal Coordinated Time UTC via a Global Positioning Service receiver for exam ple In This Chapter This chapter describes the basic components of the OmniSwitch implementation of Network Time Proto col and how to configure it through Command Line Interface CLI CLI commands are used in the configuration examples for more details about the syntax of commands see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Configuration procedures described in this chapter include e Enabling the NTP client and selecting the NTP mode See Configuring the OmniSwitch as a Client on page 4 9 Selecting an NTP server for the NTP client and modifying settings for communicating with the server See NTP Servers on page 4 10 e Enabling authentication in NTP negotiations See Using Authentication on page 4 12 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 4 1 NTP Specifications Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP NTP Specifications RFCs supported 1305 Network Time Protocol Platforms Supported OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Maximum number of NTP servers per client 3 NTP Defaults Table The following table shows the default settings o
143. a reboot of the primary CMM in 3 hr and 3 min you would enter gt reload primary in 3 03 To schedule a reboot of the primary CMM for June 30 at 8 00 pm you would enter gt reload primary at 20 00 june 30 Note Scheduled reboot times has to be entered in military format a twenty four hour clock Cancelling a Scheduled Reboot To cancel a scheduled reboot use the cancel keyword A cancel command can be specified for a primary reboot a secondary reboot or all currently scheduled reboots for example to cancel the primary reboot set above enter the following gt reload primary cancel To cancel all scheduled reboots with a single command enter the following gt reload cancel page 5 14 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant Checking the Status of a Scheduled Reboot You can check the status of a reboot set for a later time by entering the following command gt show reload or gt show reload status The reload command is described in detail in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 15 Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant Managing CMM Directory Content Copying the Running Configuration to the Working Directory Once the switch has booted and is running a user can modify various parameters of switch functionality These c
144. a traffic due to incompatibilities in different versions of switch software Certifying the working directory is described in Copying the Working Directory to the Certified Directory on page 5 21 while synchronizing the switch is described in Synchronizing the Primary and Secondary CMMs on page 5 27 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 11 CMM Files Managing CMM Directory Content Scenario 4 Adding a New Switch to a Stack Since the OmniSwitch is designed to be expandable it is likely that new switches are added to stacks The stack automatically detects new switches added to the stack and new switches can pass traffic without a complete reboot of the stack However a new switch added to the stack may not have the same software as the rest of the stack In this case the new switch must be synchronized with the stack software The following diagram illustrates this idea The diagram shows a stack of three switches to which a fourth switch is added W C 1 Stack is pow ered up and boots from the certified directory or a copy flash synchro com mand is issued m He W gt _ gt W 2 The contents of the certified direc tory of the primary CMM switch are copied to the working directory of the secondary CMM switch The working directory is then copied to the certi fied
145. aPimInvalid JoinPruneRp alaPimNeigh borUpTime alaPimGroupMappingPimMode The PIM mode used for groups in this group prefix alaPimInvalidRegisterAddressType tThe address type stored in alaPimInvalidRegisterOrigin alaPimInvalid RegisterGroup and alaPimInvalidRegisterRp If no unexpected Register messages are received the onject is set to Unknown alaPimInvalidJoinPruneOrigin The source address of the last unexpected Join Prune message received alaPimInvalidJoinPruneGroup tThe IP multicast group address carried in the last unexpected Join Prune message received alaPimInvalidJoinPruneRp tThe RP address carried in the last unexpected Join Prune message received alaPimNeighborUpTime The time since this PIM neighbor last became a neighbor of the local router page B 18 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name Objects Family Description 99 alaPimRPMappingChange alaPimGroup ipmr This trap is sent when a change is MappingPim detected to the active RP map Mode ping on the device alaPimGroup MappingPre The notification is generated cedence whenever the PIM RP Mapping Change Count is incremented subject to the rate limit specified by PIM RP Mapping Change Notification Period alaPimGroupMappingPimMode The PIM mode used for groups in this group prefix alaPimGroupMappingPrecedence The value for alaPimGroupMappingPrecedence to be use
146. abled The command log file has a 66402 byte capacity This capacity allows up to 100 of the most recent commands to be recorded Because all CLI command logging information is archived to the command log file command history information is lost if the file is deleted Note The command log file cannot be deleted while the command logging feature is enabled Before attempting to remove the file be sure to disable command logging To disable command logging refer to the information below Disabling Command Logging To disable the command logging simply enter the following command gt command log disable Disabling command logging does not automatically remove the command log file from the flash directory All commands logged before the command log disable syntax was entered remains available for viewing For information on viewing logged commands along with the command entry results refer to Viewing Logged CLI Commands and Command Entry Results on page 6 18 page 6 17 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using the CLI Logging CLI Commands and Entry Results Viewing the Current Command Logging Status As mentioned above the command logging feature is disabled by default To view whether the feature is currently enabled or disabled on the switch use the show command log status command For example gt show command log status CLI command logging Enable In this case the feature has been enabled by t
147. abled Enabled Disabled Off B 48 VLAN 48 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off ESA i N I i L since last refresh 0 00 00 03 intenet Table Sort Feature Advanced Sort OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 11 21 Configuring the Switch With WebView Using WebView Table Paging Certain potentially large tables e g VLANs have a paging feature that loads the table data in increments of 50 or 100 entries If the table reaches this threshold the first group of entries is displayed and a Next button appears at the bottom of the page Click Next to view the next group of entries Click Previous to view the previous group of entries Webview 10 255 73 12 Microsoft internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help _ O O A Alp was OI B AOD Address amp http 10 255 Jweb content login html WebView guration Help About Telnet vl inactive Disabled VLAN 93 Enabled inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off Disabled VLAN 94 Enab ed inactive l Enabled Enabled Disabled Off Disabled im 95 VLAN 95 Enabled j nactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off Disabled 96 VLAN 96 Enabled inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Off Disabled 97 VLAN
148. access for switch management is enabled Telnet users will be authenticated through a chain of servers that includes a RADIUS server and an LDAP server that have already been configured through the aaa radius server and aaa Idap server commands respectively For example gt aaa authentication telnet radl ldap2 local After this command is entered Telnet users will be authenticated to manage the switch through the rad1 RADIUS server If that server is unavailable the LDAP server Idap2 will be polled for user information If that server is unavailable the local user database will be polled for user information If the local user database is specified it must be last in the list of servers To disable authenticated access for a management interface use the no form of the command with the keyword for the interface For example gt no aaa authentication ftp FTP access is now denied on the switch Note The admin user always has switch access through the console port even if access is denied through the console port To remove a server from the authenticated switch access configuration enter the aaa authentication command with the relevant server names s and leave out the names of any servers you want to remove For example gt aaa authentication telnet 1 local The server Idap2 is removed for Telnet access and will not be polled for user information when users attempt to log into the switch through Telnet Note SNMP c
149. address Found instruction file Download firmware and or boot cfg onl Download Script Y Switch is available remotely Illustration of Automatic Remote Configuration Process Run Script Reload Switch 1 8 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 8 11 Automatic Remote Configuration Download Process Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Additional Process Notes 1 Once the switch obtains an IP interface from the DHCP server remote access through SSH is automatically configured to allow remote access in case of any download errors during the Auto Configuration process Note It is not recommended to have the write memory command in the script file if a configuration file is downloaded This causes the boot cfg file to be overwritten with the commands in the script file 2 After the successful download of the script file the DHCP IP interface is automatically deleted However SSH access remains enabled Use the no aaa authentication ssh command to disable SSH connectivity if desired page 8 12 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Download Component Files Download Component Files This section provides the details of the files downloaded and how they are utilized during the automatic configuration process The main component files are Instruction file
150. agement agent It is sent to alert the management station to some event or condition on the switch Traps can indicate improper user authentication restarts the loss of a connection or other significant events You can configure the switch so that traps are forwarded to or suppressed from transmission to the management station under different circumstances A trap informs the management station when the switch configuration is saved using CLI SNMP WEB Trap Filtering You can filter SNMP traps in at least two ways You can filter traps by limiting user access to trap families or you can filter according to individual traps Filtering by Trap Families Access to SNMP traps can be restricted by withholding access privileges for user accounts to certain command families or domains Designation of particular command families for user access is sometimes referred to as partition management SNMP traps are divided into functional families as shown in the Using SNMP For Switch Security on page 3 10 These families correspond to switch CLI command families When read only privileges for a user account are restricted for a command family that user account is also restricted from reading traps associated with that family Procedures for filtering traps according to command families can be found in the Quick Steps for Filtering by Trap Families on page 3 5 For a list of trap names command families and their descriptions refer to the
151. agement Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Configuring Password Policy Settings Configuring Password Character Requirements The character requirements specified in the global password policy determine the minimum number of uppercase lowercase non alphanumeric and 10 base digit characters required in all passwords These requirements are configured using the following user password policy commands Command Configures user password policy min uppercase The minimum number of uppercase characters required in all passwords user password policy min lowercase The minimum number of lowercase characters required in all passwords user password policy min digit The minimum number of base 10 digits required in all passwords user password policy min nonalpha The minimum number of non alphanumeric char acters symbols required in all passwords Specifying zero with any of the these commands disables the requirement For example if the number of minimum uppercase characters is set to zero the default then there is no requirement for a password to contain any uppercase characters OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 19 Configuring Password Policy Settings Managing Switch User Accounts Configuring Password Expiration By default password expiration is disabled on the switch A global default password expiration can be specified for all users or password expiration can b
152. aging Automatic Remote Configuration Download Troubleshooting Error Description Table The following table provides information on the common server connection failures and file download errors that can occur during Automatic Remote Configuration Error Type User Login Error User logged in via console Auto Description DHCP client is automatically stopped only if Auto Config Abort matic Remote configuration is aborted Instruction File not Downloaded user logs in to the switch through console port before getting the DHCP lease Instruction file not downloaded due to TFTP TFTP Response Timeout and the Max try 3 For TFTP reached not reachable Primary Secondary Server Connection Download of file lt File name and pathname gt from Primary Server Failed Starting download of file lt File name and pathname gt from Secondary Server Download Failed lt File name and pathname gt using both Pri amp Sec IP File download failure from primary server File download failure from both primary and secondary server File Download and File Location Errors Transfer error lt File name and pathname gt Download failed for configuration file lt File name and pathname gt Not all image files are downloaded Unable to download the firmware version Unable to download boot config file Unable to download AlcatelDebug cfg File transfer failure Configuratio
153. al or manuals that will be most helpful to you Stage 1 Using the Switch for the First Time Pertinent Documentation Getting Started Guide Release Notes A hard copy Getting Started Guide is included with your switch this guide provides all the information you need to get your switch up and running the first time It provides information on unpacking the switch rack mounting the switch installing NI modules unlocking access control setting the switch s IP address and setting up a password It also includes succinct overview information on fundamental aspects of the switch such as hardware LEDs the software directory structure CLI conventions and web based management At this time you should also familiarize yourself with the Release Notes that accompanied your switch This document includes important information on feature limitations that are not included in other user guides Stage 2 Gaining Familiarity with Basic Switch Functions Pertinent Documentation Hardware Users Guide Switch Management Guide Once you have your switch up and running you will want to begin investigating basic aspects of its hard ware and software Information about switch hardware is provided in the Hardware Guide This guide provides specifications illustrations and descriptions of all hardware components such as chassis power supplies Chassis Management Modules CMMs Network Interface NI modules and cooling fans It also includes steps for
154. an only use LDAP servers or the local user database for authentication Configuring the Default Setting The default keyword can be used to specify the default setting for all management interfaces except those that have been explicitly denied For example gt no aaa authentication ftp gt aaa authentication default ldap2 local In this example all management interfaces except FTP are given switch access through Idap2 and the local user database Since SNMP can only use LDAP servers or the local database for authentication RADIUS or ACE Server are not valid servers for SNMP management access If the default interface setting includes only RADIUS and or ACE server the default setting will not be used for SNMP For example gt no aaa authentication ftp gt aaa authentication default radl rad2 page 10 10 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch Security Setting Up Management Interfaces for ASA In this scenario SNMP access is not enabled because only RADIUS servers have been included in the default setting If servers of different types are configured and include LDAP or local SNMP will be enabled through those servers For example gt aaa authentication default 1 ldap2 local In this case SNMP access is enabled and users will be authenticated through Idap2 and the local data base The default keyword can also be used to reset a specified interface to the default interface set
155. anagement 3 14 Replaying 3 14 ABSOrDIN GS ITAD 3 14 Sending Traps to WeDVieW 3 14 Checking Configuration File Using Traps 3 15 SNMP MIB Information aaeeei E 3 16 MIB dasa teltoensvettesetess tel Avan vasteets tel diated 3 16 MIB Table Description 3 16 Industry Standard MIBS 3 17 Enterprise Proprietary MIBS 3 21 Verifying the SNMP Configuration 3 25 Chapter 4 Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP 4 1 Tn This Chapter atheistic teat van ve 4 1 5 4 2 Defaults Table rerai abina teed eee eal et tase tant tad 4 2 Q iek Steps e a 4 3 TRE NRTA TA A 4 5 Stat 2h sewed aed 4 6 Usine NTP in a Network
156. anaging System Files for a Secure Shell FTP application exam ple Closing a Secure Shell FTP Session To terminate the Secure Shell FTP session issue the exit command The following is displayed gt exit Connection to 11 133 30 135 closed This display indicates the Secure Shell FTP session with IP address 11 133 20 135 is closed The user is now logged into the OmniSwitch as a local device with no active remote connection Note Establishing and closing the Secure Shell FTPv6 connection is similar to that of the Secure Shell FTP connection page 2 20 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Logging Into the Switch Modifying the Login Banner Modifying the Login Banner The Login Banner feature allows you to change the banner that displays whenever someone logs into the switch This feature can be used to display messages about user authorization and security You can display the same banner for all login sessions or you can implement different banners for different login sessions You can display a different banner for logins initiated by FTP sessions than for logins initiated by a direct console or a Telnet connection The default login message looks similar to the following login user123 password Welcome to the Alcatel Lucent OmniSwitch 6450 Software Version 6 6 1 01 Development October 05 2007 Copyright c 1994 2007 Alcatel Lucent All Rights reserved OmniSwitch TM is a trademar
157. and This command also requires specifying the external servers and or local user database that is used to authenticate users The process of authenticating users to manage the switch is called Authenticated Switch Access ASA Authenticated Switch Access is described in detail in Chapter 10 Managing Switch Security An overview of management methods is listed here Logging Into the CLI e Console port A direct connection to the switch through the console port The console port is always enabled for the default user account For more information about connecting to the console port see your OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Hardware Users Guide e Telnet Any standard Telnet client may be used for remote login to the switch This method is not secure For more information about using Telnet to access the switch see Using Telnet on page 2 8 e FTP Any standard FTP client may be used for remote login to the switch This method is not secure See Using FTP on page 2 10 e Secure Shell Any standard Secure Shell client may be used for remote login to the switch See Using Secure Shell on page 2 12 page 2 6 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Logging Into the Switch Overview of Switch Login Components Using the WebView Management Tool e HTTP The switch has Web browser management interface for users logging in through HTTP This management tool is called WebView For more information about us
158. asons are documented in RFC 1305 in the data format section This should not be a problem until the year 2035 as setting the date this far in advance runs counter to the administrative intention of running NTP Authentication NTP is designed to use MD5 encryption authentication to prevent outside influence upon NTP timestamp information This is done by using a key file The key file is loaded into the switch memory and consists of a text file that lists key identifiers that correspond to particular NTP entities If authentication is enabled on an NTP switch any NTP message sent to the switch must contain the correct key ID in the message packet to use in decryption Likewise any message sent from the authenti cation enabled switch is not readable unless the receiving NTP entity possesses the correct key ID The key file is a text txt file that contains a list of keys that are used to authenticate NTP servers It should be located in the networking directory of the switch Key files are created by a system administrator independent of the NTP protocol and then placed in the switch memory when the switch boots An example of a key file is shown below 2 M RIrop8KPPvQvYotM md5 key as an ASCII random string 14 M sundial md5 key as an ASCII string In a key file the first token is the key number ID the second is the key format and the third is the key itself The text following is not counted as part of the key and is u
159. at uniquely identifies an entry in the alarm table Each such entry defines a diagnostic sample at a particular interval for an object on the device alarmVariable The object identifier of the particular variable to be sampled Only variables that resolve to an ASN 1 primitive type of INTEGER INTEGER Integer32 Counter32 Counter64 Gauge or TimeTicks may be sampled alarmSampleType tThe method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds If the value of this object is absolute Value 1 the value of the selected variable will be compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval If the value of this object is deltaValue 2 the value of the selected variable at the last sample will be subtracted from the current value and the differ ence compared with the thresholds alarm Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period For example if the sample type is deltaValue this value will be the difference between the samples at the beginning and end of the period If the sample type is absolute Value this value will be the sampled value at the end of the period alarmFallingThreshold A threshold for the sampled statistic When the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold a single event will be generated A single event will also be generated if the first
160. ates only on the combo ports and uplink ports on OmniSwitch during the Automatic Remote Configuration stage 1 When an OmniSwitch detects PDUs from a remote peer connected through a combo or an uplink port it configures that port as a LACP port and starts LACP handshake with the peer device 2 The newly formed LACP port is made a member of VLAN 127 and VLAN 1 and DHCP packets are sent out through this LACP port 3 Once the remote configuration download is complete on this LACP port the switch configuration file can automatically configure the required ports for the link aggregate 4 After the process is completed this automatic link aggregate and related associations are deleted Note The LACP auto detection mode is not supported when the switch boots up in normal mode non remote configuration load mode The LACP configuration at the peer device must not be changed once the automatic link aggregate is created using the parameters in the LACP PDU sent from the peer device DHCP Client Auto Configuration Process The automatic remote configuration download feature supports three DHCP client configuration methods to obtain an initial dynamic IP address from the DHCP server e Static DHCP client on untagged VLAN 1 e Dynamic DHCP client on tagged VLAN 127 e Dynamic DHCP client on LLDP tagged management VLAN Note Some Metro networks use a fixed tagged VLAN 127 for initial IP assignment The auto configuration of Dynamic DHCP clie
161. ation is Overwritten by the Certified Directory on Boot OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 5 CMM Files Managing CMM Directory Content Scenario 2 Running Configuration Saved to Working Directory The network administrator recreates the running configuration of Switch X and immediately saves the running configuration to the working directory In another mishap the power to the switch is again interrupted The switch reboots from certified direc tory overwrites all of the changes in the running configuration and rolls back to the certified directory which in this case is the factory settings However since the configuration file was saved to the working directory that file is still in the working directory and can be retrieved Since the working and certified directories are not the same the switch is running from the certified directory This is illustrated in the following diagram Vly 22 7 R W C 1 Switch boots from certified directory using 4 Switch reboots from the certified directory by using 2 Changes are made to the run ning configura tion and stored in 3 Power is inter rupted and the switch goes down factory configura tion settings Since the working and certified directories are the same it will be running from the working direc tory the running con figuration and then
162. bView sessions see Chapter 11 Using WebView OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 2 23 Enabling the DNS Resolver Logging Into the Switch Enabling the DNS Resolver A Domain Name System DNS resolver is an optional internet service that translates host names into IP addresses Every time you enter a host name when logging into the switch a DNS service must look up the name on a server and resolve the name to an IP address You can configure up to three IPv4 domain name servers and three IPv6 domain name servers that is queried in turn to resolve the host name If all servers are queried and none can resolve the host name to an IP address the DNS fails If the DNS fails you must either enter an IP or IPv6 address in place of the host name or specify the necessary lookup tables on one of the specified servers Note You do not need to enable the DNS resolver service unless you want to communicate with the switch by using a host name If you use an IP or IPv6 address rather than a host name the DNS resolver service is not needed You must perform three steps on the switch to enable the DNS resolver service 1 Set the default domain name for DNS lookups with the domain name CLI command gt domain name mycompanyl com 2 Use the ip domain lookup CLI command to enable the DNS resolver service gt ip domain lookup You can disable the DNS resolver by using the no ip domain lookup command For mo
163. ber entered after tty defines the number of lines on the screen It must be a number between 10 and 150 The second number after tty defines the number of columns on the screen It must be a number between 20 and 150 View the current setting for your screen by using the show tty command Changing the CLI Prompt You can change the system prompt that displays on the screen when you are logged in to the switch The default prompt consists of a dash greater than gt text string To change the text string that defines the prompt from gt to gt use the session prompt default command as follows gt gt session prompt default gt gt The switch displays the new prompt string after the command is entered Several building blocks are provided that can automatically display system information along with the prompt string You can set a switch to display any combination of the current username system time system date and system prefix along with the prompt string The following command defines the prefix to display the system time and date along with the prompt string defined in the above example gt prompt time date string gt 01 31 01 04 29 02 gt For an example of using a stored prefix as part of the prompt refer to Prefix Prompt on page 6 15 page 6 19 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using the CLI Customizing the Screen Display Setting Session Prompt as System Name C
164. bjects written in the SNMP module language which can be monitored by the NMS The SNMP agent contains MIB variables which have values the NMS can request or change using Get GetNext GetBulk or Set operations The agent can also send unsolicited messages traps or informs to the NMS to notify the manager of network conditions SNMP Operations Devices on the network are managed through transactions between the NMS and the SNMP agent residing on the network device that is switch SNMP provides two kinds of management transactions manager request agent response and unsolicited notifications traps or informs from the agent to the manager In a manager request agent response transaction the SNMP manager sends a request packet referred to as a Protocol Data Unit PDU to the SNMP agent in the switch The SNMP agent complies with the request and sends a response PDU to the manager The types of management requests are Get GetNext and GetBulk requests These transactions are used to request information from the switch Get GetNext or GetBulk or to change the value of an object instance on the switch Set In an unsolicited notification the SNMP agent in the switch sends a trap PDU to the SNMP manager to inform it that an event has occurred The SNMP manager normally does not send confirmation to the agent acknowledging receipt of a trap OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 3 7 SNMP Overview Using SNMP
165. bled blocked from changing password page 9 2 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts User Account Defaults e Global user account lockout defaults are as follows Parameter Description Command Default Length of time during which failed user lockout window 0 all attempts are login attempts are counted counted Length of time a user account user lockout duration 0 account remains remains locked out of the switch locked until manually before the account is automatically unlocked unlocked Maximum number of failed login user lockout threshold 0 limit to the num attempts allowed during the lockout ber of failed login window time period attempts OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 3 Overview of User Accounts Managing Switch User Accounts Overview of User Accounts A user account includes a login name password and user privileges The account also includes privilege or profile information depending on the type of user account There are two types of accounts network administrator accounts and end user or customer login accounts Network administrator accounts are configured with user sometimes called functional privileges These privileges determine whether the user has read or write access to the switch and which command domains and command families the user is authorized to execute on the switch Customer lo
166. bout this command and those used in the configuration examples throughout this section see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide page 9 16 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Configuring Password Policy Settings Setting a Minimum Password Size The default minimum password length or size is 8 characters To configure a minimum password size enter the user password size min command For example gt user password size min 10 The minimum length for any passwords configured for users is now 10 characters The maximum password length is 31 characters OmniS witch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 17 Configuring Password Policy Settings Managing Switch User Accounts Configuring the Username Password Exception By default specifying the username as all or part of a password is allowed Use the user password policy cannot contain username command to block the ability to configure a password that contains the user name For example gt user password policy cannot contain username enable Enabling this functionality prevents the user from specifying the username in the password that is config ured for the same user account For example the password for the account username of public can not contain the word public in any part of the password However the username of another account is still allowed page 9 18 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Man
167. ceeececeecececececeeseeeneenes 9 20 Configuring the Password History ccccecsccessscesseeeseeeeseeceseeceeseceseeesaeeesseeenteesaeees 9 21 Configuring the Minimum Age for a Password cccssccesseesseceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeenaeees 9 22 Configuring Global User Lockout Settings 200 0 ce ccecceccsceccecececesecenecseceneceneceneeeeeeeens 9 22 Configuring the User Lockout Window ccecceeseceseceecesceceecececesecceceeceeeeeeeneenes 9 23 Configuring the User Lockout Threshold Number 9 24 Configuring the User Lockout Duration Time 9 25 Manually Locking and Unlocking User Accounts 9 26 Configuring Privileges for a User E E aei 9 27 Setting Up SNMP Access for a User Account 9 28 SNMP Access Without Authentication Encryption 9 29 SNMP Access With Authentication Encryption 9 30 Removing SNMP Access From 2 9 31 Setting Up End User Proriles O ate 9 32 Creating End User Profiles 9 33 Setting Up Port 9 34 Setting Up VLAN Ranges a Profile 2 0 cee eeeeeseeseceneeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 9 35 Associating a Profile With a User oo eeceesccsecesecese
168. ceived alaPimInvali dRegisterAd The notification is generated dressType whenever the PIM Invalid Regis alaPimInvali ter Message Reveived counter is dRegisterOri incremented subject to the rate gin limit specified by the Invalid alaPimInvali Register NotificationPeriod dRegister Group alaPimInvali dRegisterRp alaPimGroupMappingPimMode The PIM mode used for groups in this group prefix alaPimInvalidRegisterAddressType tThe address type stored in alaPimInvalidRegisterOrigin alaPimInvalid RegisterGroup and alaPimInvalidRegisterRp If no unexpected Register messages are received the onject is set to Unknown alaPimInvalidRegisterOrigin The source address of the last unexpected Register message received by this device alaPimInvalidRegisterGroup tThe IP multicast group address to which the last unexpected Register message received by this device was addressed alaPimInvalidRegisterRp tThe RP address to which the last unexpected Register message received by this device was delivered 98 alaPimInvalidJoinPrune alaPimGroup ipmr This trap is sent when an invalid MappingPim PIM Join Prune message is Mode received alaPimInvalid JoinPruneAd The notification is generated dressType whenever the PIM Invalid Join alaPimInvalid Prune Messages Recieved JoinPruneOri counter is incremented subject to gin the rate limit specified by the alaPimInvalid PIM Invalid Join Prune Notifica JoinPrune tion Period Group al
169. ceseceecececececnecsecceceecneeseeeeneenes 9 36 Removing a Profile From the Configuration 0 cecceccsececesecececeeceeeceeeceeeeseeeneenes 9 37 Verifying the User Configuration cc eecesccssceeceseeeseesseeesesceesceceeceeseesseseeeeenessneess 9 38 Chapter 10 Managing Switch Security 10 1 In This Chapter ss 22 ccsv d sndieviesddsnesvasut iddavies aean En EEEE EE a E EEEE tous A Ea A ES e aiaa 10 1 Switch Security Specifications aood E AANA 10 2 Switch Security Default ASSA OESAU NRTA UTNE 10 2 Switch Security OVErvieW a a a A a eiiie 10 3 Authenticated Switch ACCESS woven a 10 4 AAA Servers RADIUS LDAP sassesssessseesseesessseessesssesssessecssesseesseesseesseseesseee 10 4 Authentication only ACE Servyer sesesesseseessrssrssrsersrssrssessrstessssesstesestesseseesseses 10 4 Interaction With the User Database an E 10 5 ASA and Authenticated en ai eN aE RE RE R A 10 5 x OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Contents Configuring Authenticated Switch ACCESS oo cece eseecceseeseeeeeeecseceeceeeesesseeeseaeeaeeneens 10 6 Quick Steps for Setting Up ASA 10 7 Setting Up Management Interfaces for ASA oo eee eeeeceseseceeeeseeseenenseeseeeeeeeas 10 9 Enabling Switch Access
170. cfg 2 Copy the new boot cfg file from the flash directory to the flash working directory by using the cp command for example gt cp boot cfg working boot cfg Reboot the switch from the flash working directory by entering the following command gt reload working no rollback timeout Once the boot cfg file is confirmed to be good it has to be saved to the certified directory by using the procedure described in Copying the Working Directory to the Certified Directory on page 5 21 page 5 34 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content Displaying CMM Conditions Displaying CMM Conditions To show various CMM conditions such as where the switch is running from and which files are installed use the following CLI show commands show running directory Shows the directory from where the switch was booted show reload Shows the status of any time delayed reboot s that are pending on the switch show microcode Displays microcode versions installed on the switch For more information on the resulting displays from these commands see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide An example of the output for the show microcode command is given in Show Switch Files on page 5 24 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 35 Displaying CMM Conditions Managing CMM Directory Content page 5 36 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013
171. ch current system date enter the new date with the command syntax The following command will set the switch system date to June 23 2002 gt system date 06 23 2002 When you specify the date you must use the mm dd yyyy syntax where mm is the month dd is the day and yyyy is the year Months are specified as numbers from 01 to 12 Days are specified as numbers from 1 to 31 You must use two digits to define the month and the day You must use four digits to specify the year Time Zone To determine the current time zone or to specify a new time zone for your switch use the system timezone command This specifies the time zone for the switch and sets the system clock to run on UTC time or Greenwich Mean Time The following is displayed for the Pacific standard time zone gt system timezone PST Coordinated Universal Time UTC 8 hours To set a new time zone for the system clock use the system timezone command along with the appropri ate time zone abbreviation Refer to the table in Enabling DST on page 1 42 for time zone abbrevia tions The following command sets the system clock to run on Pacific standard time gt system timezone pst PST Coordinated Universal Time UTC 8 hours OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 39 Setting the System Clock Managing System Files You may set the switch system clock to a time that is offset from standard UTC time For example you can set a time that is
172. changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in them selves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as sepa rate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to
173. characters in length If spaces are part of the text the string must be enclosed in quotation marks The following CLI command maps the username community_user1 to the community string comstring2 gt snmp community map comstring2 user community _userl enable 3 Verify that the community string mapping mode is enabled By default the community strings database is enabled If community string mapping is not enabled the community string configuration is not checked by the switch If the community string mapping mode is disabled use the following command to enable it gt snmp community map mode enable Note Optional To verify that the community string is properly mapped to the username enter the show snmp community map command The display is similar to the one shown here gt show snmp community map Community mode enabled status community string user name enabled comstring2 community _userl This display also verifies that the community map mode is enabled page 3 10 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using SNMP Using SNMP For Switch Security Encryption and Authentication SNMPv3 Two important processes are used to verify that the message contents have not been altered and that the source of the message is authentic These processes are encryption and authentication A typical data encryption process requires an encryption algorithm on both ends of the transmission and a
174. cifying a path is optional The following command will display the textfile rtf text file located in the flash working directory gt more flash working textfile rtf The switch will display the file text on your terminal screen until the entire screen is full After that when you press Enter the switch will scroll the file text until it fills up another screen or until the end of the file The more mode assumes a screen that is 80 columns wide and 24 lines long Text Editing on the Switch The switch software includes a standard UNIX type line editor called Vi The Vi editor is available on most UNIX systems No attempt is being made to document Vi in this manual because information on it is freely available on the Internet Invoke the Vi Editor You can invoke the Vi editor from the command line Use the following syntax to view the switchlog txt file located in the flash working directory gt vi flash working switchlog txt You can invoke the Vi editor in read only mode by using the following syntax gt view To exit the Vi editor use the Cap ZZ key sequence OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 7 9 Creating Snapshot Configuration Files Working With Configuration Files Creating Snapshot Configuration Files You can generate a list of configurations currently running on the switch by using the configuration snapshot command A snapshot is a text file that lists commands issued t
175. clude Telnet FTP HTTP Secure Shell and SNMP This chapter describes how to set up access for management interfaces For more details about particular management interfaces and how they are used see Chapter 2 Logging Into the Switch To give switch access to management interfaces use the aaa authentication command to allow or deny access to each interface type the default keyword can be used to configure access for all interface types Specify the server s to be used for authentication through the indicated management interface Keywords used for specifying management interfaces are listed here keywords console ssh telnet snmp ftp default http ssh is the keyword used to specify Secure Shell To specify an external authentication server or servers use the RADIUS or LDAP server name or the keyword ace for an ACE Server To specify that the local user database must be used for authentication use the local keyword Up to four servers can be specified RADIUS and LDAP servers are set up to communicate with the switch via the aaa radius server and aaa tacacs server commands ACE Servers do not require any configuration but you must FTP the sdconf rec file from the server to the switch s network directory For more information about configur ing the switch to communicate with these servers see the Managing Authentication Servers chapter of the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide Note RADIUS or LDAP
176. com_cfg txt in 6 15 Note Optional To verify that the switch received this configuration apply request enter the show configuration status command The display is similar to the one shown here gt show configuration status File configuration lt flash working amzncom_cfg txt gt scheduled at 03 07 02 05 02 The scheduled at date and time show when the file will be applied This value is 6 hours and 15 minutes from the date and time the command was issued For more information about this display see Configuration File Manager Commands in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 7 5 Configuration Files Overview Working With Configuration Files Configuration Files Overview Instead of using CLI commands entered at a workstation you can configure the switch using an ASCII based text file You may type CLI commands directly into a text document to create a configuration file that will reside in your switch s flash directory Configuration files are created in the following ways e You may create edit and view a file using a standard text editor such as MS WordPad or Notepad on a workstation The file can then be uploaded to the switch s flash file directory e You can invoke the switch s CLI configuration snapshot command to capture the switch s current configuration into a text file This causes a configuration file to be created in the swi
177. command You can configure the number of history commands saved by the switch for display by the show history command The range for the history size value is 1 to 30 To view the history parameters use the show history parameters command gt history size 30 gt show history parameters History size 30 CurrentSize 10 Index Range 1 10 The values in this display are defined here e History Size The number of commands the switch will save for display by the show history command e Current Size The number of commands currently saved by the switch ready for display by the show history command Index Range This value indicates the index range of the commands for this CLI session currently stored in the history buffer In the above example the switch is set to display 30 commands However when the show history parameters command was issued only ten commands had yet been issued Since only ten commands had been issued during the current login session the index range shows to 10 This is because the commands in the buffer are the first through the tenth commands issued during the current login session Note The Partial Keyword Completion feature described on page 6 6 works within the CLI history buffer OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 16 Logging CLI Commands and Entry Results Using the CLI Logging CLI Commands and Entry Results The switch provides command logging through the co
178. common procedures such as removing and installing switch components The Switch Management Guide is the primary users guide for the basic software features on a single switch This guide contains information on the switch directory structure basic file and directory utilities switch access security SNMP and web based management It is recommended that you read this guide before connecting your switch to the network Stage 3 Integrating the Switch Into a Network Pertinent Documentation Network Configuration Guide When you are ready to connect your switch to the network you need to learn how the OmniSwitch imple ments fundamental software features such as 802 1Q VLANs Spanning Tree and network routing proto cols The Network Configuration Guide contains overview information procedures and examples on how standard networking technologies are configured in the OmniSwitch page xiv OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 About This Guide Documentation Roadmap Anytime The CLI Reference Guide contains comprehensive information on all CLI commands supported by the switch This guide includes syntax default usage example related CLI command and CLI to MIB vari able mapping information for all CLI commands supported by the switch This guide can be consulted anytime during the configuration process to find detailed and specific information on each CLI command OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide Ju
179. ction and Automatic Link Aggregate Association DHCP Server Association and DHCP Client creation works on fixed ports When an OmniSwitch is newly introduced to a network an assigned peer network device detects this device as new If the peer device has a link aggregate configuration on the detecting port then it sends LACP PDU to the newly connected OmniSwitch In such instances LACP PDUs must be acknowledged by OmniSwitch The Remote Configuration Manager on OmniSwitch detects any LACP PDUs on combo or uplink ports and configures a link aggregate automatically during Automatic Remote Configuration The following diagram illustrates the different network components required for Auto Remote Configuration and LACP Auto Detection and Link Aggregate Association process LACP Provides Switch IP TFTP server IP Handshake and Auto and instruction file name _ Link Aggregate i Association H wal _ Network with Router Peer Device or Gateway Alcatel Lucent OmniSwitch TFTP Server Stores the instruction file optionally the config file and firmware FTP SFTP Server Stores the firmware and configuration for secure access Network Components for LACP Auto Detection and Link Aggregate Association OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 8 17 DHCP Client Auto Configuration Process Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download LACP auto detection is enabled by default and oper
180. ction with LACP is required for the following processes to support Automatic Remote Configuration To detect LACP PDU from the peer device on combo uplink ports To enable the auto link aggregate creation after receiving LACP message The link aggregate is associated as a tagged member of VLAN 127 and VLAN 1 On completion of the Automatic Download and configuration process the automatic link aggregate is disabled and all port associations are deleted page 8 8 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Automatic Remote Configuration Download Process Automatic Remote Configuration Download Process The automatic remote configuration process is initialized when an OmniSwitch is integrated in to the network as a new device or when a firmware and configuration upgrade is required If the automatic configuration download process is not performed completely on the switch manual intervention is required For details on troubleshooting techniques under such instances see Troubleshooting on page 8 24 The detailed process of Automatic Remote Configuration Download performed on the OmniSwitch is as follows 1 When the switch is integrated in to the network as a new device with no boot cfg file then Automatic Remote Configuration is performed on the switch 2 The Remote Configuration Manager on OmniSwitch configures a link aggregate automatically when a LACP PDU is detecte
181. ctory with the same name as the product family as noted in the table above The following is an example for an OmniSwitch 6250 using the usb auto copy command Note The aossignature file can be an empty text file Create a file named aossignature in the root of the USB flash drive Create a directory named 6250 working on the USB flash drive with all the proper image files gt usb enable gt usb auto copy enable a Ff WO N Connect the USB flash drive to the CMM The presence of image files are checked and copied to the related uflash 6250 certified or uflash 6450 certified directory of the CMM The switch now reboots from the working directory applying the code upgrade 6 Once the switch reboots the auto copy feature is automatically disabled to prevent another upgrade page 5 32 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content Using the USB Flash Drive Disaster Recovery Using USB The switch can be configured to boot from the USB flash drive This can be used if the image files on the CMM become corrupted deleted or the switch is unable to boot from the CMM for other reasons The following is an example for an OmniSwitch 6250 1 It is recommended to prepare the USB flash drive prior to needing it for disaster recovery 2 Create a directory named 6250 certified and 6250 working on the USB flash drive with all the proper backup system and configuration files Connect t
182. ctory in the working directory on an OmniSwitch gt mkdir flash working newdirl Flash Directory Working Directory Piles newdir1 Directory Ksecu img Kbase img boot cfg This drawing represents the content of the flash working directory after the new directory is added OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 11 File and Directory Management Managing System Files Displaying Directory Contents Including Subdirectories The Is r command displays the contents of your current directory in addition to recursively displaying all subdirectories The following example shows the result of the Is r command where the flash working directory contains a directory named newdir1 Be sure to include a space between Is and gt ls r flash working Listing Directory flash working drw 2048 Oct 14 17 14 drw 2048 Oct 14 17 12 drw 2048 Oct 14 17 14 newdir1 rw 2636 Oct 12 11 16 boot cfg rw 123574 Oct 14 10 54 Kbase img rw 123574 Oct 14 10 54 Ksecu img Listing Directory flash working newdir drw 2048 Oct 14 17 14 drw 2048 Oct 14 17 14 Copying an Existing Directory The cp r command recursively copies directories as well as any associated subdirectories and files Before using this command you should make sure you have enough memory space in your target direc tory to hold the new material you are copying Note Your login account must have write privileges to ex
183. cutable files used to operate switch features and applications configuration files and log files You need to understand the various methods of loading files onto the switch for software upgrades and new features Once the files are on the switch the CLI has commands that allow you to load copy and delete these files The CLI also has commands for displaying creating and editing ASCII files directly on the switch You may also want to establish a file directory structure to help organize your files on the switch All the files and directories on the switch bear a time stamp This is useful for switch administration because the time stamp allows you to tell at a glance which files are the most recent You can set the system clock that controls these time stamps as well as other time based switch functions File Transfer The switch can receive and send files by using industry standard local and remote transfer methods Each of these methods is defined and explained Because file transfers can involve logging onto the switch from aremote host security factors such as DNS resolver and Authenticated Switch Access requirements should be considered User Host OmniSwitch lf 8 File Transfer from User Host to the OmniSwitch File Transfer to OmniSwitch It is not enough to simply transfer a file onto the switch Once files are on the switch they must be registered in order to become functional The OmniSwi
184. d the system requests a password gt sftp 10 222 30 125 login as rrlogin2 rrlogin2 s password for keyboard interactive method Once the correct password is given and the login is completed the sftp gt prompt is displayed This indi cates that you are in the Secure Shell FTP mode and must therefore use the Secure Shell FTP commands as listed on page 1 24 3 Use the Is command to display the contents of the target OmniSwitch directory sftp gt ls 287 boot params 2048 certified 2048 working 64000 swlogl log 64000 swlog2 log30 policy cfg 2048 network 206093 cs _system pmd 2048 LPS 256 random seed 4 Use the mkdir command to create a new directory entitled newssdir in the target OmniSwitch Remember you must specify the path for the new directory as follows sftp gt mkdir flash newssdir 5 Use the Is command again to list the contents of the current flash directory Note that the newssdir directory appears toward the bottom of the following list sftp gt ls OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 33 Application Examples for File Management Managing System Files 287 boot params 2048 certified 2048 working 64000 swlogl log 64000 5 1092 10930 policy cfg 2048 network 206093 cs system pmd 2048 LPS 2048 newssdir 256 random seed Transfer a File Using Secure Shell FTP To demonstrate how to transfer a file by using the Secure Shell FTP this application example continues
185. d for this static RP configuration This allows fine control over which configuration is overridden by this static configuration 100 alaPimInterfaceElection alaPimInter ipmr This trap is sent when a new DR faceAd or DR has been elected on a net dressType work alaPimInter faceAddress The notification is generated whenever the counter PIM Inter face Elections Win Count is incremented subject to the rate limit specified by PIM Interface Election Notification Period alaPimInterfaceA ddressType tThe address type of the PIM interface alaPimInterfaceA ddress The primary IP address of this router on this PIM interface 101 lpsLearnTrap IpsLearn bridge This trap is sent when the num TrapThreshold ber of bridged MACs learned matches the configured Learned Trap Threshhold A trap is then generated or every additional MAC that is learned IpsLearnTrapThreshold The number of bridged MAC addresses that can be learned before trap is sent 102 gvrpVlanLimitReachedEvent alaGvrpMaxV bridge This trap is sent when the num lanLimit ber of dynamically learned VLANs has reached the config ured limit alaGvrpMaxVlanLimit The maximum number of dynamic VLANs that can be created on the system by GVRP before a trap is sent alaNetSecPortTrapInfolfId tThe interface index of port on which anomaly is detected 105 udldStateChange alaUdldPortlfIn interface This trap is sent when the UDLD dex state of a port has changed ala
186. d on April 22 at 05 23 hours The second entry indicates that the directory was created or copied on April 19 at 06 12 hours The column on the right lists the file or directory name Note that directory names end with a slash character drw 512 Oct 25 14 17 WORKING rw 321 Oct 25 14 39 boot params Here the first entry shows a directory named WORKING the second entry shows a file named boot params The value shown at the bottom of the display indicates the amount of flash memory remaining for use in this directory 9 47 megabytes in the above example page 1 6 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files File and Directory Management Using Wildcards Wildcards allow you to substitute symbols or for text patterns while using file and directory commands The asterisk takes the place of multiple characters and the question mark character takes the place of single characters More than one wildcard can be used within a single text string Multiple Characters An asterisk is used as a wildcard for multiple characters in a text pattern The following command will list all entries in the current directory that end with the log extension gt ls log Listing Directory flash rw 64000 Sep 21 19 49 swlogl log rw 64000 Aug 12 19 06 swlog2 log The following command lists all entries in the current directory that contain the i character gt ls i Listing Directory fla
187. d on combo or uplink ports on the switch during Automatic Remote Configuration For details see the following section LACP Auto Detection on page 8 13 3 A DHCP client is automatically configured first on the default VLAN at switch boot up OmniSwitch then uses different methods of DHCP client configuration until connection to a DHCP Server is obtained For details see the following section DHCP Client Auto Configuration Process on page 8 18 4 The DHCP client looks for the OXO DHCP server response to provide preference to the desired OXO DHCP server For details see the following section DHCP Client Preference to OXO DHCP Server on page 8 19 5 The DHCP client obtains the switch IP address information from the DHCP server 6 The DHCP client obtains the TFTP server IP address from the DHCP server using Option 66 7 The DHCP client obtains the instruction file name and location from the DHCP server using Option 67 8 SSH access is automatically enabled to allow remote access in case the automatic configuration process fails 9 The instruction file with the alu extension is downloaded from the TFTP server to the flash working directory of the OmniSwitch 10 If available the configuration script and images files are downloaded from the FTP or SFTP serv ers The password used to connect to the FTP SFTP servers is same as the username 11 If available the switch compares the firmware version available on the switch w
188. d to up 1 then ifOperStatus should change to up 1 if the interface is ready to transmit and receive net work traffic it should change to dormant 5 if the interface is waiting for external actions such as a serial line waiting for an incoming connection it should remain in the down 2 state if and only if there is a fault that pre vents it from going to the up 1 state it should remain in the notPresent 6 state if the interface has missing typically hardware components 3 linkUp ifIndex interface The SNMP agent in the switch ifAdminStatus recognizes that one of the com ifOperStatus munications links configured for the switch has come up IfIndex A unique value greater than zero for each interface It is recommended that values are assigned con tiguously starting from 1 The value for each interface sub layer must remain constant at least from one re ini tialization of the entity s network management system to the next re initialization ifAdminStatus The desired state of the interface The testing 3 state indicates that no operational packets can be passed When a managed system initializes all interfaces start with ifAdminStatus in the down 2 state As a result of either explicit management action or per configuration information retained by the managed system ifAdminStatus is then changed to either the up 1 or testing 3 states or remains in the down 2 state ifOperStatus The current operational state of t
189. de June 2013 page 8 23 Troubleshooting Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Troubleshooting Due to errors during download the automatic configuration process can halt or the file download process can be incomplete The errors that occur during the automatic remote configuration download process are displayed on the switch command prompt and also stored in switch log or the swlog log file The following section provides information on some of the common errors that can occur during the configuration download process and troubleshooting techniques to resolve these errors Error Resolution If there are any issues downloading the required files for the auto configuration process the switch can be reached using the DHCP client IP address and the SSH protocol for manual intervention or configuration Server Connection Failure and File Download Errors Manual download of component files is required when there is a failure in connecting to the servers or when all the component files are not downloaded during the automatic remote configuration download process Server connection failures can occur when DHCP server is not reachable TFTP server is not reachable e Primary and secondary servers are not reachable File download errors can occur when e Files are corrupted e File locations or names listed in the instruction file are incorrect page 8 24 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Man
190. default 7 6 No standard name 06 00 No default No default No default 7 5 No standard name 05 00 No default No default No default zp4 No standard name 04 00 No default No default No default msk Moscow 03 00 Last Sunday in Mar Last Sunday in Oct 1 00 at 2 00 a m at 3 00 a m eet Eastern Europe 02 00 Last Sunday in Mar Last Sunday in Oct 1 00 at 2 00 a m at 3 00 a m page 1 42 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files Setting the System Clock Time Zone and DST Information Table continued Hours from Abbreviation Name UTC DST Start DST End DST Change cet Central Europe 01 00 Last Sunday in Mar Last Sunday in Oct 1 00 at 2 00 a m at 3 00 a m met Middle Europe 01 00 Last Sunday in Mar Last Sunday in Oct 1 00 at 2 00 a m at 3 00 a m bst British Standard 00 00 Last Sunday in Mar Last Sunday in Oct 1 00 Time at 1 00 a m at 3 00 a m wet Western Europe 00 00 Last Sunday in Mar Last Sunday in Oct 1 00 at 1 00 a m at 3 00 a m gmt Greenwich Mean 00 00 No default No default No default Time wat West Africa 01 00 No default No default No default zm2 No standard name 02 00 No default No default No default zm3 No standard name 03 00 No default No default No default nst Newfoundland 03 30 Ist Sunday in at Last Sunday in Oct 1 00 2 00 a m at 2
191. domains and families 9 27 logging commands 6 17 6 18 specifications 6 2 CLI usage verify information about 6 27 CMM 5 1 application examples 5 5 boot cfg file 5 3 cancelling a reboot 5 14 5 20 5 25 certified directory 5 3 checking reboot status 5 15 configuration files 5 3 copying certified directory to working directory 5 22 5 27 running configuration to working directory 5 16 working directory to certified directory 5 21 5 26 displaying current configuration 5 23 5 30 displaying switch files 5 24 image files 5 3 managing 5 13 rebooting 5 13 5 25 rebooting from the working directory 5 18 5 26 running configuration 5 3 5 4 scheduling a reboot 5 14 5 25 specifications 5 2 swapping primary for secondary 5 29 synchronizing primary and secondary 5 26 5 27 working directory 5 3 CMM Conditions verify information about CMM scenarios 5 5 lost running configuration 5 5 rollback to previous software 5 8 running configuration saved to working directory 5 6 working directory saved to certified directory 5 7 Command Line Interface see CLI community strings 3 10 configuration apply command 7 2 7 4 for a specific timeperiod 7 5 configuration cancel command 7 7 configuration error file limit command 7 8 5 35 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Index 1 configuration file application examples 7 2 specifications 7 2 configuration files 5 3 6 3 errors 7 7 configuration snapshot al
192. dule and new module eString defined by AlaDBType are same then this trap will not be sent alaOldDb The daughter module that was present before inserting a new module alaNewDb The daughter module that was inserted alaModuleChangeString Specifies the string value describing 1 Reboot is required to activate the new module 2 New module can be used without reboot 3 No expansion module is present 190 alaStackMgrIncompatibleLicenseTrap alaStack chassis This trap is sent when an inter MerSlotNI face enters the pass through Number mode because element license alaStackMgrPri information is not same as maryLicense primary element license information alaStackMgrSlotNINumber tThe number assigned for NI Stack alaStackMgrPrimaryLicense The stack element license type 191 Reserved 192 Reserved 193 Reserved 194 Reserved 195 Reserved 196 Reserved 197 Reserved page B 30 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name 198 aluLicenseManagerLicenseExpired Objects aluLicensedAp plication aluLicenseTim eRemaining Family license manager Description This trap is sent when the value of aluLicenseTimeRemaining becomes 0 zero for a demo licensed application This notifi cation is applicable only for tem porary licenses This trap can be utilized by an NMS to inform user about an application license ex
193. e gt user thomas read write domain network ip helper telnet For information about the default user settings see the next section For information about setting up priv ileges see Configuring Privileges for a User on page 9 27 Note Optional To verify the user account enter the show user command The display is similar to the following User name admin Password expiration None Password allow to be modified date None Account lockout None Password bad attempts 1 Read Only for domains None Read Write for domains All Snmp allowed NO User name default Password expiration None Password allow to be modified date None Account lockout None Password bad attempts 0 Read Only for domains None Read Write for domains None Snmp allowed NO User name public Password expiration None Password allow to be modified date None Account lockout None Password bad attempts 0 Read Only for domains None Read Write for domains None Snmp allowed NO Note The default user is not an active user account It constains the default user account settings for new user accounts For more information about the show user command see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 7 Overview of User Accounts Managing Switch User Accounts Quick Steps for Creating Customer Login U
194. e For details see Using the USB Flash Drive on page 5 33 Zmodem You can load software directly through the serial port with any terminal emulator that supports the Zmodem protocol Note that a Zmodem transfer of large files may take several minutes to complete For details see Using Zmodem on page 1 25 Using the Switch as an FTP Server The switch can act as an FTP server for receiving files transferred from your workstation You can trans fer software files to the switch by using standard FTP client software located on a host workstation This is normally done to load or upgrade the switch software Workstation OmniSwitch The FTP Client software Ca on the Workstation sends a file from the Workstation to the OmniSwitch FTP Client FTP Server OmniSwitch FTP Server The following describes how to transfer files where the switch is acting as an FTP server 1 Log into the switch Use your workstation FTP client software just as you would with any FTP appli cation To log in to the switch start your FTP client Where the FTP client asks for Name enter the IP address of your switch Where the FTP client asks for User ID enter the username of your login account on the switch Where the FTP client asks for Password enter your switch password page 1 20 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files Loading Software onto the Switch Note If
195. e 1 8 and that you want to move down the directory tree to the certified directory gt pwd flash gt cd certified To verify that your current directory has changed to flash certified use the pwd command and the following will be displayed gt pwd flash certified To move up the directory tree use the cd command Enter cd ed dot dot without specifying a direc tory name and your current directory will move up one directory level If you enter cd without the dots your current directory will move to the top of the tree The following example shows the command used where the current directory is flash certified gt pwd flash certified gt cd gt To verify that your current directory has moved up the directory tree use the pwd command to display your location The display shows you have moved up one level from the flash certified directory and that your current directory is flash gt pwd flash If you use the cd command while you are at the top of the directory tree the cd command will have no effect on the location of your login In other words if you use cd while your current directory is flash your current directory will remain flash after you execute the cd command OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 9 File and Directory Management Managing System Files Displaying Directory Contents The Is and dir commands have the same function These tw
196. e 6 9 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using the CLI Command Help 3 At the command prompt enter name followed by a space and a question mark This step either gives you more choices or an error message gt vlan 33 name A lt hex gt lt string gt lt string gt Vlan Manager Command Set There is a smaller set of keywords available for use with the vlan 33 name syntax This is because the command becomes more specialized as more keywords are added From the choices shown on the screen you can enter a hex value a text string enclosed in quotes or a text string without quotes In this case the name selected for the VLAN includes spaces so use the syntax enclosed in quotes 4 Atthe command prompt enter the name of the VLAN enclosed in quotes followed by a space and a question mark gt vlan 33 name test vlan 2 A lt cr gt Vlan Manager Command Set When the question mark is issued this time the only syntax listed is lt cr gt This means that the command syntax is complete When you press Enter the command is issued Note Optional To verify that the command was accepted enter the show vlan command The display is similar to the one shown here gt show vlan vlan admin oper stree auth ip name 1 on off on off off VLAN 1 33 on off on off off test vlan 2 The second entry verifies that a VLAN was created the VLAN ID is 33 and the name is test vlan 2 OmniSwi
197. e Protocol NTP Verifying NTP Configuration Verifying NTP Configuration To display information about the NTP client use the show commands listed in the following table show ntp client Displays information about the current client NTP configuration show ntp server status Displays the basic server information for a specific NTP server or a list of NTP servers show ntp client server list Displays a list of the servers with which the NTP client synchronizes show ntp keys Displays information about all authentication keys For more information about the resulting displays from these commands see the NTP Commands chap ter in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Examples of the show ntp client show ntp server status and show ntp client server list command outputs are given in the section NTP Quick Steps on page 4 3 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 4 13 Verifying NTP Configuration Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP page 4 14 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 5 Managing CMM Directory Content The CMM Chassis Management Module software runs the switches The directory structure of the CMM software is designed to prevent corrupting or losing switch files It also allows you to retrieve a previous version of the switch software In addition to working as standalone switches OmniSwitches can be linked together as a stack A stack can provide CMM
198. e System Clock Managing System Files page 1 44 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 2 Logging Into the Switch Logging into the switch may be done locally or remotely Management tools include the Command Line Interface CLI which may be accessed locally through the console port or remotely through Telnet WebView which requires an HTTP client browser on a remote workstation and SNMP which requires an SNMP manager such as Alcatel Lucent OmniVista or HP OpenView on the remote workstation Secure sessions are available using the Secure Shell interface file transfers are done through FTP or Secure Shell FTP In This Chapter This chapter describes the basics of logging into the switch to manage the switch through the CLI It also includes the information about using Telnet FTP and Secure Shell in both IPv4 and IPv6 environments for logging into the switch as well as information about using the switch to start a Telnet or Secure Shell session on another device It also includes information about managing sessions and specifying a DNS resolver For more details about the syntax of referenced commands see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Configuration procedures described in this chapter include e Quick Steps for Logging Into the Switch on page 2 5 e Using Telnet on page 2 8 e Using FTP on page 2 10 e Using Secure Shell on page 2 12 e Modifying the Login Banner on pa
199. e configuration commands listed under their heading All other switch services and applications are either not being using or are using default settings OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 7 13 Verifying File Configuration Working With Configuration Files Verifying File Configuration You can verify the content and the status of the switch s configuration files with commands listed in the following table show configuration status Displays whether there is a pending timer session scheduled for a con figuration file and indicates whether the running configuration and the saved configuration files are identical or different This command also displays the number of error files that will be held in the flash directory show configuration snapshot Generates a snapshot file of the switch s non default current running configuration A snapshot can be generated for all current network fea tures or for one or more specific network features A snapshot is a sin gle text file that can be viewed edited and reused as a configuration file write terminal Displays the switch s current running configuration for all features page 7 14 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 8 Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download The Automatic Remote Configuration feature enables The automatic upgrade of firmware and or configuration of an OmniSwitch without user interv
200. e following example modifies the default user account with read write access to all CLI commands gt user default read write all In this example any new user that is created will have read and write access to all CLI commands unless a specific privilege or SNMP access is configured for the new user For more information about configur ing privileges see Setting Up End User Profiles on page 9 32 The privilege default is particularly important for users who are authenticated via an ACE Server which only supplies username and password information for users who are authenticated via a RADIUS LDAP server on which privileges are not configured For more information about these servers see the Managing Authentication Servers chapter of the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 9 Overview of User Accounts Managing Switch User Accounts Account and Password Policy Settings The switch includes global password settings that are used to implement and enforce password complex ity when a password is created modified and used These user configurable settings apply the following password requirements to all user accounts configured for the switch e Minimum password size e Whether or not a password can contain the account username e Minimum password character requirements e Password expiration e Password history e Minimum password age
201. e or backing up files Additionally automatic code upgrades as well as the capability to boot from the USB flash drive for disas ter recovery purposes are also supported For the automatic upgrades and disaster recovery the USB flash drive must be configured with the proper directory structure depending on the platform as noted in the following table Once the flash drive is properly mounted a directory named uflash is automatically created Files can then be copied to and from the uflash directory The directories below must be created on the USB flash drive for feature support Product Family Name Auto Upgrade Support Disaster Recovery Support OmniSwitch 6250 6250 working 6250 certified OmniSwitch 6450 6450 working 6450 certified Transferring Files Using USB The following is an example of how to mount and transfer files using the USB flash drive using the usb and umount commands gt usb enable gt flash working boot cfg uflash boot cfg gt umount uflash Once the USB flash drive is mounted most common file and directory commands can be performed on the uflash directory Automatically Upgrading Code Using USB The switch can be configured to automatically mount and copy image files from the USB flash drive as soon as it s connected This can be used to automatically upgrade code In order to prevent an accidental upgrade a file named aossignature must be stored on the USB flash drive as well as having a dire
202. e set for an individual user Note When the current user s password has less than one week before expiration the switch will display an expiration warning after login If a user s password expires the user will be unable to log into the switch through any interface the admin user must reset the user s password If the admin user s password expires the admin user will have access to the switch through the console port with the currently configured password Default Password Expiration To set password expiration globally use the user password expiration command with the desired number of days the allowable range is 1 to 150 days For example gt user password expiration 3 The default password expiration is now set to three days All user passwords on the switch will be set or reset with the three day expiration If an individual user was configured with a different expiration the expiration will be reset to the global value The expiration is based on the switch system date time and date time the user password expiration command is entered For example if a user is configured with a password expiration of 10 days but the global setting is 20 days that user s password will expire in 10 days To disable the default password expiration use the user password expiration command with the disable option gt user password expiration disable Specific User Password Expiration To set password expiration for an individua
203. e switch The following steps describe how to transfer the file from the user workstation to the switch by using an FTP client on the workstation 1 Load the KFsecu img file onto a workstation that contains an FTP client You will normally receive the file from the Internet via E mail or on CD media Place the file on your workstation where it can be easily downloaded 2 Run the FTP client software on your workstation Most workstations have an FTP client installed Refer to your manufacturer instructions for details on running the FTP application 3 Log in to the switch from your FTP client Where the FTP client asks for Name enter the IP address of your switch Where the FTP client asks for User ID enter admin Where the FTP client asks for Password enter switch or your custom config ured password 4 Transfer the file from the workstation to the switch by using the FTP client If you have a GUI FTP client select the KFsecu img file on your desktop and click the download button If you have a text only FTP client use the FTP put command to move the file from your desktop to the switch In either case you must specify a binary file transfer because the KF secu img file is a binary file Once the transfer is complete the file will appear in the switch flash working directory 5 Close the FTP session with the switch 6 To verify that the KFsecu img file is in the flash working directory on the switch Log onto
204. e text file to apply to FTP switch sessions execute the following CLI command where the text filename is firstbanner txt gt session banner ftp flash firstbanner txt If you want the login banner in the text file to apply to CLI switch sessions execute the following CLI command where the text filename is secondbanner txt gt session banner cli flash secondbanner txt OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 2 21 Modifying the Login Banner Logging Into the Switch If you want the login banner in the text file to apply to HTTP switch sessions execute the following CLI command where the text filename is thirdbanner txt gt session banner http flash thirdbanner txt The banner files must contain only ASCII characters and should bear the txt extension The switch does not reproduce graphics or formatting contained in the file Modifying the Text Display Before Login By default the switch does not display any text before the login prompt for any CLI session At initial bootup the switch creates a pre_banner txt file in the flash directory The file is empty and may be edited to include text that you want to display before the login prompt For example Please supply your user name and password at the prompts login user123 password In this example the pre_banner txt file has been modified with a text editor to include the Please supply your user name and password at the prompts message
205. e time in the network Using NTP in a Network NTP operates on the premise that there is one true standard time defined by UTC and that if several servers claiming synchronization to the standard time are in disagreement then one or more of them must be out of synchronization or not functioning correctly The stratum gradiation is used to qualify the accu racy of a time source along with other factors such as advertised precision and the length of the network path between connections NTP operates with a basic distrust of time information sent from other network entities and is most effective when multiple NTP time sources are integrated together for checks and crosschecks To achieve this end there are several modes of operation that an NTP entity can use when synchronizing time in a network These modes help predict how the entity behaves when requesting or sending time information listed below e switch can be a client of an NTP server usually of a lower stratum receiving time information from the server but not passing it on to other switches e A switch can be a client of an NTP server and in turn be a server to another switch or switches e A switch regardless of its status as either a client or server must be peered with another switch Peer ing allows NTP entities in the network of the same stratum to regard each other as reliable sources of time and exchange time information page 4 6 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Manag
206. e upper right corner of the table to toggle between the ascending and the descending order page 11 18 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using WebView Configuring the Switch With WebView Zj Webview 10 255 73 12 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Q 0 Click to toggle between ascending and descend ing order Networking weTarget 10 Telnet r SVLAN Description Admin Status Status Operational Flat STP Status Status Authentication VLAN Tag Priority Mobile Port Status VLAN 1 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Disab ed VLAN 2 Enabled nactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabl ed VLAN Enabled nactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Disab ed VLAN 4 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabl 5 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabl WYLAN 6 Enabled nactive Enabled Enab led Disabled Disab VLAN 7 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enab Disabled Disab VLAN 8 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enab Disabled Disab 9 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enab Disabled Disabl VLAN 10 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabl Disabled Disabl VLAN 11 Enabled nactive Enab
207. each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software inter change or page A 6 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Software License and Copyright Statements Third Party Licenses and Notices b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or Accompany it wit
208. ectories File Directory Name Metrics e 32 characters maximum for directory and file names e 255 character maximum for a fully qualified path File Directory Name Characters Character types are limited to a z A Z 0 9 dashes dots and underlines _ Maximum Number of Files Directories Maximum of 244 files and or directories allowed in the root flash directory Sub Directories Text Editing System Clock Up to seven sub directories allowed including flash Vi standard UNIX editor The Ed standard UNIX editor is available in the debug mode Set local date time and time zone Universal Time Coordinate UTC Daylight Savings DST or summertime System Date Default Value THU JAN 01 1970 Thursday January 1 1970 page 1 2 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files Switch Administration Overview Switch Administration Overview The OmniSwitch has a variety of software features designed for different networking environments and applications Over the life of the switch it is very likely that your configuration and feature set will change because the needs of your network are likely to expand Also software updates become available from Alcatel Lucent If you change your configuration to upgrade your network you must understand how to install switch files and to manage switch directories You can use this memory to store files including exe
209. ectory on page 5 18 Once the switch is booted and functioning the switch is said to be running from a particular directory either the working or certified directory Where the switch is running from is determined at the time of the boot up of the switch At the time of a normal boot by turning on the switch power on or by using the reload command a comparison is made between the working directory and the certified directory If the directories are synchronized all files are the same in both directories the switch runs from the working directory If there is any discrepancy between the two directories even as small as a different file size or file date the switch runs from the certified directory While a switch is running from the certified directory you cannot save any changes made in the running configuration If the switch reboots the changes made to switch parameters is lost In order to save running configuration changes the switch must be running from the working directory You can deter mine where the switch is running from by using the show running directory command described in Show Currently Used Configuration on page 5 23 Software Rollback Feature The directory structure inherent in the CMM software allows for a switch to return to a previous more reliable version of image or configuration files Initially when normally booting the switch the software is loaded from the certified directory This is the rep
210. ecute the cp r command In this example a copy of the working directory and all its contents will be created in the certified direc tory of an OmniSwitch The destination directory must exist before the cp r command will work gt r flash working flash certified working Flash Directory Working Directory Directory Files Files newdir1 Directory boot cfg Working Directory boot cfg Kos img Kbase img Krelease img Ksecu img Ksecu img newdir1 Directory Kbase img Ksecu img page 1 12 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files File and Directory Management To verify the creation of the new directory use the Is r command to produce a list of the contents of the certified directory This list will include the files that were originally in the certified directory plus the newly created copy of the working directory and all its contents gt ls r flash certified Listing Directory drw drw rw rw rw Listing Directory drw drw drw rw rw rw rw Listing Directory drw drw 2048 2048 4347 844217 4658 2048 2048 2048 4347 142830 2743945 844217 2048 2048 Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct flash certified 12 15 2 25 25 16 10 12 14 14 22 16 25 21 21 boot cfg Kos img Krelease img lash certified working 14 14 14 2 25 25 25
211. ed by an unauthorized source Authentication Determining that the message is from a valid source holding the correct privileges OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 3 9 Using SNMP For Switch Security Using SNMP Using SNMP For Switch Security Community Strings SNMPv1 SNMPv2 The switch supports the SNMPv1 SNMPv2c community strings security standard When a commu nity string is carried over an incoming SNMP request the community string must match up with a user account name as listed in the community string database on the switch Otherwise the SNMP request is not processed by the SNMP agent in the switch Configuring Community Strings To use SNMPv1 and v2 community strings each user account name must be mapped to an SNMP community string Follow these steps 1 Create a user account on the switch and define its password Enter the following CLI syntax to create the account community_user1 gt user community _userl password no auth Note A community string inherits the security privileges of the user account that creates it A user account can be created locally on the switch by using CLI commands For detailed information on setting up user accounts refer to the Using Switch Security chapter of this manual 2 Map the user account to a community string A community string works like a password so it is defined by the user It can be any text string up to 32
212. ed readers serious detail oriented readers advanced users and beginning users Quick Information Most chapters include a specifications table that lists RFCs and IEEE specifications supported by the software feature In addition this table includes other pertinent information such as mini mum and maximum values and sub feature support Some chapters include a defaults table that lists the default values for important parameters along with the CLI command used to configure the parameter Many chapters include Quick Steps sections which are procedures covering the basic steps required to get a software feature up and running In Depth Information All chapters include overview sections on software features as well as on selected topics of that software feature Topical sections may often lead into procedure sections that describe how to configure the feature just described Many chapters include tutorials or application examples that help convey how CLI commands can be used together to set up a particular feature OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page xiii Documentation Roadmap About This Guide Documentation Roadmap The OmniSwitch user documentation suite was designed to supply you with information at several critical junctures of the configuration process The following section outlines a roadmap of the manuals that will help you at each stage of the configuration process Under each stage we point you to the manu
213. edFramePe riodEvent 2 erroredFrameEvent 3 erroredFrameSecondsEvent 4 linkFault 256 dyingGaspEvent 257 criticalLinkEvent 258 dot30amEventLogLocation Indicates whether this event occurred locally local 1 or was received from the OAM peer via Ethernet OAM remote 2 dot30amEventLogEventTotal The total number of times this event has resulted in a notification 121 alaDot30amThresholdEventClear dot30amEventL dot3 oam This trap is sent when is sent ogTimestamp when a local or remote threshold dot3OamEventL crossing event is recovered ogOui dot3OamEventL og Type dot3OamEventL ogLocation dot3OamEventL ogWindowHi dot3OamEventL ogWindowLo dot3O0amEventL ogThresholdHi dot3OamEventL ogThresh oldLo dot3OamEventL ogValue dot3OamEventL ogRunningTo tal dot3OamEventL ogEventTotal page B 22 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name Objects Family Description dot30amEventLogTimestamp tThe sysUpTime at the time of the logged event dot30amEventLogOui The OUI of the entity defining the object type All IEEE 802 3 defined events as appearing in 802 3ah except for the Organizationally Unique Event TLVs use the IEEE 802 3 OUI of 0x0180C2 Organizations defining their own Event Notification TLVs include their OUI in the Event Notifica tion TLV that is reflected here dot3O0amEventLogType tThe type of event that generated this entry in
214. ee for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the soft ware or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each autho
215. eeeeeeneees 5 33 Emergency Restore of the boot cfg File eee ceeeeecceseeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 34 I Restore the boot file While Running from Certified wo eee 5 34 Displaying CMM Conditions 5 35 Using the CLI etait cette iat ae atts ee Reet eet 6 1 5 a dain 6 2 CLIO ICO toh ote 6 3 6 3 Offline Configuration Using Configuration Files 6 3 Command Entry Rules and Syntax 22 6 4 Text Convent Ons NOR cian 6 4 Using Show Commands 6 5 Using the NO FOr 6 5 Using Alias Commands 6 5 Partial Keyword Completion nena 6 6 Command e a 6 7 Tutorial for Building a Command Using Help 6 9 ICES 5s safes sada gu feta an aA tae pentane te 6 11 Command Line Editing sesido n E E see 6 11 Deleting Characters A A e 6 11 Recalling the Previous Command Line o eee eee eee eeeceeeeaeeeenseeaeeneenee
216. eloaded if a management module takeover occurs As a result data flow is not interrupted on the NIs during the takeover If a configuration change is made to one or more NI modules for example a VLAN is configured on several different interfaces and the changes are not saved through the write memory command the corresponding NIs automatically reloads if a management module takeover occurs Data flow on the affected NIs will be interrupted until the reload is complete Note that the NIs reloads whether the flash synchronization status shows SYNCHRONIZED This is because the unsaved changes have occurred in the running configuration RAM and have not been written to the configuration file of the flash direc tory In this case a list of only the affected NIs is displayed in the table output for example 1 6 If the flash directories on the primary and secondary management modules are not synchronized for example a copy flash synchro command has not been issued recently all NIs is reloaded automatically if a management module takeover occurs Data flow is interrupted on all NIs until the reload is complete OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 31 Using the USB Flash Drive Managing CMM Directory Content Using the USB Flash Drive An Alcatel Lucent certified USB flash drive can be connected the CMM and used to transfer images to and from the flash memory on the switch This can be used for upgrading switch cod
217. ement Guide June 2013 Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP NTP Overview Examples of these are shown in the simple network diagram below UTC Time Source Stratum 1 NTP Servers 1b Stratum 2 NTP Server Clients 2b Stratum 3 NTP Clients 3b Servers la and 1b receive time information from or synchronize with a UTC time source such as a radio clock In most cases these servers would not be connected to the same UTC source though it is shown this way for simplicity Servers la and 1b become stratum 1 NTP servers and are peered with each other allowing them to check UTC time information against each other These machines support machines 2a and 2b as clients and these clients are synchronized to the higher stratum servers la and 1b Clients 2a and 2b are also peered with each other for time checks and become stratum 2 NTP servers for more clients 3a and 3b which are also peered In this hierarchy the stratum 1 servers synchronize to the most accurate time source available then check the time information with peers at the same stratum The stratum 2 machines synchronize to the stratum 1 servers but do not send time information to the stratum 1 machines Machines 2a and 2b in turn provide time information to the stratum 3 machines It is important to consider the issue of robustness when selecting sources for time synchronization It is suggested that at least three sources should be a
218. ent are suppressed and therefore not forwarded to the SNMP management station The following command enables SNMP trap absorption gt snmp trap absorption enable To view or verify the status of the Trap Absorption service use the show snmp trap config command Sending Traps to WebView When WebView forwarding is enabled all traps sent by switch applications are also forwarded to WebView The following command allows a WebView session to retrieve the trap history log gt snmp trap to webview enable page 3 14 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using SNMP Working with SNMP Traps Checking Configuration File Using Traps If there are any configuration changes a trap is sent to Service Aware Manager SAM to enforce a poll when configuration file is saved The running configuration is not saved in the configuration file boot cfg until the user commits the changes using the write memory command or copy running config working command The configuration changes that are not committed are not detected by the switch until these commands are applied Related traps are raised on the following commands e write memory e write memory flash synchro e copy running config working OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 3 15 SNMP MIB Information Using SNMP SNMP MIB Information MIB Tables You can display MIB tables and their corresponding command families by using the show snmp
219. entation collectively the Licensed Materials only as authorized in this License Agreement Licensee subject to the terms of this License Agreement may use one copy of the Licensed Files on the Licensee s system Licensee agrees not to assign sublicense transfer pledge lease rent or share their rights under this License Agreement Licensee may retain the program media for backup purposes with retention of the copyright and other proprietary notices Except as authorized under this paragraph no copies of the Licensed Materials or any portions thereof may be made by Licensee and Licensee shall not modify decompile disassemble reverse engineer or otherwise attempt to derive the Source Code Licensee is also advised that Alcatel Lucent products contain embedded software known as firmware which resides in silicon Licensee may not copy the firmware or transfer the firmware to another medium 2 Alcatel Lucent s Rights Licensee acknowledges and agrees that the Licensed Materials are the sole property of Alcatel Lucent and its licensors herein its licensors protected by U S copyright law trade mark law and are licensed on a right to use basis Licensee further acknowledges and agrees that all rights title and interest in and to the Licensed Materials are and shall remain with Alcatel Lucent and its licen sors and that no such right license or interest shall be asserted with respect to such copyrights and trade marks This
220. enticated for FTP and Telnet use The login profile must also have permission to use FTP Otherwise the switch will not accept an FTP login For information about ASA and user privileges refer to Chapter 10 Managing Switch Security Terminal A dumb terminal uses the FTP cli ent on the OmniSwitch to retrieve a file from a file server File Server OmniSwitch FTP Client FTP Server OmniSwitch FTP Client Use the switch ftp command to start its FTP client OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 21 Loading Software onto the Switch Managing System Files 1 Establish a connection to the switch as explained in your appropriate Getting Started Guide 2 Log on to the switch and enter the ftp command to start the FTP client Next enter a valid host name or IP address For information about enabling the DNS resolver for host names please refer to Chapter 2 Logging Into the Switch A screen similar to the following is displayed gt ftp 198 23 9 101 Connecting to 198 23 9 101 connected 220 cosmo FTP server UNIX r System V Release 4 1 ready Name Note You can only use a host name instead of an IP address if the DNS resolver has been configured and enabled If not you must specify an IP address You can use the ftp6 command followed by the IPv6 address or the hostname of the FTPv6 server to start an session over an IPv6 env
221. ention The automated configuration of the switch on bootup when the switch is connected to the network for the first time The automatic download and installation of the critical configuration bootup and image files In This Chapter This chapter describes the Automatic Remote Configuration on OmniSwitch The sections in this chapter are Automatic Remote Configuration Specifications on page 8 2 Automatic Remote Configuration Defaults on page 8 3 Quick Steps for Automatic Remote Configuration on page 8 4 Overview on page 8 5 Interaction With Other Features on page 8 8 Automatic Remote Configuration Download Process on page 8 9 Download Component Files on page 8 13 LACP Auto Detection and Automatic Link Aggregate Association on page 8 17 DHCP Client Auto Configuration Process on page 8 18 DHCP Client Preference to OXO DHCP Server on page 8 19 Nearest Edge Mode Operation on page 8 21 Zero Touch License Upgrade on page 8 23 Troubleshooting on page 8 24 For related information on the initial setup of the switch see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Getting Started Guide For information on switch file management see Chapter 1 Managing System Files OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 8 1 Automatic Remote Configuration Specifications Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Automatic Remote Configuration Specifica
222. er means the secondary CMM takes the place of the primary CMM This prevents the switch from ceasing functionality during the boot process When the primary switch CMM in a stack fails over the secondary switch takes over the primary func tion If the stack comprises three or more switches then the original primary switch becomes idle and the next available idle switch becomes the secondary CMM For more information on stacks see the Managing Stacks chapter found in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Hardware Users Guide Synchronizing the primary and secondary CMMs is done using the copy flash synchro command described in Synchronizing the Primary and Secondary CMMs on page 5 27 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 25 Managing Redundancy in a Stack and CMM Managing CMM Directory Content Note If a switch fails over to the secondary CMM it is necessary to have a management interface connec tion to the secondary CMM such as an Ethernet port or a console port Copying the Working Directory to the Certified Directory Synchronizing the Primary and Secondary CMMs At the same time that you copy the working directory to the certified directory you can synchronize the secondary CMM with the primary CMM In the case of redundant CMMs this ensures that the two modules are booting from the same software To copy the working directory to the certified directory of the primary CMM and at the same
223. eration of the product In addition please be advised that i the Run Time Module is licensed not sold and that Alcatel Lucent and its licensors retain ownership of all copies of the Run Time Module 11 WIND RIVER DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE iii The SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT EXCLUDES LIABILITY FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT PUNITIVE INCIDENTAL AND CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGES and iv any further distribution of the Run Time Module shall be subject to the same restrictions set forth herein With respect to the Run Time Module Wind River and its licensors are third party beneficiaries of the License Agreement and the provisions related to the Run Time Module are made expressly for the benefit of and are enforceable by Wind River and its licensors M Network Time Protocol Version 4 The following copyright notice applies to all files collectively called the Network Time Protocol Version 4 Distribution Unless specifically declared otherwise in an individual file this notice applies as if the text was explicitly included in the file kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Copyright c David L Mills 1992 2003 Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all co
224. erifying a Timed Session ns iene ia eia 7 6 Cancelling a Timed 7 7 Configuration File Error Reporting 7 7 Setting the Error Fle LAM aeeti 7 8 Syntax CHECKE 7 8 Displaying a Text Pile 7 9 Text Editing on the Switch A 7 9 Mvoke the 7 9 Creating Snapshot Configuration Files 7 10 Snapshot Feature List 20 0 0 7 10 User Defined Naming ainra 7 11 Editing Snapshot Files 7 11 Verifying File e e a a aa 7 14 Chapter 8 Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download 8 1 This Chapter oon TA T A AEA peas anna eva 8 1 Automatic Remote Configuration Specifications 8 2 viii OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Contents Chapter 9 Automatic Remote Configuration Defaults 8 3 Quick Steps for Automatic Remote Configuration
225. es is closed At this point the user is logged into the local OmniSwitch at IP address 11 233 10 145 Note Establishing and closing the Secure Shellv6 connection is similar to that of the Secure Shell connec tion Log Into the Switch with Secure Shell FTP To open a Secure Shell FTP session from a local OmniSwitch to a remote device issue the sftp command and identify the IP address or hostname for the device you are connecting to You can use the sftp6 command to start an Secure Shell FTPv6 session followed by the relevant IPv6 address or hostname over an IPv6 environment The following example describes how a Secure Shell interface is established from the local OmniSwitch to IP address 10 222 30 125 1 Log on to the OmniSwitch and issue the sftp CLI command The command syntax requires you to identify the IP address or hostname for the device to which you are connecting The following command establishes a Secure Shell FTP interface from the local OmniSwitch to IP address 10 222 30 125 gt sftp 10 222 30 125 login as Note If SFTP is not enabled use the scp sftp command to enable it 2 You must have a login and password that is recognized by the IP address you specify When you enter your login the device you are logging in to requests your password as shown here gt sftp 10 222 30 125 login as rrlogin2 rrlogin2 s password for keyboard interactive method Note You can use the sftp6 command followed by the IPv6 addr
226. es must exactly match the files which are to be downloaded The filenames in the os img base img en img format where can be J K KX K2I or G based on the OmniSwitch product Modified filenames are not recognized Details about the different firmware files and file names can be found in the Available Image Files section in Chapter 1 Managing System Files Firmware files are downloaded only when the firmware version in the instruction file is higher than the firmware version present on the switch Bootup Configuration File The bootup configuration boot cfg file is not present during the initial bootup process when a new switch is integrated in to the network The boot cfg file is automatically generated and stored in the flash working directory when a write memory command is issued During the automatic remote configuration process the bootup configuration file is downloaded from the FTP SFTP server and stored as boot cfg in the flash working directory of the switch If no script file is downloaded the switch boots up normally according to the configurations specified in the boot cfg file when the remote configuration download process is completed OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 8 15 Download Component Files Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Debug Configuration File The debug configuration file is used for setting specific OmniSwitc
227. esent a significant problem If a mac alloc related error is the only error detected simply remove the syntax using a text editor then re check the file using the configuration syntax check command If a configuration file is located in another directory be sure to specify the full path For example gt configuration syntax check flash working asc 1 snap Viewing Generated Error File Contents For error details you can view the contents of a generated error file To view the contents of an error file use the more command For example gt more asc 1 snap 1 err For more information refer to Displaying a Text File on page 7 9 page 7 8 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Working With Configuration Files Configuration Files Overview Verbose Mode Syntax Checking When verbose is specified in the command line all syntax contained in the configuration file is printed to the console even if no error is detected When verbose is not specified in the command line cursory information number of errors and error log file name will be printed to the console only if a syntax or configuration error is detected To specify verbose mode enter the verbose keyword at the end of the command line For example gt configuration syntax check asc 1 snap verbose Displaying a Text File The more command allows you to view a text file one screen at a time Use this command with the desired filename Spe
228. eshold was crossed or no change healthMonCmmCpuTempStatus CMM CPU temperature threshold status indicating if threshold was crossed or no change OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 5 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information No Trap Name Objects Family Description 16 healthMonModuleTrap healthModule health Indicates a module level thresh Slot old was crossed healthMonRx Status healthMonRxTx Status healthMonMem oryStatus healthMonC puStatus healthModuleSlot The one based front slot number within the chassis healthMonRxStatus Rx threshold status indicating if threshold was crossed or no change healthMonRxTxStatus RxTx threshold status indicating if threshold was crossed or no change healthMonMemoryStatus Memory threshold status indicating if threshold was crossed or no change healthMonCpuStatus CPU threshold status indicating if threshold was crossed or no change 17 healthMonPortTrap healthPortSlot health Indicates a port level threshold healthPortIF was crossed healthMonRx Status healthMonRxTx Status healthPortSlot tThe physical slot number for this port healthPortIF The on board interface number healthMonRxStatus Rx threshold status indicating if threshold was crossed or no change healthMonRxTxStatus RxTx threshold status indicating if threshold was crossed or no change 20 esmDrvTrapDropsLink esmPortSlot interface This trap is sent when
229. ess or hostname of the SFTPv6 server to start an SFTPv6 session It is mandatory to specify the name of the particular IPv6 interface if the SFTPv6 server has been specified using its link local address After logging in you see the sftp gt prompt You may enter a question mark to view available Secure Shell FTP commands and their definitions as shown here OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 2 19 Using Secure Shell Logging Into the Switch sftp gt Available commands cd path led path chmod mode path help get remote path local path lls path ln oldpath newpath lmkdir path lpwd ls path mkdir path put local path remote path pwd exit quit rename oldpath newpath rmdir path rm path symlink oldpath newpath version T Change remote directory to path Change local directory to path Change permissions of file path to mode Display this help text Download file Display local directory listing Symlink remote file Create local directory Print local working directory Display remote directory listing Create remote directory Upload file Display remote working directory Quit sftp Quit sftp Rename remote file Remove remote directory Delete remote file Symlink remote file Show SFTP version Synonym for help Note Although Secure Shell FTP has commands similar to the industry standard FTP the underlying protocol is different See Chapter 1 M
230. et FTP SNMP or HTTP require authentication via the local user database or via a third party server This section describes how to configure management interfaces for authenticated access as well as how to specify external servers that the switch can poll for login information The type of server can be an authentication only mechanism or an authentication authorization and accounting AAA mechanism AAA Servers RADIUS or LDAP AAA servers are able to provide authorization for switch management users as well as authentication they also can be used for accounting The AAA servers supported on the switch are Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS or Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP servers User login information and user privileges can be stored on the servers Privileges are used for network administrator accounts Instead of user privileges an end user profile can be associated with a user for customer login accounts User information configured on an external server can include a profile name attribute The switch will attempt to match the profile name to a profile stored locally on the switch The following illustration shows the two different user types attempting to authenticate with a AAA server Network Administrator Customer login request login request LDAP or RADIUS LDAP or RADIUS Server Server a A The switch polls the server EA The switch
231. f the configurable NTP parameters NTP Defaults Parameter Description Command Default Value Comments Specifies an NTP server from which ntp server version 4 this switch receives updates minpoll 6 prefer no key 0 Used to activate client ntp client disabled Used to activate NTP client ntp broadcast disabled broadcast mode Used to set the advertised broadcast ntp broadcast delay 4000 microseconds delay in microseconds page 4 2 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP NTP Quick Steps NTP Quick Steps The following steps are designed to show the user the necessary commands to set up NTP on an OmniSwitch 1 Designate an NTP server for the switch using the ntp server command The NTP server provides the switch with its NTP time information For example gt ntp server 1 2 5 6 2 Activate the client side of NTP on the switch using the ntp client command For example gt ntp client enable 3 You check the server status using the show ntp server status command as shown gt show ntp server status 198 206 181 139 IP address Host mode Peer mode Prefer Version Key Stratum Minpoll 11 Delay Offset Dispersion Root distance Precision Reference IP Status Uptime count Reachability Unreachable count Stats reset count Packets sent Packets received Duplicate packets Bogus origin Bad authentication Bad dispersio
232. fferent user session names refer to Chapter 9 Managing Switch User Accounts e Date Shows the date and time down to the second when the command was originally entered IP Addr The IP address of the terminal from which the command was entered e Result The outcome of the command entry If a command was entered successfully the syntax SUCCESS displays in the Result field If a syntax or configuration error occurred at the time a command was entered details of the error display For example Result ERROR Ip Address must not belong to IP VLAN 67 subnet OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 18 Customizing the Screen Display Using the CLI Customizing the Screen Display The CLI has several commands that allow you to customize the way switch information is displayed to your screen You can make the screen display smaller or larger You can also adjust the size of the table displays and the number of lines shown on the screen Note Screen display examples in this chapter assume the use of a VT 100 ASCII emulator Changing the Screen Size Specify the size of the display shown on your terminal screen by using the tty command This command is useful when you have a small display screen or you want to limit the number of lines scrolled to the screen at one time For example to limit the number of lines to 10 and the number of columns to 150 enter the following gt tty 10 150 The first num
233. for a time to decide whether they are reliable Should the configuration or images files prove to be less reliable than their older counterparts in the certi fied directory then the switch can be rebooted from the certified directory The switch can be rolled back to an earlier version Once the contents of the working directory are established as good files then these files can be saved to the certified directory and used as the most reliable software to which the switch can be rolled back in an emergency situation page 5 4 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content CMM Files Software Rollback Configuration Scenarios for a Single Switch The following examples illustrate a few likely scenarios and explain how the running configuration work ing directory and certified directory interoperate to facilitate the software rollback on a single switch Note This information applies to a switch stack however the manner in which CMM software is propa gated to all switches in a stack is explained in Redundancy Scenarios on page 5 9 In the following examples R represents the running configuration W represents the working directory and C represents the certified directory Note For the following scenarios it is important to remember the difference between where the switch boots from and where the switch is running from See Where is the Switch Running From on page 5 4
234. for more information Scenario 1 Running Configuration Lost After Reboot Switch X is new from the factory It is plugged in and booted up from the certified directory the contents of which are loaded into the running configuration Since the working and certified directories are the same the switch is running from the working directory Through the course of several days changes are made to the configuration file in the running configuration Power to the switch is interrupted the switch reboots from the certified directory all the changes in the running configuration are overwritten and the switch rolls back to the certified directory which in this case is the factory setting This is illustrated in the following diagram Os 2 _ ELL W C 1 Switch boots from certified directory by using factory configura tion settings Since the working and certified directories are the same it will be running from the working direc tory R W C 2 Changes are made to the run ning configura tion and stored in the running con figuration R W C 3 Power is inter rupted and the switch goes down R W C 4 Switch reboots from certified directory by using factory configura tion settings run ning configuration changes are lost Since the working and certified direc tories are the same it runs from the working directory Running Configur
235. for that field or use the scroll bar on the right side of the Help page to scroll through help for all fields You can also click Print to print a hard copy of the Help page 3 Click Close or click the Close Window icon at the top right corner to close the Help page and return to the configuration or table page OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 11 25 WebView Help Using WebView page 11 26 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 A Software License and Copyright Statements This appendix contains Alcatel Lucent and third party software vendor license and copyright statements Alcatel Lucent License Agreement ALCATEL LUCENT SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT Please read the terms and conditions of this license agreement carefully before opening this package By opening this package you accept and agree to the terms of this license agreement If you are not willing to be bound by the terms of this license agreement do not open this package Please promptly return the product and any materials in unopened form to the place where you obtained it for a full refund 1 License Grant This is a license not a sales agreement between you the Licensee and Alcatel Lucent Alcatel Lucent hereby grants to Licensee and Licensee accepts a non exclusive license to use program media and computer software contained therein the Licensed Files and the accompanying user docum
236. from the previous example where a new directory named newssdir was created on a remote OmniSwitch 1 Use the Secure Shell FTP put command to transfer the file testfile1 rr from the local OmniSwitch to the newssdir directory the remote OmniSwitch You must specify the local path where the file originates and the remote path where the file is going in the command syntax The following command is used sftp gt put flash testfilel rr flash newssdir The following will be displayed to indicate that the file was successfully transferred to the flash newss dir on the target OmniSwitch Uploading flash testfilel rr to flash newssdir testfilel rr 2 To verify that the file was transferred to the correct destination use the Secure Shell FTP ed command to move your login to the newssdir directory Then use the Is command to list the contents of the directory The copied file is listed in the correct directory as shown here sftp gt cd newssdir sftp gt ls 2048 2048 31 testfilel rr Closing a Secure Shell FTP Session To terminate the Secure Shell FTP session issue the exit command The following will be displayed gt exit Connection to 11 333 30 135 closed This display indicates the Secure Shell FTP session with IP address 11 333 20 135 is closed The user is now logged into the OmniSwitch as a local device with no active remote connection page 1 34 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June
237. g 5 13 5 25 switch security defaults 10 2 specifications 10 2 syntax 6 4 syntax checking 6 13 System Clock 1 39 system date command 1 39 system time command 1 40 system timezone command 1 39 T tables displays 6 20 filters 6 25 takeover command 5 29 Telnet 2 6 2 8 telnet command 2 8 time 1 40 7 4 time zone 1 39 timed sessions 7 4 cancelling 7 7 future timed session 7 5 Trap Filters application examples 3 5 Traps 3 13 traps authentication 3 14 families 3 13 filters 3 13 management 3 14 ttycommand 6 19 U user accounts defaults 9 2 for switch access 9 4 saving settings 9 11 SNMP access 9 30 user command 3 5 9 8 9 20 9 36 10 7 creating auser 9 12 user configuration verify information about 9 38 user database specifications 9 2 switch management 10 5 user password expiration command 9 20 user password size mincommand 9 17 users see user accounts Index 4 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 UTC 4 1 verbose mode 7 9 vicommand 1 14 WebView 11 1 accessing WebView 11 8 adjacencies 11 23 application examples 11 5 browser setup 11 2 CLI commands 11 3 configuring the switch 11 8 defaults 11 2 disabling 11 3 enabling 11 3 port 11 3 on line help 11 24 Secure Socket Layer 11 4 Webview Configuring the Switch 11 8 who command 2 18 6 22 whoamicommand 6 23 wildcards 6 25 working directory 5 3 copying to certified directory 5 21 5 26 write memory command
238. g SNMP globally on the switch see Chapter 3 Using SNMP OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 29 Setting Up SNMP Access for a User Account Managing Switch User Accounts SNMP Access With Authentication Encryption To configure a user with SNMP access and authentication enter the user command with the desired authentication type sha md5 sha des md5 des gt user thomas password techpubs sha des When SNMP authentication is specified an SNMP authentication key is computed from the user pass word based on the authentication encryption setting In this example the switch would use the SHA authentication algorithm and DES encryption on the techpubs password to determine the SNMP authenti cation key for this user The key is in hexadecimal form and is used for encryption de encryption of the SNMP PDU The authentication key is only displayed in an ASCII configuration file if the snapshot command is entered The key is indicated in the file by the syntax authkey key See Chapter 7 Working With Config uration Files for information about using the snapshot command The key is not displayed in the CLI page 9 30 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Setting Up SNMP Access for a User Account Removing SNMP Access From a User To deny SNMP access enter the user command with the no snmp option gt user thomas no snmp This command
239. g directory are saved to the certified directory Once the working directory is copied to the certified directory and the switch reboots it reboots from the certified directory but run from the working directory When the switch runs in this fashion changes made to the running configuration can be saved to the working directory as described in Copying the Running Configuration to the Working Directory on page 5 16 Note Only software that has been thoroughly validated as viable and reliant software has to be copied to the certified directory Once you copy software to the certified directory you will not be able to recover a previous version of the image or configuration files OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 21 Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant Managing CMM Directory Content When the software on the working directory of a switch has proven to be effective and reliable eventually the contents of the working directory should be copied into the certified directory To copy the contents of the working directory to the certified directory enter the following command at the prompt gt copy working certified The copy working certified command is only valid if the switch is running from the working directory If you attempt to copy the working directory to the certified directory when the switch is running from the certified directory nothing happens and the files in the certified d
240. gSourceEndpoint The the local or transmitting switch For bidirectional test this also iden tifies the analyzer switch alaTestOamConfigTestIdStatus The test status not started running stopped ended 182 alaTestOamTestAbortTrap alaTestOamCon bridge This trap is sent to the NMS from figTestId the switch if the test is aborted during takeover alaTestOamConfigTestId A unique name to identify the entries in the table 183 alaDhcpBindingDuplicateEntry iphelperDhcpS This trap is sent to notify the user noopingBind of MAC Movement in DHCP ingMacAddres Binding Table 5 iphelperDhcpS noopingBind ingVlan iphelperDhcpS noopingBind ingIfIndex iphelperDhcpSnoopingBindingMacAddress The MAC Address subindex identifying this instance iphelperDhcpSnoopingBinding Vlan The DHCP client VLAN iphelperDhcpSnoopingBindingIfIndex The IfIndex subindex identifying this instance It is the interface from which the where the DHCP request is coming 184 esmStormThresholdViolationStatus Not Supported 185 Reserved 186 Reserved 187 Reserved OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 29 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information No Trap Name Objects Family Description 188 poePowerBudgetChange Not Supported 189 alaDBChange alaOldDb port This trap is sent when there is a alaNewDb change in the expansion module alaMod presence Please note that if the uleChang old mo
241. ge 2 21 e Configuring Login Parameters on page 2 23 e Enabling the DNS Resolver on page 2 24 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 2 1 In This Chapter Logging Into the Switch Management access is disabled except through the console port unless specifically enabled by a network administrator For more information about management access and methods use the table here as a guide For more information about See Enabling or unlocking management interfaces Getting Started Guide or on the switch Chapter 10 Managing Switch Security Authenticating users to manage the switch Chapter 10 Managing Switch Security Creating user accounts directly on the switch Chapter 9 Managing Switch User Accounts Using the CLI Chapter 6 Using the CLT Using WebView to manage the switch Chapter 11 Using WebView Using SNMP to manage the switch Chapter 3 Using SNMP page 2 2 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Logging Into the Switch Login Specifications Login Specifications Platforms Supported OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Telnet clients supported Any standard Telnet client FTP clients supported HTTP WebView clients supported Any standard FTP client Internet Explorer for Windows NT Windows XP and Windows 2000 version 6 0 Netscape for Windows NT Windows and Windows 2000 version 7 1
242. gin accounts are configured with end user profiles rather than functional privileges Profiles are configured separately and then attached to the user account A profile specifies command areas to which a user has access as well as VLAN and or port ranges to which the user has access The designation of particular command families domains or command families for user access is some times referred to as partitioned management The privileges and profiles are sometimes referred to as authorization Note End user command areas are different from the command domains families used for network administrator accounts In general command areas are much more restricted groups of commands see page 9 32 Functional privileges network administration and end user profiles customer login are mutually exclu sive Both types of users can exist on the switch but any given user account can only be one type network administrator or customer login The CLI in the switch prevents you from configuring both privileges and a profile for the same user End user profiles also cannot be configured on an authentication server however users configured on an external authentication server can have profile attributes which the switch will attempt to match to profiles configured locally If the user information is configured on an external server rather than locally on the switch through the CLI with both functional privilege attributes and profile attributes the
243. h Using Secure Shell Secure Shell Interface The Secure Shell interface is invoked when you enter the ssh command and the Secure Shellv6 interface is invoked by using the ssh6 command in an IPv6 environment After the authentication process between the client and the server is complete the remote Secure Shell interface runs in the same way as Telnet Refer to Starting a Secure Shell Session on page 2 17 to for detailed information Secure Shell File Transfer Protocol Secure Shell FTP is the standard file transfer protocol used with Secure Shell version 2 Secure Shell FTP is an interactive file transfer program similar to the industry standard FTP which performs all file transfer operations over a Secure Shell connection You can invoke the Secure Shell FTP session by using the sftp command and the SFTPV6 session by using the sftp6 command in an IPv6 environment Once the authentication phase is complete the Secure Shell FTP subsystem runs Secure Shell FTP connects and logs into the specified host then enters an interactive command mode Refer to Starting a Secure Shell Session on page 2 17 for detailed information OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 2 13 Using Secure Shell Logging Into the Switch Secure Shell Application Overview Secure Shell is an access protocol used to establish secured access to your OmniSwitch The Secure Shell protocol can be used to manage an OmniSwitch directly
244. h directory gt 18 Listing Directory flash rw 315 Jan 5 09 38 boot params drw 2048 Jan 5 09 22 certified drw 2048 Jan 5 09 22 working rw 12 Dec 18 2030 boot slot cfg drw 2048 Dec 27 2030 switch rw 64000 Jan 5 09 37 swlogl log rw 64000 Dec 27 2030 swlog2 log rw 256 Dec 27 2030 random seed drw 2048 Dec 18 2030 network 40208384 bytes free The following information describes the screen displayed by the 18 command The first column consists of three text characters The first character indicates whether the row entry is a file or a directory d The second and third characters indicate the user read write permissions drw 512 Oct 25 14 17 WORKING rw 321 Oct 25 14 39 boot params Here the first entry shows a directory d for which the user has read and write rw permissions The second entry shows a file for which the user has read and write rw permissions The second column indicates the number of bytes of flash memory the row entry occupies drw 512 Oct 25 14 17 WORKING rw 321 Oct 25 14 39 boot params Here the first entry shows that the directory uses 512 bytes of flash memory The second entry shows that the file occupies 321 bytes of flash memory The third fourth and fifth columns show the date and time the row entry was created or copied into the flash directory drw 512 Oct 25 14 17 WORKING rw 321 Oct 25 14 39 boot params Here the first entry indicates the file was created or copie
245. h settings and must only be used as directed by Service and Support During the automatic remote configuration process the debug configuration file is downloaded with the filename AlcatelDebug cfg Script File The script file is downloaded and stored with the same name in the flash working directory The script file contains the commands to be implemented on the switch after running the configuration file If a configuration file is not available the script file can be used to configure the switch dynamically with out a boot cfg file Script File Example vlan 100 enable name VLAN 100 vlan 100 port default 1 1 write memory Script File Usage Guidelines e After the script file is downloaded the switch does not automatically reboot e If awrite memory command is used in the script file then it overwrites the boot cfg file Hence the script file must not contain the write memory command if it is downloaded along with the configuration file e If any script file command fails it is logged in to a file err is the script file name in the flash directory and the remaining commands are implemented e If the script file name mentioned in the instruction file is incorrect then an error is logged in the switch log or swlog log file page 8 16 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download LACP Auto Detection and Automatic Link Aggregate Association LACP Auto Dete
246. h the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your righ
247. hanges are stored temporarily in the running configuration in the RAM of the switch In order to save these changes the running configuration must be saved to the working directory as shown Certified Primary CMM gt 2 1 1 The switch boots from the certified directory and the software is loaded to the RAM to create running configuration In this diagram 2 Changes are made in the running configuration and are saved to the working directory Now the boot cfg file in the running configuration and the boot cfg file in the working directory are identi cal Should the switch go down or reboot the configuration changes made can be restored Note If the switch is rebooted at this point in the process since the certified and working directory boot cfg files are not the same the switch boots up and run from the certified directory See Where is the Switch Running From on page 5 4 for a description of this process The modifications made to the functionality of the switch are recorded in the running configuration in the RAM These changes in the RAM are only valid until the switch is rebooted At that time the switch reboots from the certified directory If the running configuration is not saved to the working directory before a reboot then the changes made in the running configuration are lost To save these changes it is necessary to save the contents of the runni
248. hat preceded the current password Also the exclamation point is not a valid pass word character and specifying an asterisk as one or more characters in a password is allowed as long as every character is not an asterisk For example password 123456 is allowed password 1 not allowed OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 15 Configuring Password Policy Settings Managing Switch User Accounts Configuring Password Policy Settings The global password policy settings for the switch define the following requirements that are applied to all user accounts e Minimum password size e Whether or not the password can contain the username e The minimum number of uppercase characters required in a password The minimum number of uppercase characters required in a password The minimum number of base 10 digits required in a password The minimum number of non alphanumeric characters symbols required in a password e Password expiration The maximum number of old passwords that are saved in the password history e The minimum number of days during which a user is not allowed to change their password Password policy settings are applied when a password is created or modified The following subsections describe how to configure these settings using CLI commands To view the current policy configuration use the show user password policy command For more infor mation a
249. hat the image file was corrupted during the FTP transfer Rather than having a disabled switch the network administrator can reboot the switch from the certified directory which has the previous more reliable version of the ENI image file and wait for a new version of the image In the meantime the administrator s switch is still functioning This is illustrated in the following diagram Wr OS PIIN EE LEL R W C R W C 1 The new file is 2 The new file is 3 The file is cor 4 Switch reboots installed in the loaded through a rupted and does from certified working directory reboot from the not boot correctly directory by using working direc the old file Since tory The switch is the working and running from the certified directo working directory ries are not the same it will be running from the certified directory Switch Rolls Back to Previous File Version page 5 8 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content CMM Files Redundancy CMM software redundancy is one of the switch s most important fail over features For CMM software redundancy at least two fully operational switches must be linked together as a stack In addition the CMM software must be synchronized Refer to Synchronizing the Primary and Secondary CMMs on page 5 27 for more information In a stack of switches one of the swi
250. he 10 passwords saved then an error message is displayed notifying the user that the password is not available By default the password history is set to save up to 4 old passwords for each user account To configure the number of old passwords to save use the user password history command For example gt user password history 2 To disable the password history function specify 0 as the number of old passwords to save For example gt user password history 0 A password is dropped from the password history when it no longer falls within the number of passwords that are retained by the switch OmniS witch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 21 Configuring Global User Lockout Settings Managing Switch User Accounts Configuring the Minimum Age for a Password The password minimum age setting specifies the number of days during which a user is not allowed to change their password It is necessary to configure a password minimum age value that is less than the password expiration value The default minimum age is set to zero which means that there is no minimum age requirement for a pass word To configure a minimum password age use the user password min age command For example gt user password min age 7 This command specifies that the user is prevented from changing their password for seven days from the time the password was created or modified Configuring Global User Lockout Settings The following
251. he Management Switch sends LLDP PDUs on the untagged interface with the MAC address of 01 20 DA 02 01 73 LLDP Propagation through Network These LLDP PDUs are propagated throughout the network as normal L2 multicast frames eventually reaching the Access Switch LLDP Reception by Access Switch The Automatic Configuration Download feature enables the processing of the Nearest edge LLDP PDUs by default Nearest Edge Mode Configuration Example Management Switch The Management Switch is connected to the network using an untagged interface and is configured to use the Nearest edge Mode MAC address using the destination mac address command LLDP is configured on the untagged port of the Management Switch so that the LLDP PDUs are sent with the Management VLAN information The LLDP PDUs are sent on the untagged interface with the Nearest edge MAC address and propagated throughout the network eventually reaching the Access Switch For example gt vlan 999 name VLAN 999 gt vlan 999 port default 1 1 gt lldp destination mac address nearest edge gt lldp 1 1 tlv dot1 vlan name enable OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 8 21 NearestEdge Mode Operation Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Access Switch When used in conjunction with the Automatic Remote Configuraton feature no configuration is necessary on the Access OmniSwitches Newly connected switches without a boot cfg f
252. he USB flash drive to the CMM The flash is reformated and the images are copied to the related flash 6250 certified or flash 6450 certified directory of the CMM and the switch reboots from the certified directory 4 Now that the switch has been recovered it can be reconfigured as needed Note The OmniSwitch must have a properly working 6 6 4 version of uboot miniboot to support the Disaster Recovery feature Note If a backup boot cfg file is on the USB flash drive it is copied along with the image files and can be used to recover the switch configuration OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 33 Emergency Restore of the boot cfg File Managing CMM Directory Content Emergency Restore of the boot cfg File If all copies of the boot cfg file have been deleted and a system boot has occurred network configuration information is permanently lost However if the files have been deleted and no boot has occurred you can issue a write memory command to regenerate the boot cfg file Can 1 Restore the boot file While Running from Certified Yes While it is not recommended that you routinely save configuration changes while running from the certified directory you can perform an emergency restore of your configuration by following the steps 1 Copy your current configuration to a manually generated boot cfg file in the flash directory by enter ing the following command gt configuration snapshot all boot
253. he interface The testing 3 state indicates that no operational packets can be passed If ifAdminStatus is down 2 then ifOperStatus should be down 2 If ifAdminStatus is changed to up 1 then ifOperStatus should change to up 1 if the interface is ready to transmit and receive net work traffic it should change to dormant 5 if the interface is waiting for external actions such as a serial line waiting for an incoming connection it should remain in the down 2 state if and only if there is a fault that pre vents it from going to the up 1 state it should remain in the notPresent 6 state if the interface has missing typically hardware components page B 2 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name Objects Family Description 4 authenticationFailure none snmp The SNMP agent in the switch has received a protocol message that is not properly authenticated 5 entConfigChange none module AnentConfigChange notification is generated when a conceptual row is created modified or deleted in one of the entity tables 6 aipAMAPStatusTrap aipAMAPLast aip The status of the Alcatel Lucent TrapReason Mapping Adjacency Protocol aipAMAPLast AMAP port changed TrapPort aipAMAPLastTrapReason Reason for last change of port status Valid reasons are 1 port added 2 change of information on existing port 3 port deleted and 4 no trap has been
254. he trap type for monitored DDM parameters clearViolation 1 highAlarm 2 high Warning 3 lowWarning 4 lowAlarm 5 ddmRxOpticalPower The current Received Optical Power of the SFP XFP in 10s of milli Watts mW 150 alaLbdStateChangeForAutoRecovery ifIndex port This trap is sent when an SFP ddmNotification XFP SFP Rx optical power has Type crossed any threshold or reverted ddmRxOpti from previous threshold violation calPower for a port represented by ifIndex It also provides the current real time value of SFP XFP SFP Rx optical power ifIndex tThe interface index ddmNotificationType the trap type for monitored DDM parameters clearViolation 1 highAlarm 2 high Warning 3 lowWarning 4 lowAlarm 5 ddmRxOpticalPower The current Received Optical Power of the SFP XFP in 10s of milli Watts mW 151 Reserved 152 page B 24 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name Objects Family alaErpRinglId alaErpRing alaErpRing PortStatus 153 alaErpRingPortStatusChanged bridge alaErpRingId tThe Ring identifier that is unique in the bridge Description This trap is sent when the ring port status is changed alaErpRingPortIfIndex tThe interface index either a bridge port an aggregated link within a bridge port to which ring port is configured alaErpRingPortStatus the status of the
255. he user through the command log command For more information on enabling and disabling command logging refer to the sections above Viewing Logged CLI Commands and Command Entry Results To view a list of logged commands along with the corresponding information including entry results enter the show ssh config command For example gt show command log Command ip interface vlan 68 address 168 14 12 120 vlan 68 UserName admin Date MON APR 28 01 42 24 Ip Addr 128 251 19 240 Result SUCCESS Command ip interface vlan 68 address 172 22 2 13 vlan 68 UserName admin Date MON APR 28 01 41 51 Ip Addr 128 251 19 240 Result ERROR Ip Address must not belong to IP VLAN 67 subnet Command ip interface vlan 67 address 172 22 2 12 vlan 67 UserName admin Date MON APR 28 01 41 35 Ip Addr 128 251 19 240 Result SUCCESS Command command log enable UserName admin Date MON APR 28 01 40 55 Ip Addr 128 251 19 240 Result SUCCESS The show command log command lists up to 100 CLI commands in descending order In other words the most recent commands are listed first In the example above the command log enable syntax is the least recent command logged the ip interface vlan 68 address 168 14 12 120 vlan 68 syntax is the most recent e Command Shows the exact syntax of the command as entered by the user UserName Shows the name of the user session that entered the command For more information on di
256. his element 57 alaStackMgrOutOfTokensTrap alaStack chassis The element identified by MerSlotNI alaStackMgrSlotNINumber will Number enter the pass through mode because there are no tokens available to be assigned to this element alaStackMgrSlotNINumber Numbers allocated for the stack NIs as follows 0 invalid slot number 1 8 valid and assigned slot numbers corresponding to values from the entPhysicalTable 1001 1008 switches operating in pass through mode 255 unassigned slot number 58 alaStackMgrOutOfPassThruSlotsTrap N A chassis There are no pass through slots available to be assigned to an ele ment that is supposed to enter the pass through mode 59 gmHwvVlanRuleTableOverloadAlert gmOverloadRu vlan An overload trap occurs when leTable ever a new entry to the hardware gmOverloadRu VLAN rule table gets dropped leType due to the overload of the table gmOverloadRu leVlanId gmOverloadRu leMacAddress gmOverloadRu leIpAddress gmOverloadRu leProtocol gmOverloadRuleTable Overloaded hardware VLAN rule table gmOverloadRuleType VLAN rule types that are not configured due to the overload of the hardware VLAN rule table gmOverloadRuleVlanId The overloaded VLAN ID gmOverloadRuleMacAddress The overloaded MAC address gmOverloadRuleIpAddress The overloaded IP address gmOverloadRuleProtocol The overloaded protocol type page B 14 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide Ju
257. his software without specific prior written permission ZModem Provided with this product is a program or code that can be used without any restriction Copyright C 1986 Gary S Brown All rights reserved W Boost Software License X Provided with this product is reference implementation so that the Boost libraries are suit able for eventual standardization Boost works on any modern operating system including UNIX and Windows variants Version 1 0 Copyright C Gennadiy Rozental 2005 All rights reserved OpenLDAP Provided with this software is an open source implementation of the Lightweight Directory Access Proto col LDAP Version 3 Copyright C 1990 1998 1999 Regents of the University of Michigan A Hartgers Juan C Gomez All rights reserved OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page A 15 Third Party Licenses and Notices Software License and Copyright Statements This software is not subject to any license of Eindhoven University of Technology Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License This software is not subject to any license of Silicon Graphics Inc or Purdue University Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted without restriction or fee of any kind as long as this notice is preserved BITMAP C Provided with this product is a program for personal and non profit use Copyright
258. hly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and later version you have the option of following the terms and condi tions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Soft ware Foundat
259. hout specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABIL ITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The copyright of the products such as crypto dhcp net netinet netinet6 netley netwrs libinet6 are same as that of the internet protocol version 6 CURSES Copyright C 1987 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from t
260. how session config show alias show prefix show history show more Displays session manager configuration information for example default prompt banner file name and inactivity timer Lists all current commands defined by the use of the alias CLI command Shows the command prefix if any currently stored by the CLI Prefixes are stored for command families that support the prefix recognition feature Displays commands you have recently issued to the switch The commands are displayed in a numbered list Shows the enable status of the more mode along with the number of lines specified for the screen display For more information about the resulting displays from these commands see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Additional information can also be found in Using Show Commands on page 6 5 OmniS witch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 27 Verifying CLI Usage Using the CLI page 6 28 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 7 Working With Configuration Files Commands and settings needed for the OmniSwitch can be contained an ASCII based configuration text file Configuration files can be created in several ways and are useful in network environments where multiple switches must be managed and monitored This chapter describes how configuration files are created how they are applied to the switch and how they can be used to enhance OmniSwitch usab
261. iAccess SNMPv2 SMI TP DEVICES 4000 ALCATEL IND1 BASE ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the SNMP Notifi SNMPv2 SMI TRAP MGR MIB cation that is Trap Manager subsystem SNMP v2 TC SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the User Datagram SNMPv2 SMI UDP RELAY MIB Protocol UDP Relay subsystem SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND1 Definitions of managed objects for the VLAN Man SNMPv2 SMI VLAN MGR MIB ager subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the VLAN Span SNMPv2 SMI VLAN STP MIB ning Tree Protocol STP subsystem SNMPv2 CONF BRIDGE MIB ALCATEL IND1I WEB Definitions of managed objects for the Web Based SNMPv2 SMI MGI MIB Management subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF INET ADDRESS MIB page 3 24 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using SNMP Verifying the SNMP Configuration Verifying the SNMP Configuration To display information about SNMP management stations trap management community strings and security use the show commands listed in the following table show snmp station Displays current SNMP station information including IP address UDP Port number Enabled Disabled status SNMP version and user account names show snmp community map Shows the local community strings database including status commu nity string text and user account name show snmp security show
262. ications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copy right notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer watranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you
263. ified on the client side To specify the NTP version on the server from which the switch receives updates use the ntp server command with the server IP address or domain name version keyword and version number as shown gt ntp server 1 1 1 1 version 3 The default setting is version 4 Marking a Server as Preferred If a client receives timestamp updates from more than one server it is possible to mark one of the servers as the preferred server A preferred server s timestamp is used before another unpreferred server times tamp To specify an NTP as preferred use the ntp server command with the server IP address or domain name and the prefer keyword as shown gt ntp server 1 1 1 1 prefer OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 4 11 Configuring NTP Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP Using Authentication Authentication is used to encrypt the NTP messages sent between the client and server The NTP server and the NTP client must both have a text file containing the public and secret keys This file should be obtained from the server administrator For more information on the authentication file see Authentica tion on page 4 8 Once both the client and server share common 5 encryption key the MD5 key identification for the NTP server must be specified on and labeled as trusted on the client side Setting the Key ID for the NTP Server Enabling authentication require
264. ii restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1 and 2 of 48 CFR 52 227 19 as applicable 14 Third Party Materials Licensee is notified that the Licensed Files contain third party software and materials licensed to Alcatel Lucent by certain third party licensors Some third party licensors e g Wind River and their licensors with respect to the Run Time Module are third part beneficiaries to this License Agreement with full rights of enforcement Please refer to the section entitled Third Party Licenses and Notices on page A 4 for the third party license and notice terms OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page A 3 Third Party Licenses and Notices Software License and Copyright Statements Third Party Licenses and Notices The licenses and notices related only to such third party software are set forth below A Booting and Debugging Non Proprietary Software A small separate software portion aggregated with the core software in this product and primarily used for initial booting and debugging constitutes non proprietary software some of which may be obtained in source code format from Alcatel Lucent for a limited period of time Alcatel Lucent will provide a machine readable copy of the applicable non proprietary software to any requester for a cost of copying shipping and handling This offer will expire 3 years from the date of the first shipment of this product B The OpenLDAP Public License Versi
265. ilable the LDAP server Idap2 will be used for accounting If that server is unavailable logging will be done locally on the switch through the Switch Logging feature For more information about Switch Logging see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide To remove an individual server from the list of servers enter the aaa accounting session command with the relevant server name s removing the desired server from the list For example gt aaa accounting session 1 local The server Idap2 is removed as an accounting server To disable accounting for Authenticated Switch Access use the no form of the aaa accounting session command gt no aaa accounting session Accounting will not be performed for Authenticated Switch Access sessions page 10 12 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch Security Verifying the ASA Configuration Verifying the ASA Configuration To display information about management interfaces used for Authenticated Switch Access use the show commands listed here show aaa authentication Displays information about the current authenticated switch session show aaa accounting mac Displays information about accounting servers configured for Authenti cated Switch Access or Authenticated VLANs aaa classification rule mac Displays information about a particular AAA server or AAA servers address For more information about the resulting displays from the
266. ile configuration lt qos pol gt scheduled at 01 10 31 11 30 Note Only one session at a time can be scheduled on the switch If two sessions are set the last one will overwrite the first Before you schedule a timed session you must use the show configuration status command to see if another session is already running The following displays where the timed session was set on March 10 2002 at 01 00 using the configuration apply group_config in 6 10 syntax gt show configuration status File configuration lt group_config gt scheduled at 03 10 02 07 10 page 7 6 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Working With Configuration Files Configuration Files Overview Cancelling a Timed Session You may cancel a pending timed session by using the configuration cancel command To confirm that your timer session has been cancelled use the show configuration status command The following will display gt configuration cancel gt show configuration status File configuration none scheduled For more details about the CLI commands used to apply configuration files or to use timer sessions refer to Configuration File Manager Commands in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Configuration File Error Reporting If you apply a configuration file to the switch that contains significant errors the application may not work In this case the switch will indicate the number of errors detected and print the
267. ile receive the Nearest Edge LLDP PDUs discover the Management VLAN tag the port with that VLAN ID and create a DHCP client interface on the Managment VLAN This auto configuration allows the DHCP client interface on the OmniSwitch to receive an IP address in the proper IP subnet Access Untagged Interface Untagged Interface 999 Def VLAN 999 Switch F A Management Management VLAN 999 Untagged 6250 MACDA 0120da020173 Vian Name TLV K Vlan ID 999 2 j Vlan name VLAN 999 22 Tagged 999 Interfaces LLDP PDU 6250 Tagged 999 MACDA 0120da020173 Vian Name TLV Vian ID 999 Vlan name VLAN 999 gt Use VLAN 999 for DHCP Client Example Nearest Edge Configuration page 8 22 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Zero Touch License Upgrade Zero Touch License Upgrade Some features like OmniSwitch Metro features require a software license for activation and are restricted only to a licensed user To activate licensed features a license serial number must be purchased along with an authorization code from Alcatel Lucent The authorization code can then be used to generate a license file The Automatic Remote Configration Download feature supports automatic license upgrade process for remote devices With Zero Touch License Upgrade the metro features can be unlocked on each non metro switch in a netw
268. ileSize The number of bytes in 16K 16384 increments allowed for the file default 16384 bytes The file contains only the last monitorFileName bytes of the current port monitoring instance 69 gmHwMixModeSubnetRuleTable gmSubnetRule vlan An subnet overload trap occurs OverloadAlert Table in mixed mode whenever a new gmOverloadRu entry to the HW subnet rule table leSlice gets dropped due to the overload of the table gmSubnetRuleTable Overloaded HW subnet rule table gmOverloadRuleSlice Overloaded slot Id Note This trap is not supported 70 pethPwrSupplyConflict pethSourceSlot chassis This trap is sent when there is a power supply conflict in a POE device pethSourceSlot Slot number of generating entity 71 pethPwrSupplyNotSupported pethSourceSlot chassis This trap is sent when the power supply is not supported pethSourceSlot Slot number of generating entity 72 psPortUpAfterLearningWindowEx IpsTrapSwitch bridge This trap is sent when an LPS piredT Name port joins or is enabled after the IpsTrapS witch Learning Window is expired dis Slice abling the MAC address learning IpsTrapS witch on the port Port systemServices This trap is also generated at the Date time the Learning Window systemServices expires with a slice and port Time value of 0 IpsTrapSwitchName The name of the switch IpsTrapSwitchSlice The slot number for the LPS port on which the violation occured IpsTrapSwitchPort
269. ility In This Chapter Configuration procedures described in this chapter include Tutorial for Creating a Configuration File on page 7 2 Applying Configuration Files to the Switch on page 7 6 Configuration File Error Reporting on page 7 7 Text Editing on the Switch on page 7 9 Creating Snapshot Configuration Files on page 7 10 OmniS witch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 7 1 Configuration File Specifications Working With Configuration Files Configuration File Specifications The following table lists specifications applicable to Configuration Files Creation Methods for e Create a text file on a word processor and upload it to the switch Configuration Files Invoke the switch s snapshot feature to create a text file e Create a text file using one of the switch s text editors Timer Functions Files can be applied immediately or by setting a timer the switch _ Command Capture Feature Snapshot feature captures switch configurations in a text file Error Reporting Snapshot feature includes error reporting in the text file Text Editing on the Switch Vi standard UNIX editor The Ed standard UNIX editor is available in the debug mode Tutorial for Creating a Configuration File This example creates a configuration file that includes CLI commands to configure the DHCP Relay appli cation on the switch For this example the forward delay value is set to
270. ing WebView see Chapter 11 Using WebView Using SNMP to Manage the Switch SNMP SNMP Any standard SNMP browser may be used for logging into the switch See Chapter 3 Using User Accounts User accounts may be configured and stored directly on the switch and user accounts may also be config ured and stored on an external authentication server or servers The accounts include a username and password In addition they also specify the user s privileges or end user profile depending on the type of user account In either case the user is given read only or read write access to particular commands e Local User Database See Chapter 9 Managing Switch User Accounts for information about creating accounts on the switch e External Authentication Servers The switch may be set up to communicate with external authentication servers that contain user informa tion The user information includes usernames and passwords it may also include privilege information or reference an end user profile name For information about setting up the switch to communicate with external authentication servers see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 2 7 Using Telnet Logging Into the Switch Using Telnet Telnet may be used to log into the switch from a remote station All of the standard Telnet commands are supported by software in the swi
271. ing command entry gt show macrocode The correct syntax is show microcode To change the spelling in this entry use the Left Arrow key to place the cursor between the m and the gt show m acrocode Use the Delete key to remove the and type i gt show microcode Press Enter to execute the command page 6 11 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using the CLI CLI Services Recalling the Previous Command Line To recall the last command executed by the switch press either the Up Arrow key or the bang bang command at the prompt and the previous command is displayed on your screen You can execute the command again by pressing Enter or you can edit it first by deleting or inserting characters In the following example the ls command is used to list the contents of the flash switch directory of the switch gt ls Listing Directory flash switch drw 2048 Jan 1 1980 drw 2048 Jan 3 19 23 rw 308 Jan 1 1980 banner default txt 9850880 bytes free gt To enter this same command again use the Up Arrow key The Is command appears at prompt To issue the Is command press Enter gt ls The Up Arrow key and the bang bang command displays the last command line entered even if the command was rejected by the switch For more details on using the command refer to Command History on page 6 15 Inserting Characters T
272. ing that all Licensed Materials and all copies thereof and extracts therefrom have been returned or erased by the memory of Licensee s computer or made non readable Alcatel Lucent may terminate this License Agreement upon the breach by Licensee of any term hereof Upon such termination by page A 2 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Software License and Copyright Statements Alcatel Lucent License Agreement Alcatel Lucent Licensee agrees to return to Alcatel Lucent or destroy the Licensed Materials and all copies and portions thereof 10 Governing Law This License Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the laws of the State of California 11 Severability Should any term of this License Agreement be declared void or unenforceable by any court of competent jurisdiction such declaration shall have no effect on the remaining terms herein 12 No Waiver The failure of either party to enforce any rights granted hereunder or to take action against the other party in the event of any breach hereunder shall not be deemed a waiver by that party as to subsequent enforcement of rights or subsequent actions in the event of future breaches 13 Notes to United States Government Users Software and documentation are provided with restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure by the government is subject to 1 restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with Alcatel Lucent s reseller s or
273. invoke NTP server synchronization tests as specified by the NTP protocol enter the ntp server synchronized command as shown gt ntp server synchronized NTP synchronization is enabled by default Note The NTP protocol discards the NTP servers that are unsynchronized To disable an NTP client from invoking tests for NTP server synchronization enter the ntp server unsynchronized command as shown gt ntp server unsynchronized Disabling peer synchronization tests allows the NTP client to synchronize with either an NTP peer that is not synchronized with an atomic clock or a network of NTP servers that will finally synchronize with an atomic clock Setting the Minimum Poll Time The minimum poll time is the number of seconds that the switch waits before requesting a time synchroni zation from the NTP server This number is determined by raising 2 to the power of the number entered using the ntp server command with the server IP address or domain name and the minpoll keyword For example to set the minimum poll time to 128 seconds enter the following gt ntp server 1 1 1 1 minpoll 7 This would set the minimum poll time to 2 128 seconds page 4 10 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP Configuring NTP Setting the Version Number There are currently four versions of NTP available numbered one through four The version that the NTP server uses must be spec
274. ion write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free soft ware and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARIS ING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY O
275. ion of the page and specific instructions for each configurable field General WebView Help To display general help for WebView click the Help option in the WebView banner For information about the banner see WebView Page Layout on page 11 5 The information in the help page is similar to the information given in this chapter Specific page Help Each help page provides a description of the page and a description for each field To access help from any global configuration page table page or Add or Modify window 1 Click the Help button at the bottom of the page A help window displays similar to the following 10 255 73 12 IP Static Routes Help Microsoft Internet IP Static Routes Help Print or close the Help page Print Close The IP Static Routes page displays all static IP routes stored in the IP Forwarding Table A route with a 0 0 0 0 Destination Address and 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask is a default route Click to jump to field definition Destination Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Metric Destination Address The destination IP address of the route Top Print Close Subnet Mask The subnet mask corresponding to the destination IP address Print Close Help Page Layout page 11 24 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using WebView WebView Help 2 Click on the field name hyperlink on the Help page to go to the Help page
276. irectory remains unchanged Note In order for this command to work the amount of free space in flash must equal the size of the files being copied If there is not enough free space the copy attempt fails and an error message is generated Only image files the boot cfg file and the certs pem file should be kept in the working directory Note It is important to synchronize the stack as soon as the validity of the software is established Unsyn chronized stacks are at risk of mismanaging data traffic due to incompatibilities in different versions of switch software Synchronizing the switch is described in Synchronizing the Primary and Secondary CMMs on page 5 27 Copying the Certified Directory to the Working Directory It is possible to copy the contents of the certified directory to the working directory This is done by using the following CLI command gt copy certified working If this command is executed all files in the working directory is permanently overwritten by the contents of the certified directory The copy working certified command is described in detail in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Note In order for this command to work the amount of free space in flash must equal the size of the files being copied If there is not enough free space the copy attempt fails and an error message is generated Only image files the boot cfg file and the certs pem file should be kept in the certified directory
277. ironment For example gt ftp6 fe80 a00 20ff fea8 8961 intf1 Connecting to fe80 a00 20ff fea8 8961 connected 220 cosmo FTP server UNIX r System V Release 4 1 ready Name Note FTPv6 sessions are supported only on the OmniSwitch 6250 It is mandatory to specify the name of the particular IPv6 interface if the FTPv6 server has been specified using its link local address 3 Set the client to binary mode with the bin command Enter a valid user name and password for the host you specified with the ftp command A screen similar to the following is displayed Name Jsmith 331 Password required for Jsmith Password 230 User Jsmith logged in 4 After logging in you will receive the ftp gt prompt You may enter a question mark to view available FTP commands as shown here ftp gt Supported commands ascii binary bye cd delete dir get help hash 15 put pwd quit remotehelp user lpwd mput mget prompt lIs led user These are industry standard FTP commands Their definitions are given in the following table ascii Set transfer type to ASCH 7 bit binary Set transfer type to binary 8 bit bye Close session gracefully cd Change to a new directory on the remote machine page 1 22 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files Loading Software onto the Switch delete Delete a file on the remote machine dir
278. is solid green OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 8 7 Interaction With Other Features Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Interaction With Other Features This section contains important information about how other OmniSwitch features interact with Automatic Remote Configuration Refer to the specific sections if required to get detailed information about the feature interaction process UDP DHCP Relay Interaction with UDP DHCP Relay is required for the following processes to support Automatic Remote Configuration All the DHCP responses from the DHCP server are processed The IP address mask and gateway details are processed To acquire Option 66 and Option 67 information the TFTP Server name and Boot file name are retrieved For details on DHCP interaction see the section DHCP Client Auto Configuration Process on page 8 18 QoS Interaction with QoS is required for the following processes to support Auto Remote Configuration 802 Policy control lists PCLs are created to trap LLDP packets PCLs are deleted after the required processing for Nearest Edge Mode operation 1Q For 802 1Q tagging is applied interaction is required for Nearest Edge Mode operation LLDP In Nearest Edge Mode operation LLDP packets carry and provide the advertised VLAN ID to the Access OmniSwitches running Auto Remote Configuration download Dynamic Link Aggregation LACP Intera
279. itch feature are noted in the table Archive File Name Base or Optional Software Description KFbase img Base Software CMM Base KFeni img Base Software NI image for all Ethernet type NIs KFos img Base Software CMM Operating System KFsecu img Base Software CMM Security The following table lists the image files for the OmniSwitch 6250 Series switches Most of the files listed here are part of the base switch configuration Files that support an optional switch feature are noted in the table Archive File Name Base or Optional Software Description KFbase img Base Software CMM Base KFeni img Base Software NI image for all Ethernet type NIs KFos img Base Software CMM Operating System KFsecu img Base Software CMM Security Note Some switches may also have image files in flash memory These files can result from the manufacturing process and are not needed for the switch to function Therefore they can be safely deleted page 1 28 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files Application Examples for File Management Application Examples for File Management The following sections provide detailed examples of managing files and directories on the switch Transferring a File to the Switch Using FTP In this example the user is adding a security feature to an OmniSwitch 6250 switch To do this the user must load the KFsecu img image file onto the switch and then register the file by rebooting th
280. ith the firmware version in the instruction file If the firmware versions are different then the new firmware is downloaded in to the flash working directory 12 If available the downloaded configuration file is saved as the boot cfg file in the flash working directory and the switch is rebooted completing the auto configuration process a reboot occurs only if no script file is downloaded 13 If available commands in the script file are run and the DHCP client configuration is automatically removed on the default VLAN 1 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 8 9 Automatic Remote Configuration Download Process Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Note The Remote Configuration Load RCL process may be delayed for 30 secs if no OXO DHCP response is found within 30 secs page 8 10 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Automatic Remote Configuration Download Process Process Illustration The following flowchart represents the automatic remote configuration download process in detail Normal Switch Bootup Start Automatic Configuration LACP Auto Detection and Link Aggregate Association DHCP client configuration on VLAN 1 Management VLAN127 or LLDP tagged management VLAN Connect to TFTP server Get instruction file Does DHCP offer have TFTP server
281. jects for the ESM Driver subsystem For MIP Id number 77828 the MIB table name is healthModuleTable This table is found in the AlcatelIND1 Health MIB which defines managed objects for the health monitoring subsystem For Id number 87042 the MIB table name is vacmContextTable This table is found in the SNMP VIEW BASED ACM MIB which serves as the view based access control model VACM for the SNMP page 3 16 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using SNMP SNMP MIB Information Industry Standard MIBs The following table lists the supported industry standard MIBs MIB Name Description Dependencies BRIDGE MIB The Bridge MIB for managing MAC bridges based on SNMPv2 SMI RFC 1493 the IEEE 802 1D standard between Local Area Net 1215 work LAN segments EE8023 LAG MIB Link Aggregation module for managing IEEE SNMPv2 SMI IEEE 802 3ad Standard 802 3ad SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF IF MIB Q BRIDGE MIB ENTITY MIB RFC 2737 Entity MIB Version 2 Standardized set of managed SNMPv2 SMI objects representing logical and physical entities and SNMPv2 TC relationships between them SNMPv2 CONF SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB EtherLike MIB Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernet like SNMPv2 SMI RFC 2665 Interface Types SNMPv2 CONF IF MIB HCNUM TC RFC 2856 An MIB module containing textual conventions for SNMPv2 SMI high capacity data types This module addresses an SN
282. k of Alcatel Lucent registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office Here is an example of a banner that has been changed login user123 password Welcome to the Alcatel Lucent OmniSwitch 6450 Software Version 6 6 1 R01 Development October 05 2007 Copyright c 1994 2007 Alcatel Lucent All Rights reserved OmniSwitch TM is a trademark of Alcatel Lucent registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office KEKKKKKKEK LOGIN ALERT kkk kkk kkk kk kkk kkk kkk This switch is a secure device Unauthorized use of this switch will go on your permanent record Two steps are required to change the login banner These steps are listed here e Create a text file that contains the banner you want to display in the switch s flash switch directory e Enable the text file by entering the session banner CLI command followed by the filename To create the text file containing the banner text you may use the vi text editor in the switch See Chapter 1 Managing System Files for information about creating files directly on the switch This method allows you to create the file in the flash directory without leaving the CLI console session You can also create the text file using a text editing software package such as MS Wordpad and transfer the file to the switch s flash directory For more information about file transfers see Chapter 1 Managing System Files If you want the login banner in th
283. kMgrNeighborChangeTrap alaStack chassis Indicates whether or not the stack MerStackSta is in loop tus alaStack MerSlotNI Number alaStackMgrTra pLinkNumber alaStackMgrStackStatus Indicates whether the stack is or is not in a loop alaStackMgrSlotNINumber The numbers allocated for the stack NIs are from Ito 8 alaStackMgrTrapLinkNumber Holds the link number when the stack is not in a loop 39 alaStackMgrRoleChangeTrap alaStackMgrPri chassis Indicates that a new primary or mary secondary stack is elected alaStackMgrSec ondary alaStackMgrPrimary Holds the number of the stack which is in Primary role alaStackMgrSecondary Holds the number of the stack which is in Secondary role page B 10 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name Objects Family Description 40 lpsViolationTrap IpsTrapSwitch bridge A Learned Port Security LPS Name violation has occurred IpsTrapS witchl pAddr IpsTrapS witch Slice IpsTrapS witch Port IpsTrapViolat ingMac IpsTrapViola tionType systemServices Date systemServices Time IpsTrapSwitchName The name of the switch IpsTrapSwitchIpAddr the IP address of switch IpsTrapSwitchSlice The physical slice number for the LPS port on which the violation occurred IpsTrapSwitchPort The physical port number on which the violation occurred IpsTrapViolatingMac The violating MAC address Ips
284. l be displayed ZMODEM file transfer successful Hit lt RETURN gt to exit When the transfer is complete you can use the Is command to verify that the new files were loaded successfully To abort a Zmodem session enter Ctrl X five times in succession Note Files transferred via Zmodem are loaded into the flash directory Before the new files can be used by the switch you must transfer them to the switch flash working directory and reboot the switch page 1 26 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files Registering Software Image Files Registering Software Image Files New software transferred to the switch must go through a registration process before it can be used by the switch The registration process includes two tasks e Transfer the new software file s to the switch flash working directory via remote connection e Restart the switch to register the software Directories on the Switch When you log into the switch your current directory is the flash directory For a factory default switch the flash directory contains three sub directories and several files It is important to understand the rela tionship of these directories before you load software or edit any of the files The three directories are described here e Certified directory tThis directory contains configuration files that are certified as the default start up files for the switch These are the trusted configura
285. l command 7 12 configuration syntax check 7 8 console port 2 6 copy certified working command 5 22 copy flash synchro command 5 28 copy running config working command 5 17 copy working certified flash synchro command 5 26 cpcommand 5 34 customer login user accounts application examples 9 8 D date 1 39 7 4 Daylight Savings Time see DST defaults login 2 3 NTP 4 2 SNMP 3 2 startup 9 6 switch security 10 2 user accounts 9 2 WebView 11 2 delete command 1 16 DES encryption 3 11 dircommand 1 10 directories certified 1 27 5 3 flash 1 8 managing 5 13 network 1 27 working 1 27 5 3 Directory Contents verify information about 1 35 DNS resolver 2 24 Domain Name Server see DNS resolver DSA key Secure Shell 10 11 DST 1 41 editor vi 7 9 Emergency Restore application examples 5 32 encryption DES 3 11 end user profile command 9 8 9 33 end user profile port list command 9 34 end user profile vlan range command 9 35 errors 7 7 exitcommand 1 24 2 19 F File Configuration verify information about 7 14 file management application examples 1 29 specifications 1 2 files attributes 1 16 boot cfg 5 3 configuration 5 3 image 5 3 names 7 11 permissions 1 16 snapshots 7 10 text 7 9 filters 6 21 traps 3 5 freespace command 1 18 fsck command 1 18 FTP 2 10 FTP client 1 21 2 10 ftp command 1 21 1 22 2 10 2 11 FTP server 1 20 ftp6 command 1 22 H help 6 7 HTTP web browser 2 7 http portcommand 11 3
286. l feature provides a secure mechanism that allows you to log in to a remote switch to execute commands on a remote device and to move files from one device to another Secure Shell provides secure encrypted communications even when your transmission is between two untrusted hosts or over an unsecure network Secure Shell protects against a variety of security risks including the following e IP spoofing e IP source routing e DNS spoofing e Interception of clear text passwords and other data by intermediate hosts e Manipulation of data by users on intermediate hosts Note The OmniSwitch supports Secure Shell Version 2 only Secure Shell Components The OmniSwitch includes both client and server components of the Secure Shell interface and the Secure Shell FTP file transfer protocol SFTP is a subsystem of the Secure Shell protocol All Secure Shell FTP data are encrypted through a Secure Shell channel Since Secure Shell provides a secure session the Secure Shell interface and SFTP are recommended instead of the Telnet program or the FTP protocol for communications over TCP IP for sending file transfers Both Telnet and FTP are available on the OmniSwitch but they do not support encrypted passwords Note Secure Shell may only be used to log into the switch to manage the switch It cannot be used for Layer 2 authentication through the switch page 2 12 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Logging Into the Switc
287. l user use the user password expiration command with the expiration keyword and the desired number of days or an expiration date For example gt user bert password techpubs expiration 5 This command gives user bert a password expiration of five days To set a specific date for password expiration include the date in mm dd yyyy hh mm format For example gt user bert password techpubs expiration 02 19 2003 13 30 This command sets the password expiration to February 19 2003 at 1 30pm the switch will calculate the expiration based on the system date time The system date and system time commands displays the system date and time information For more information on the system date or time see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide Note The expiration will be reset to the global default setting based on the user password expiration command if the user password is changed or the user password expiration command is entered again page 9 20 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Configuring Password Policy Settings Configuring the Password History The password history refers to the number of old passwords for each user account that are saved by the switch This functionality prevents the user from using the same password each time their account pass word is changed For example if the password history is set to 10 and a new password entered by the user matches any of t
288. ld your command syntax one keyword at a time If you do not know the first keyword of the command you need you can use a question mark character at the CLI system prompt The CLI responds by listing command keywords divided into command sets You can find the first keyword for the command you need by referring to the list on your screen The following is a partial display gt WHOAMI WHO VIEW VI VERBOSE USER UPDATE TTY TELNET6 TELNET SYSTEM SWLOG SSH6 SSH SHOW SFTP6 SFTP SESSION RZ RMDIR RM RENAME PWD PROMPT NTP NSLOOKUP NO NEWFS MV MOVE MORE MODIFY MKDIR LS KILL IP INSTALL HISTORY FTP FSCK FREESPACE EXIT DSHELL DIR DELETE DEBUG CP COMMAND LOG CHMOD CD AUTO ATTRIB ALIAS System Service amp File Mgmt Command Set Additional output not shown The command keywords are shown in all capital letters The name of the command set is listed parenthetically below the keywords in initial caps The following table contains the first level commands and their set names as they are listed on the display screen when you enter a single question mark and press Enter Command Set Name Commands System Service amp WHOAML WHO VIEW VI VERBOSE USER UPDATE TTY File Management TELNET6 TELNET SYSTEM SWLOG SSH6 SSH SHOW SFTP6 SFTP SESSION RZ RMDIR RM RENAME PWD PROMPT NTP NSLOOKUP NO NEWFS MOVE MORE MODIFY MKDIR LS KILL IP HISTORY FTP FSCK FREESPACE EXIT DSHELL DIR DELETE DEBUG CP COMMAND LOG CHMOD CD
289. led Enab Disabled Disabl VLAN 12 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enab Disabled Disabl Policy VLAN 13 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enab Disabled Disab m m m VLAN 14 Enabled Inactive Enabled Enab Disabled Disab Table Sort Feature Initial Sort Flip icon OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 11 19 Configuring the Switch With WebView Using WebView E Webview 10 255 73 12 Microsoft Internet Explorer Fie Edt View Favorites Tools Help Qw O 51 2 01 2 2 5 JAG Ss Sort on a VLAN Administration different column 4 Description Admin Status Status Operational Status 1x1 STP Status Authentication VLAN Tag Mobile Port Status Enabled Active Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Active Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Inactive Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Inactive Inactive Inactive Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
290. lem is Invalid entry and the carat indicates where the problem is located in the syntax Here the problem is with the set keyword so the carat is located under set The error message states the nature of the problem that set is an invalid entry To enable IP routing find another command keyword because set is not valid Prefix Recognition Prefix Recognition is a CLI feature that reduces redundant command line entry by storing prefix information for certain network commands When you configure network services you might have to enter the same command prefix multiple times Entering the same prefix multiple times can be cumbersome and prone to error The prefix recognition feature addresses the problem of redundant command entry by allowing the CLI to store commonly used prefix information This prefix information stored by the switch then becomes part of the next CLI command entered The following command families support the prefix recognition feature AAA e Interface Link Aggregation QOS e Spanning Tree e VLAN Management When certain commands are entered from one of these families the CLI retains the prefix information in a memory buffer Then if a valid related command is entered next the CLI assumes the stored prefix is part of the next command In this case you are only required to enter the suffix information for the next command page 6 13 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June
291. les between the TFTP server and client TFTP client functionality on the OmniSwitch is used to download files from or upload files to the TFTP server within a LAN using the tftp command The following is an example of how to start a TFTP session to download a file from a TFTP server gt tftp 10 211 17 1 get source file boot cfg destination file flash working boot cfg ascii When you enter the above command the following actions are performed e Establishes a TFTP session with the TFTP server 10 211 17 1 e Downloads the boot cfg file using the ASCII file transfer mode e Saves the downloaded file contents to the boot cfg file in the working directory of the TFTP client You can specify a path for the specified file and if the file name is specified without a path then the current path flash is used by default If a destination filename is not specified then the source filename is used by default A TFTP client supports two modes of file transfer Binary mode and ASCII mode However files are transferred using the Binary mode by default A TFTP server does not prompt for a user to login and only one active TFTP session is allowed at any point of time Note When downloading a file to the switch the file size must not exceed the available flash space Using Zmodem A Zmodem application has been included with your switch software so that new programs and archives can be uploaded through the switch serial console port There are gene
292. less the text pattern appears alone on a table row In this example the show snmp mib family command is used because it displays a long table of MIB information This example uses the filter option to display only those lines containing the vlan character pattern 1 Use the more command to set the number of displayed lines to 10 and to enable the more mode gt more size 10 gt more To verify your settings enter the following gt show more The more feature is enabled and the number of line is set to 10 2 Enter the show snmp mib family command Ten lines of information are displayed The switch is now in the More mode as indicated at the bottom of the screen gt show snmp mib family MIP ID MIB TABLE NAME FAMILY Se eee et yg SS es See ee es ere i 6145 esmConfTrap NO SNMP ACCESS 6146 alcetherStatsTable interface 6147 esmConfTable interface 6148 ifJackTable interface 7169 dotigPortVlanTable 802 10 7170 qAggregateVlanTable 802 10 7171 qPortVlanTable 802 10 More next screen lt sp gt next line lt cr gt filter pattern lt gt quit lt q gt 3 Type the filter pattern command and the following message automatically appears Enter filter pattern Enter the desired text pattern in this case vlan at the prompt Remember to type the text exactly as it would appear in the CLI table and to type the asterisk character before and after the text The More mode prom
293. lly or dynami cally to any other software Version 1 1 0 Copyright C 2000 2004 All rights reserved Solaris Provided with this product is free software Licensee can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License Copyright C 1992 1993 Jean loup Gailly All rights reserved Internet Protocol Version 6 Copyright C 1982 1986 1990 1991 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit ted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors page A 14 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Software License and Copyright Statements Third Party Licenses and Notices 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software wit
294. location configuration file boot cfg name and location script file name and location FTP SFTP server IP address username and password to connect to FTP SFTP server The TFTP server IP address and instruction filename details are received from the DHCP server by the DHCP client on the OmniSwitch The instruction file is downloaded from the TFTP server and stored in the flash working directory of the switch Note e If an error or failure occurs during the file transfer the transfer process is retried up to three times If file transfer and download are not successful the automatic remote configuration process is halted and the switch is made available remotely using SSH e All contents of the instruction file are stored in the switch log swlog log file as evidence of the last Automatic Remote Configuration download OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 8 13 Download Component Files Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Instruction File Syntax The instruction file is a text file containing the following information Header Contains user information such as switch ID file version and so on Header text is a type of comment Comments Comments provide additional information for better user readability Firmware version and file location These lines are ignored during the remote configuration download process Image files required for firmware upgrade Configuratio
295. locking this port EniSecurityBlockPortLLDP 8 LLDP App blocking this port EniSecurityBlockPortRFP 9 RFP App blocking this port EniSecurityBlockPortLinkMon 10 LinkMon App blocking this port EniSecurityBlockPortLFP 1 1 LFP App blocking this port EniSecurityBlockPortLPSD 12 LPS Discard App blocking this port 178 Reserved 179 Reserved page B 28 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name Objects Family Description 180 alaTestOamTxDoneTrap alaTestOamCon bridge After a configured time interval figTestld this trap is sent to the NMS from alaTestOamCon Generator switch when the test figSourceEnd duration expires point alaTestOamCon figTestIdStatus alaTestOamConfigTestId A unique name to identify the entries in the table alaTestOamConfigSourceEndpoint The the local or transmitting switch For bidirectional test this also iden tifies the analyzer switch alaTestOamConfigTestIdStatus The test status not started running stopped ended 181 alaTestOamRxReadyTrap alaTestOamCon bridge This trap is sent to the NMS once figTestld the switch with Analyzer or alaTestOamCon Loopback Role is ready to figSourceEnd receive test traffic Once this trap point is received the Generator is acti alaTestOamCon vated for generating test traffic figTestIdStatus alaTestOamConfigTestId A unique name to identify the entries in the table alaTestOamConfi
296. lowing example shows use of the who command and a resulting display gt who Session number 0 User name at login Access type console Access port Local IP address 0 0 0 0 Read only rights Read Write rights Read only domains Read only families Read Write domains Read Write families Session number 1 User name admin Access type http Access port NS IP address 123 251 Read only rights Read Write rights Read only domains Read only families Read Write domains Read Write families Session number 3 User name admin Access type telnet Access port NI IP address 123 251 Read only rights Read Write rights Read only domains Read only families Read Write domains Read Write families 0x00000000 0 00000000 0x00000000 0 00000000 None 12 51 0 00000000 0 00000000 Oxffffffff Oxffffffff All 12 61 0x00000000 0 00000000 Oxffffffff Oxffffffff None All The above display indicates that three sessions are currently active on the OmniSwitch Session number 0 always shows the console port whenever that port is active and logged in The other sessions are identi fied by session number user name the type of access port type IP address and user privileges The output definitions are defined in the table on page 6 23 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 22 Multiple User Sessio
297. ly a small subset of that data Commands showing routing tables are a good example to filter information You can specify a filter that identifies the data that are relevant to your search The switch then displays the information you identified This saves you the trouble of scanning long lists of data unnecessarily The filter mode filters unwanted information from a CLI table by displaying only those lines containing a specified text pattern up to 80 characters Once the filter command has been executed the filter mode remains active until you reach the end of the CLI table or until you exit the table by using the q command The filter command is case sensitive When using the slash command type the text exactly as it would appear in the CLI table For additional information about filtering refer to Using a Wildcard to Filter Table Information on page 6 25 page 6 21 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using the CLI Multiple User Sessions Multiple User Sessions Several CLI commands give you information about user sessions that are currently operating on the OmniSwitch including your own session These commands allow you to list the number and types of sessions that are currently running on the switch You can also terminate another session provided you have administrative privileges Listing Other User Sessions The who command displays all users currently logged into the OmniSwitch The fol
298. ly command with the generated file name or the license key and reboot the switch For example gt license apply file flash lmLicense txt 4 To verify the installation use the show license info command 5 To deactivate a license use the license remove command as shown below gt license remove feature gig ni 1 6 temporarly activate a license use the license unlock command as shown below gt license unlock feature gig ni 1 Note For multiple entries of serial numbers MAC addresses and authorization codes use a CSV formatted file and upload the file on to the website A single license file is generated for all the switches Activation or unlock of license can be performed for the first time using the configuration file For any subsequent unlocks the boot cfg file must be removed and the switch must be rebooted Once the license is applied it is written to the EEPROM and the license file is no longer needed page 1 36 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files Installing Software Licenses Licensed Features License Features Installation Notes Metro Ethernet service Switch Stack must rebooted after install OAM 802 lag Y 1731 ing licenses 802 3ah CPE test head Allows SMB models to run Metro fea 8032 tures IPMC VLAN Dying Gasp Metro licenses are installed on the units SAA in a stack only if the keys for all the units MVR are available all units must have a metro
299. mBindRuleEthertype Ethertype value for generic Ethertype or snap rule This value has no meaning for vProtoRuleProtoClass set to values other than 9 or 11 gmBindRuleDsapSsap DSAP and SSAP values for generic DSAP SSAP and SNAP rules This value has no meaning for vProtoRuleProtoClass set to values other than 10 43 unused N A N A 44 unused N A N A 45 unused N A N A 46 unused N A N A 47 pethPsePortOnOff pethPsePortDe module Indicates if power inline port is tectionStatus or is not delivering power to the a power inline device pethPsePortDetectionStatus Describes the operational status of the port PD detection A value of disabled 1 indicates that the PSE State diagram is in the state IDLE A value of searching 2 indicates that the PSE State diagram is in the state DETECTION CLASSIFICATION SIGNATURE_INVALID or BACKOFF A value of deliveringPower 4 indicates that the PSE State diagram is in the state POWER_UP POWER_ON or POWER_OFF A value of fault 5 indicates that the PSE State diagram is in the state TEST_ERROR or the state IDLE due to the variable error condition Faults detected are vendor specific A value of test 7 indicates that the PSE State diagram is in the state TEST_MODE A value of denyLowPriority 8 indicates that the port was disabled by the power management system in order to keep active higher priority ports page B 12 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 SNMP
300. mRxOpti from previous threshold violation calPower for a port represented by ifIndex It also provides the current real time value of SFP XFP SFP Rx optical power ifIndex The interface index ddmNotificationType the trap type for monitored DDM parameters clearViolation 1 highAlarm 2 highWarning 3 lowWarning 4 lowAlarm 5 ddmRxOpticalPower The current Received Optical Power of the SFP XFP in 10s of milli Watts mW 148 alaLbdStateChangeToShutdown ifIndex port This trap is sent when an SFP ddmNotification XFP SFP Rx optical power has Type crossed any threshold or reverted ddmRxOpti from previous threshold violation calPower for a port represented by ifIndex It also provides the current real time value of SFP XFP SFP Rx optical power ifIndex tThe interface index ddmNotificationType the trap type for monitored DDM parameters clearViolation 1 highAlarm 2 high Warning 3 lowWarning 4 lowAlarm 5 ddmRxOpticalPower The current Received Optical Power of the SFP XFP in 10s of milli Watts mW 149 alaLbdStateChangeForClearViola ifIndex port This trap is sent when an SFP tionA ddmNotification XFP SFP Rx optical power has Type crossed any threshold or reverted ddmRxOpti from previous threshold violation calPower for a port represented by ifIndex It also provides the current real time value of SFP XFP SFP Rx optical power ifIndex tThe interface index ddmNotificationType t
301. mand described in the section Copying the Running Configuration to the Working Directory on page 5 16 The switch is rebooted from the working directory by using the reload working command When a reload working command is entered the switch prohibits a takeover from the secondary CMM Switch functions are suspended until the boot process is complete If you decide against using the new software booted from the working directory the switch can revert to the software stored in the certified directory by using the copy certified working command as described in Copying the Certified Directory to the Working Directory on page 5 22 or by using the reload command as described in Rebooting the Switch on page 5 13 page 5 18 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant Note If the switch is rebooted before using the copy certified working command the switch runs from the certified directory as the working and certified directories are not the same This behavior is described in Where is the Switch Running From on page 5 4 To reboot the switch from the working directory enter the following command at the prompt along with a timeout period in minutes as shown gt reload working rollback timeout 5 At the end of the timeout period the switch reboots again normally as if a reload command had been issued Note I
302. message is encrypted using the DES encryption scheme The encryption key is derived from the authentication key which is used to decrypt the PDU on the switch s side Configuring Encryption and Authentication Setting Authentication for a User Account User account names and passwords must be a minimum of 8 characters in length when authentication and encryption are used The following syntax sets authentication type MD5 with DES encryption for user account user_auth1 gt user user _authl password md5 des SNMP authentication types SHA and MDS are available with and without type DES encryption The sha md5 sha des and md5 des keywords can be used in the command syntax Note Optional To verify the authentication and encryption type for the user enter the show user command The following is a partial display gt show user User name user_authl Read right 0x0000a200 0 00000000 Write right 0x00000000 0 00000000 Read for domains Read for families snmp chassis interface Write for domains None Snmp authentication MD5 Snmp encryption DES The user s SNMP authentication is shown as MD5 and SNMP encryption is shown as DES OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 3 11 Using SNMP For Switch Security Using SNMP Setting SNMP Security By default the switch is set to privacy all which means the switch accepts only authenticated and encrypted v3 Sets
303. mib family command The MIB table identifies the MIP identification number the MIB table name and the command family If a command family is not valid for the entire MIB table the command family is displayed on a per object basis For a list and description of system MIBs refer to Industry Standard MIBs on page 3 17 and Enter prise Proprietary MIBs on page 3 21 For a list and description of traps refer to the Using SNMP For Switch Security on page 3 10 The following is a partial display gt show snmp mib family MIP ID MIB TABLE NAME FAMILY a a Ns a E 6145 esmConfTrap NO SNMP ACCESS 6146 alcetherStatsTable interface 6147 dot3ControlTable interface 6148 dot3PauseTable interface 6149 dot3StatsTable interface 6150 esmConfTable interface 77828 healthModuleTable rmon 77829 healthPortTable rmon 77830 healthThreshInfo rmon 87042 vacmContextTable snmp 87043 vacmSecurityToGroupTable snmp 87044 vacmAccessTable snmp 87045 vacmViewTreeFamilyTable snmp MIB Table Description If the user account has no restrictions the display shown by the show snmp mib family command can be very long For documentation purposes a partial list is shown above and three entry examples are defined e The first entry in the MIB Table shows an MIP identification number of 6145 The MIB table name is esmConfTrap This table is found in the AlcatelIND1Port MIB which defines managed ob
304. mmand log command This feature allows users to record up to 100 of the most recent commands entered through Telnet Secure Shell and console sessions In addition to a list of commands entered the results of each command entry are recorded Results include information such as whether a command was executed successfully or whether a syntax or configuration error occurred Note The command history feature differs from the command logging feature in that command history buffers up to 30 of the most recent commands The command information is not written to a separate log file Also the command history feature includes only general keyword syntax that is it does not record full syntax date and time session IP address and entry results For more information on command history refer to page 6 15 Refer to the sections below for more information on configuring and using CLI command logging For detailed information related to command logging commands refer to the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Enabling Command Logging By default command logging is disabled To enable command logging on the switch enter the following command gt command log enable When command logging is enabled through the command log enable syntax a file called command log is automatically created in the flash directory of the switch Once enabled configuration commands entered on the command line are recorded to this file until command logging is dis
305. mniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 5 Overview of User Accounts Managing Switch User Accounts Startup Defaults By default a single user management account is available at the first bootup of the switch This account has the following user name and password e user name admin e password switch Initially the admin user can only be authorized on the switch through the console port Management access through any other interface is disabled The Authenticated Switch Access commands can be used to enable access through other interfaces or services such as Telnet HTTP However SNMP access is not allowed for the admin user Also the admin user cannot be modified except for the password Password expiration for the admin user is disabled by default See Configuring Password Expiration on page 9 20 In addition another account default is available on the switch for default settings only this account cannot be used to log into the switch It is used to store and modify default settings for new users Note Up to 64 users can be configured in the local switch database To set up a user account use the user command which specifies the following e Password The password is required for new users or when modifying a user s SNMP access The password will not appear in an ASCII configuration file created via the snapshot command e Privileges The user s read and write access to command domains
306. mum poll time 4 10 preferred server 4 11 Synchronization Tests 4 10 version number 4 11 ntp server command 4 3 4 10 P partition management 3 13 password command 9 14 passwords expiration 9 20 global settings 9 10 minimum length 9 17 user configured 9 14 pre_banner txt file 2 22 Prefix Recognition 6 13 application examples 6 14 prefixes 6 13 primary CMM swapping with the secondary 5 29 synchronizing with secondary 5 27 prompt 6 15 6 19 prompt prefix command 6 15 pwd command 1 8 R RADIUS accounting servers Authenticated Switch Access 10 12 RADIUS servers for switch security 10 4 RAM 5 3 rcp command 1 17 reboot cancelling 5 14 5 20 5 25 checking status 5 15 primary 5 13 5 25 scheduling 5 14 5 25 secondary 5 25 working directory 5 18 5 26 reload cancel command 5 14 5 20 reload command 5 14 5 25 reload secondary command 5 25 reload working command 5 18 rls command 1 17 rmdir command 1 13 rrm command 1 17 running configuration 5 3 5 4 copying to working directory 5 16 rz command 1 26 S screen display 6 19 prompt 6 15 6 19 secondary CMM managing files 1 17 swapping with the primary 5 29 synchronizing with primary 5 27 Secure Shell 2 6 2 12 10 9 algorithms 2 15 DSA key 10 11 key exchange 2 15 managing the switch 10 11 Index 3 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Secure Socket Layer WebView 11 4 security SNMP 3 10 session banner command 2 21 session login
307. n Last Event 198 206 181 139 client server no 4 0 2 6 64 seconds 10 1024 seconds 0 016 seconds 180 232 seconds 7 945 seconds 0 026 14 209 81 9 7 configured 1742 seconds 1 0 1680 seconds reachable rejected peer changed to reachable 4 You can check the list of servers associated with this client using the show ntp client server list command as shown gt show ntp client server list IP Address Ver Key st Delay Offset Disp 1235 6 0 2 0 06 0 673 0 017 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 4 3 NTP Quick Steps Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP 5 You check the client configuration using the show ntp client command as shown gt show ntp client Current time THU SEP 15 2005 17 44 54 UTC Last NTP update THU SEP 15 2005 17 30 54 Client mode enabled Broadcast client mode disabled Broadcast delay microseconds 4000 page 4 4 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP NTP Overview NTP Overview Network Time Protocol NTP is used to synchronize the time of a computer client or server to another server or reference time source such as a radio or satellite receiver It provides client time accu
308. n algorithm is used for authenticating SNMP PDU for the user e MD5 The MDS authentication algorithm is used for authenticating SNMP PDU for the user SHA and DES The SHA authentication algorithm and DES encryption standard is used for authenti cating and encrypting SNMP PDU for the user MD5 DES The MDS authentication algorithm and the DES encryption standard is used for authenticating and encrypting SNMP PDU for the user The user s level of SNMP authentication is superseded by the SNMP version allowed globally on the switch By default the switch allows all SNMP requests Use the snmp security command to change the SNMP security level on the switch Note At least one user with SHA MD5 authentication and or DES encryption must be configured on the switch for SNMPv3 communication with OmniVista The community string carried in the SNMP PDU identifies the request as an SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 request The way the community string is handled on the switch is determined by the setting of the snmp community map mode command If the community map mode is enabled the community string is checked against the community strings database populated by the snmp community map command If the community map mode is disabled then the community string value is checked against the user data base In either case if the check fails the request is dropped For more information about configuring SNMP globally on the switch see Chapter 3 U
309. n deleted from tables contained in IldpRemoteSystemsData and IldpExtensions objects IidptatsRemTablesDrops The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MSAP could not be entered into tables contained in IldpRemoteSystemsData and IldpExtensions objects because IidptatsRemTablesA geouts The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular has been deleted from tables contained in lldpRemoteSystemsData and IldpExtensions objects because This trap is sent when there is a possiblity of duplicate a MAC address in the network 96 alaPimNeighborLoss alaPimNeigh ipmr borUpTime This trap is sent when an adja cency with a neighbor is lost The notification is generated when the neighbor timer expires and the router has no other neigh bors on the same interface with the same IP version and a lower IP address than itself The notification is generated whenever the PIM NeighborLoss Count is incremented subject to the rate limit specified by the PIM Neighbor Loss Notification Period alaPimNeighborUpTime The time since this PIM neighbor last became a neighbor of the local router OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 17 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information No Trap Name Objects Family Description 97 alaPimInvalidRegister alaPimGroup ipmr This trap is sent when an invalid MappingPim PIM Register message is Mode re
310. n file download failure Some of the image files are not downloaded File location errors occur when the corresponding files are not available in the locations as mentioned in the instruction file Unable to download script file Script File Errors The different types of script file errors and the troubleshooting techniques for such errors are as follows e If any script file command fails it is logged in to a file err is the script file name in the flash directory and the remaining commands are implemented In such an instance check the err file The script file commands can be manually implemented and debugged in the order specified in the script file e If the script file name mentioned in the instruction file is incorrect then an error is logged in the switch log or swlog log file In such an instance check the swlog log file The script file can be downloaded manually from the FTP SFTP servers and implemented onto the OmniSwitch OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 8 25 Troubleshooting Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Error Description Table The following error description table provides information about some of the common script file errors that occur during Automatic Remote Configuration Error Type Error Description Script File Download of Script file from Script file cannot be downloaded from the Download Primary Server Failed primary server S
311. n file name and location The file containing the configuration for the switch this file is saved as the boot cfg file in the flash working directory Debug file name and location The AlcatelDebug cfg containing additional debug configuration commands Script file name and location The script file containing commands to be implemented on the switch Primary file server address protocol username The primary file server from which the required files are downloaded The specified protocol and username is used for the download Secondary file server address protocol username Example The secondary file server from which the required files are downloaded if the connection to primary file server fails The specified protocol and username are used for the download The instruction file has the Keyword Value format as shown below Alcatel Lucent OmniSwitch 086250 Instruction file version 1 2 1 Firmware version Firmware version 0S_ 6 6 3 355 RO1 Firmware location home ftpboot firmware Configuration file Config filename boot_0S6250 cfg Config location home ftpboot config Debug file Script File Debug filename AlcatelDebug cfg Debug location home ftpboot debug Script filename 0S6250 script txt Script location home ftpboot scripts Primary file Server Primary server 10 200 100 112 Primary protocol FTP Primary user admin Secondary file Server Secondary server 10 2
312. n managing the directory structure of a stack with redundant CMM software is described in Managing Redundancy in a Stack and CMM on page 5 25 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 1 CMM Specifications Managing CMM Directory Content CMM Specifications Size of Flash Memory 128 Megabytes Size of RAM Memory 256 Megabytes Maximum Length of File Names 32 Characters Maximum Length of Directory Names 32 Characters Default Boot Directory Certified USB Flash Drive Specifications Platforms Supported OmniSwitch 6250 6450 USB Flash Drive Support Alcatel Lucent Certified USB Flash Drive Automatic Software Upgrade Supported Disaster Recovery Supported Note The format of the Alcatel Lucent Certified USB Flash Drive must be FAT16 To avoid file corruption issues the USB Drive must be stopped before removing from a PC Directory names are case sensitive and must be lower case page 5 2 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content CMM Files CMM Files The management of a stack or single switch is controlled by three types of files e Image files which are proprietary code developed by Alcatel Lucent to run the hardware These files are not configurable by the user but can be upgraded from one release to the next These files are also known as archive files as they are really the repository of several smaller files grouped under
313. n or you may move them to another directory Note The default error file limit is one file Unless you set the error file limit to a higher number any subsequent error file will cause any existing error file to be overwritten Syntax Checking The configuration syntax check command is used to detect potential syntax errors contained in a configuration file before it is applied to the switch It is recommended that you check all configuration files for syntax errors before applying them to your switch To run a syntax check on a configuration file use the configuration syntax check command For example gt configuration syntax check asc 1 snap Errors 3 Log file name check 1 1 In this example the proposed 1 configuration file contains three errors As with the configuration apply command an error file err is automatically generated by the switch whenever an error is detected By default this file is placed in the root flash directory Note The syntax mac alloc is automatically included in many snapshot files e g configuration snapshot all All mac alloc related syntax is valid during switch boot up only that is it cannot be applied while the switch is in run time operation Because snapshot files are commonly used as configuration files syntax checks may detect mac alloc syntax and issue an error along with a generated err file This is a valid switch function and does not repr
314. nabling Disabling SSL Force SSL is disabled by default Use the http ss command to enable Force SSL on the switch For exam ple gt http ssl Use the no http ssl command to disable Force SSL on the switch Use the show http command to view WebView status As an alternative you can use the https keyword instead of the http keyword to enable Force SSL For example gt https ssl When using this format of the command use the no https server command to disable Force SSL on the switch Changing the HTTPS Port The default secure HTTP HTTPS port is 443 the well known port number for SSL You can change the port to a number in the range 0 to 65535 using the https port command Well known port numbers which are in the range 0 to 1023 cannot be configured Note All WebView sessions must be terminated before the switch accepts the command For example gt https port 2500 This command changes the secure HTTP port to 2500 To restore an HTTPS port to its default value use the default keyword as shown below gt https port default page 11 4 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using WebView Quick Steps for Setting Up WebView Quick Steps for Setting Up WebView 1 Make sure you have an Ethernet connection to the switch 2 Configure switch management for HTTP using the aaa authentication command Enter the command the port type that you are authenticating http and the name of the LDAP RAD
315. nded View to change to the expanded view From the expanded view click on Summary View to return to the summary view For example 2 Webview 10 255 73 12 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit Favorites Tools Q 0 18 Alp O I Fa JAG DB Address http 10 255 73 12 web content login html Go Links H Z WebView lt gt se 9 vxTarget 10 255 73 12 ration Help About Telnet Log Out 1 VLAN Mgmt ven SVLAN Description Admin Status Operational Status Flat STP Status 1x1 STP Status Authentication IP a Spanning Tree T a 1 VLAN 1 Enabled Active Enabled Enabled Disabled Off Click to 4 2 4 73 VLAN 73 Enabled Active Enabled Enabled Disabled On expand the 21 table Aggregation Expanded View fai 2 Admin Status Flat STP Status 1x1 STP Status Port Security Add Add SVLAN Enabled 7 Enabled Enabled Modify Delete Refresh Help Apply Apply Apply 2 Ee ee Eitimesincelastrefreshi0 000003 0 fag terme 7 Table View Feature Summary View OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 11 17 Configuring the Switch With WebView Using WebView Click to return to Summary view Table File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Qa O 12 Favortes
316. ne 2013 SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name Objects Family Description 60 InkaggAggUp trapInkaggId linkaggre Indicates the link aggregate is trapInkaggPortI gation active This trap is sent when any fIndex one port of the link aggregate trapInkaggId Index value of the Link Aggregate group trapInkaggIfIndex Port of the Link Aggregate group group goes into the attached state 61 InkaggAggDown trapInkaggId linkaggre traplnkaggPortl gation fIndex trapInkaggId lIndex value of the Link Aggregate group trapInkaggIfIndex Port of the Link Aggregate group Indicates the link aggregate is not active This trap is sent when all ports of the link aggregate group are no longer in the attached state 62 InkaggPortJoin traplnkaggId linkaggre traplnkaggPortl gation fIndex trapInkaggId Index value of the Link Aggregate group trapInkaggIfIndex Port of the Link Aggregate group This trap is sent when any given port of the link aggregate group goes to the attached state 63 InkaggPortLeave trapInkaggId linkaggre traplInkaggPortl gation fIndex trapInkaggId Index value of the Link Aggregate group trapInkaggIfIndex Port of the Link Aggregate group 64 InkaggPortRemove trapInkaggId linkaggre trapInkaggPortI gation fIndex trapInkaggId Index value of the Link Aggregate group trapInkaggIfIndex Port of the Link Aggregate group 65 pktDrop pktDropType IP pktDr
317. ne 2013 SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name Objects Family Description 21 pimNeighborLoss pimNeigh ipmr Signifies the loss of adjacency borIfIndex with a neighbor device This trap is generated when the neighbor time expires and the switch has no other neighbors on the same interface with a lower IP address than itself pimNeighborIfIndex The value of ifIndex for the interface used to reach this PIM neighbor 24 risingAlarm alarmIndex rmon An Ethernet statistical variable alarm Variable has exceeded its rising thresh alarmSample old The variable s rising thresh Type old and whether it will issue an alarm Value SNMP trap for this condition are alarmRisingTh configured by an NMS station reshold running RMON alarmIndex An index that uniquely identifies an entry in the alarm table Each such entry defines a diagnostic sample at a particular interval for an object on the device alarmVariable The object identifier of the particular variable to be sampled Only variables that resolve to an ASN 1 primitive type of INTEGER INTEGER Integer32 Counter32 Counter64 Gauge or TimeTicks may be sampled alarmSampleType The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds If the value of this object is absolute Value 1 the value of the selected variable will be compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval If the val
318. ne 2013 page xv Related Documentation About This Guide Related Documentation User manuals can be downloaded at http enterprise alcatel lucent com dept UserGuides amp page Portal The following are the titles and descriptions of all the related OmniSwitch 6250 6450 user manuals OmniSwitch 6250 Getting Started Guide Describes the hardware and software procedures for getting an OmniSwitch 6250 switch up and running Also provides information on fundamental aspects of OmniSwitch software and stacking architecture OmniSwitch 6250 Hardware Users Guide Complete technical specifications and procedures for all OmniSwitch 6250 chassis power supplies and fans Also includes comprehensive information on assembling and managing stacked configura tions OmniSwitch 6450 Getting Started Guide Describes the hardware and software procedures for getting an OmniSwitch 6450 switch up and running Also provides information on fundamental aspects of OmniSwitch software and stacking architecture OmniSwitch 6450 Hardware Users Guide Complete technical specifications and procedures for all OmniSwitch 6450 chassis power supplies and fans Also includes comprehensive information on assembling and managing stacked configura tions OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Complete reference to all CLI commands supported on the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Includes syntax definitions default values examples usage guidelines and CLI to MIB
319. nfigured on the OmniSwitch The OmniSwitch obtains IP address information TFTP server address instruction file name and location from the DHCP server through the DHCP client 6 The OmniSwitch downloads the instruction file from the TFTP server The instruction file contains the file names and file locations of the configuration image and script files 7 The OmniSwitch downloads the image files from the FTP SFTP server if necessary 8 The OmniSwitch downloads the configuration file from the FTP SFTP server if available and saves it as the boot cfg file in the flash working directory If no script file is downloaded the switch reboots applying the downloaded configuration file and the automatic configuration process is complete 9 The OmniSwitch downloads the script file if available from the FTP SFTP server and runs the commands in the script file Note e If the script file is not specified in the instruction file or if it is not properly downloaded then the Remote Configuration Manager software automatically initiates a reload working no roliback timeout command after firmware or bootup configuration files are downloaded e Ifa write memory command is used in the script file then it overwrites the boot cfg file Hence if the script file is downloaded along with the bootup configuration file then the script file must not contain the write memory command e Ifa boot cfg is already present in the working directory of the switch
320. nformation such as full command syntax login user name entry date and time session IP address and entry results For more information on command logging refer to Logging CLI Commands and Entry Results on page 6 17 You can display the commands in a numbered list by using the show history command The following is a sample list gt show history show cmm show fan show sensor show temp show arp clear arp show ip config ip helper max hops 5 9 ip bgp pn 10 show ip bgp 11 show history WN HP In the example above the show history command is listed last because it is the command that was executed most recently page 6 15 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using the CLI CLI Services You can recall commands shown in the history list by using the exclamation point character also called bang To recall the command shown in the history list at number 4 enter 4 bang 4 The CLI responds by printing the number four command at the prompt Using the history list of commands above the following would display gt 14 gt show temp You can recall the last command in the history list by issuing the bang bang syntax The CLI responds by printing the last command in the history list show history at the prompt as shown here gt gt show history Note When you use n or to recall a command in the history list press the Enter key to execute the
321. ng Switch User Accounts Setting Up Port Ranges in a Profile To set up port ranges for a profile enter the end user profile port list command with the relevant profile name and the desired slots ports For example gt end user profile Profile3 port list 2 3 1 4 In this example the port list includes all ports in slot 2 and ports 1 through 4 on slot 3 A user with this profile will be able to manage these ports depending on the command areas specified in the profile To remove a port list use the no form of the command with the relevant slot number s All ports in the port list on a given slot will be removed For example gt end user profile Profile3 no port list 3 In this example all ports on slot 3 are removed from the profile page 9 34 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Setting Up End User Profiles Setting Up VLAN Ranges in a Profile To set up VLAN ranges for a profile enter the end user profile vlan range command with the relevant profile name and the desired VLAN range For example gt end user profile Profile3 vlan range 2 4 7 8 In this example the VLAN range includes VLANs 2 3 4 7 and 8 A user with this profile will be able to manage these VLANs depending on the command areas specified in the profile To remove a VLAN range from a profile use the no form of the command and the VLAN ID of the start of the range to be removed For example
322. ng configuration to the working directory page 5 16 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant To save the running configuration to the working directory enter the copy running config working or write memory or copy flash syncro command at the prompt A trap is raised to enforce a poll whenever a configuration file is saved The configuration changes that are not committed are not detected by the switch until these commands are applied as follows gt copy running config working or gt write memory The preceeding commands perform the same function When these commands are issued the running configuration with all modifications made is saved to a file called boot cfg in the working directory Note This command does not function if the switch is running from the certified directory See Where is the Switch Running From on page 5 4 for an explanation The copy running config working and write memory commands are described in detail in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Note The saved boot cfg file is overwritten if the takeover command is executed after the copy running config working or write memory commands in an OmniSwitch set up with redundant CMMs Note It is important to certify the working directory and synchronize the stack as soon as the validity of the working directory software is established Stacks booted
323. ngs up the Save Configuration Screen Click Apply to save the switch s running configuration for the next startup e Help Brings up general WebView Help Specific help pages also available on each configuration page e About Provides basic WebView product information e Telnet Brings up a Telnet session window through which you can access the switch for CLI configu ration e Log Out Logs the user out of the switch and ends the user session After logout the login screen appears The user can log back into the switch or just close the login screen Toolbar Switch configuration is divided into configuration groups in the toolbar for example Physical Layer 2 and so on Under each configuration group are switch features identified by a name and an icon For detailed configuration information on each feature see other chapters in this guide the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide Help pages are also available in WebView page 11 6 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using WebView WebView Overview Feature Options Feature configuration options are displayed as drop down menus at the top of each feature page For more information on using the drop down menus see Configuration Page on page 11 12 View Configuration Area The View Configuration area is where switch configuration information is displayed and where configura tion pages appear After logging into WebVie
324. niSwitch TFTP Server Stores the instruction file the config file and firmware FTP SFTP Server Stores the firmware and configuration for secure access Basic Network Components for Automatic Remote Configuration Download OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 8 5 Overview Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Network Components The network components required for the Automatic Remote Configuration download process are e DHCP server mandatory e TFTP file server mandatory e Primary FTP SFTP server mandatory e Secondary server optional e Management Switch only required for Nearest Edge Mode Information Provided by DHCP Server When the network interfaces or ports on the switch are ready a DHCP client is automatically configured on any available tagged or untagged VLAN For details on the DHCP client auto configuration see DHCP Client Auto Configuration Process on page 8 18 The following information is acquired from the DHCP server after a connection is established e IP address of the Network Gateway or Router e TFTP file server address e Instruction file name and location e Dynamic IP address for the OmniSwitch valid only for initial bootup process Information Provided by Instruction File The TFTP server address information is received from the DHCP server The OmniSwitch downloads the instruction file from the TFTP server The instruc
325. nia i A 10 Carnegie Mellon University esceseesccsccsseceseceeeeceseceseceaeceeceseceseeeseeeaeeaeees A 10 E tied eves E E E A 10 H 5 11 Agrana irie nee ari A 11 Fe RSA SECUI Ins ee eai e A 11 K Sun Microsystems Ines A 12 1 Wind River Systems Inc cs cscs alos anne ian eh AAS A 12 M Network Time Protocol Version 4 00 ceeeesceseceseeeeeseceseceaeceeceaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeneees A 12 N 13 O GNU ZIP ecstatic cel a anes ee ee an Gee eave A 13 P FREESCALE SEMICONDUCTOR SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT 13 Boost C Libraries 14 14 14 Internet Protocol Version 6 o ces cesesceseceseceseeeceseeeseeesecneeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeenees A 14 U CURSES orcii ioina aie avian aia A 15 2 ees na Sion 15 We Boost Software License 15 AOpen DAP ais rea tates Reena 15 BTL MA Ps 16 A Univers oE anaoa A 16 AA Free OpenBsD leaden sen aa iaeia aria ardiei A 16 SNMP Trap Information
326. nowledge on how fundamental software features are implemented in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 switches benefits from the material in this configuration guide When Should I Read this Manual Read this guide as soon as your switch is up and running and you are ready to familiarize yourself with basic software functions You should have already stepped through the first log in procedures and read the brief software overviews in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Getting Started Guide You should have already set up a switch password and be familiar with the very basics of the switch soft ware This manual helps you understand the directory structure the Command Line Interface CLI configuration files basic security features and basic administrative functions of the switch The features and procedures in this guide will help form a foundation that will allow you to configure more advanced switching features later What is this Manual This configuration guide includes information about the following features e Basic switch administrative features such as file editing utilities procedures for loading new software and setting up system information name of switch date time e Configurations files including snapshots off line configuration time activated file download e The CLI including on line configuration command building help syntax error checking and line edit ing e Basic security features such as switch access control and c
327. ns Using the CLI Listing Your Current Login Session To list information about your current login session use the who command and identify your login by your IP address or enter the whoami command The following is displayed gt whoami Session number 4 User name admin Access type telnet Access port NI IP address 148 211 11 02 Read only domains Read only families Read Write domains Read Write families End User profile None All This display indicates that the user is currently logged in as session number 4 under the user name admin using a Telnet interface from the IP address of 148 211 11 02 Session Number User name Access type Access port Ip Address Read only domains Read only families Read Write domains Read Write families The session number assigned to the user User name Type of access protocol used to connect to the switch Switch port used for access during this session User IP address The command domains available with the read only access of the user See the table beginning on page 6 24 for a listing of valid domains The command families available with the read only access of the user See the table beginning on page 6 24 for a listing of valid families The command domains available with the read write access of the user See the table beginning on page 6 24 for a listing of valid domains The command families available with the read write acces
328. nse having the VSI alcatel a4400 0 e If DHCPACK from desired DHCP server is received it gets applied immediately e If DHCPACK from undesired DHCP server is received and DHCP client is created on default VLAN 1 DHCP client stores this response if it is the first response otherwise response gets declined This stored response is applied only if the desired OXO DHCP response is not found within 30 secs window e If DHCPACK is received in 30 secs window RCL will continue its process The DHCP client on VLAN 1 is deleted and that on VLAN 127 gets created this continues until the desired DHCP response is received OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 8 19 DHCP Client Preference to OXO DHCP Server Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download e If the first DHCPACK is received after 30 secs window i e DHCPACK is received while DHCP client is created on VLAN 127 this response gets applied immediately without waiting for OXO DHCP response e If any VLAN ID is received from LLDP in this 30 secs window and response from DHCP is not received then DHCP client on VLAN 1 or on VLAN 127 is deleted and DHCP client gets created on management VLAN received from LLDP In this case if any DHCPACK response is stored to apply after 30 secs window then this response will be ignored Note The OXO DHCP should be active and connected to the switch during boot up for first load The Remote C
329. nt referred to as the Warranty Period be free from defects in material and workmanship Alcatel Lucent further warrants for Licensee benefit alone that during the Warranty Period the Licensed Files shall operate substantially in accordance with the functional specifications in the User Guide If during the Warranty Period a defect in the Licensed Files appears Licensee may return the Licensed Files to Alcatel Lucent for either replacement or if so elected by Alcatel Lucent refund of amounts paid by Licensee under this License Agreement EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE THE LICENSED MATERIALS ARE LICENSED AS IS AND ALCATEL LUCENT AND ITS LICENSORS DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUD ING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO LICENSEE THIS WARRANTY GIVES THE LICENSEE SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS LICENSEE MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE 6 Limitation of Liability Alcatel Lucent s cumulative liability to Licensee or any other party for any loss or damages resulting from any claims demands or actions arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall not exceed the license fee paid to Alcatel Lucent for the Licensed Materials INNO EVENT SHALL ALCATEL LUCENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSE
330. nt on LLDP tagged management VLAN facilitates the installation of OmniSwitch in such networks OmniSwitch creates a DHCP Client interface on e the default untagged VLAN 1 and then on tagged VLAN 127 alternatively Or e the Management VLAN being advertised in the LLDP PDUs sent by the Management Switch configured in Nearest Edge Mode See the Nearest Edge Mode Operation on page 8 21 for additional information Note OmniSwitch must have at least one port with connectivity to the DHCP server through Management VLAN page 8 18 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download DHCP Client Preference to OXO DHCP Server If OmniSwitch receives LLDP PDUs with VLAN and port information from a Management switch in nearest edge mode then the DHCP client interface is moved to user defined LLDP management VLAN on the network The detailed process of DHCP client auto configuration on OmniSwitch is as follows 1 At boot up the initial DHCP client starts with untagged VLAN 1 The DHCP client waits for 30 seconds for a DHCP lease 2 If the lease is not obtained even after 30 seconds the DHCP client is stopped on the untagged VLAN 1 and DHCP client is started on tagged VLAN 127 The DHCP client on tagged VLAN 127 waits for 30 seconds for a DHCP lease 3 Ifthe DHCP client does not get the lease in 30 seconds DHCP client moves back to untagged VLAN 1 and this process continues until
331. ntercept any data you send to the server We recommend that you close this webpage and do not continue to this website Click here to close this webpage Continue to this website not recommended More information Click Continue to this website not recommended to continue the browser session A certificate error message similar to the one shown below appears at the top of the WebView browser window At this point you can decide to do one of the following e Ignore the certificate error message and log into WebView By doing so the certificate error message always appears at the top of every WebView browser window or e Follow the steps below to install the Alcatel Lucent self signed certificate in the Trusted Root Certifi cation Authorities store This clears the certificate error message 1 Click on the certificate error message A Certificate Invalid popup window displays 2 Click on View Certificates at the bottom of the Certificate Invalid popup window A Certifi cate Information popup window displays 3 Click on the Install Certificate button at the bottom of the Certificate Information window This step launches the Certificate Import Wizard 4 Click the Next button to continue with the Certificate Import Wizard process The Certificate Store window displays 5 Select Place all certificates in the following store and click on the Browse bu
332. o Using Zmodem on page 1 25 gt ftp 10 255 11 101 220 Connecting to 10 255 11 101 connected Cosmo Windows FTP server ready Name 1 Note You can only use a host name instead of an IP address if the DNS resolver has been configured and enabled If not you must specify an IP address You can use the ftp6 command followed by the IPv6 address or hostname of the FTPv6 server to start an FTPv6 session over an IPv6 environment For example gt ftp6 fe80 a00 20ff fea8 8961 intf1 220 Connecting to fe80 a00 20ff fea8 8961 connected Cosmo Windows FTP server ready Name Myhost1 Note FTPv6 sessions are supported It is mandatory to specify the name of the particular IPv6 interface if the FTPv6 server has been specified using its link local address 4 Enter a valid user name and password for the host you specified with the ftp command A screen similar to the following is displayed Name d Jsmith 331 Password required for Jsmith Password 230 User Jsmith logged in 5 Use the FTP put command to transfer the file from your switch to the host as shown here ftp gt put rrtest txt The following will be displayed 200 Port set okay 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection Transferred 20 octets in 1 seconds 226 Transfer complete ftp gt 6 To exit the switch FTP client mode use the quit FTP command Your current directory on the switch is flash working which is the location
333. o commands display the contents of the current directory If you use the Is or dir command while logged into the flash file directory of the switch as shown on page 1 8 the following will be displayed gt dir Listing Directory flash drw 512 Oct 25 14 39 drw 512 Jul 15 14 59 drw 512 Oct 25 14 17 rw 321 Oct 25 14 39 rw 163258 Oct 2 11 04 rw 11 Jul 30 14 09 rw 693 Oct 9 11 55 rw O Oct 28 11 14 rw 64000 Oct 29 09 12 9467904 bytes free certified NETWORK WORKING boot params cs_system pmd boot slot cfg boot cfg 1l err swlogl log swlog2 log If you specify a path as part of the Is or dir command your screen will list the contents of the directory at the specified path gt ls flash certified Listing Directory flash certified drw 2048 Oct 12 11 16 drw 2048 Oct 12 15 58 rw 2636 Oct 12 11 16 boot cfg rw 860086 Oct 26 11 07 Kos img rw 123574 Oct 14 10 54 Ksecu img rw 123574 Oct 14 10 54 Krelease img If you use the ls or dir command while logged into the flash file directory the following will be displayed gt dir Listing Directory flash drw 1024 Nov 8 08 30 WORKING rw 276 Nov 8 09 59 boot params rw 4890749 Oct 21 21 43 cs_system pmd rw 256 Nov 8 09 57 random seed rw 64000 Nov 8 09 59 swlogl log drw 1024 Nov 8 08 31 certified drw 1024 Nov 8 08 29 NETWORK drw 1024 Nov 8 08 29 SWITCH rw 222 Nov 8 09 59 boot cfg l err rw 524288 Oct 31 10 51 u boot bin rw 8344
334. o create a VLAN This VLAN will be given the ID number 33 and will be named test vlan 2 1 At the command prompt enter vlan followed by a space and a question mark The following is displayed gt vlan A PORT NO IPMVLAN 802 10 lt vid gt lt vlanil vlan2 gt Vlan Command Set The question mark character invokes the help feature which displays keywords that can be used with the vlan prefix As you are setting up anew VLAN you can presume the proper command for this task is shown in the VLAN Manager Command Set This set shows the possible keywords to follow the vlan syntax Note The presumptions you make while using the help feature are educated guesses Whenever you make a guess as to the next keyword it is a good idea to enter the keyword followed by a space and a question mark 2 At the command prompt enter the number 33 followed by a space and a question mark This step either gives you more choices or an error message gt vlan 33 A lt cr gt AUTHENTICATION DISABLE ENABLE NAME NO PORT ROUTER STP Vlan Manager Command Set BINDING DHCP IP MAC NO PORT PROTOCOL USER Group Mobility Command Set 802 10 NO Miscellaneous Command Set In this example the question mark displays all keywords that can be used with the vlan 33 syntax As you are setting up anew VLAN and want to give the VLAN a name you can presume the proper syntax for this task is NAME as shown in the VLAN Manager Command Set pag
335. o display the adjacencies click on the Adjacencies button under the Physical group The page displays similar to the following Edt View Favortes Tools gt Cee BB ADS Address http 10 255 73 WebView guration Help About Telnet Log wxTarget 10 Adjacencies Home Refresh SiteMap Print The switch is able to discover and advertise adjacent switch information using one of its Interswitch Protocols AIP called the Mapping Adjacency Health Protocol AMAP Below you will see all the AMAP supported switches adjacent to this switch Right clicking an adjacent switch will show a list of IP addresses that the adjacent switch maintains and if a route from this switch to the selected IP of the adjacent switch exists may allow for Mouse over a Webview to be launched for subsequent configuration switch to display switch bo information Console Port Click to 97 display acini Adjacencies Page Remote VLAN 73 Remote lfc 1 2 00 D0 95 9C C6 E0 Networking Security E Time since last refresh 0 00 00 03 Adjacencies View OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 11 23 WebView Help Using WebView WebView Help A general help page for using WebView is available from the banner at the top of the page In addition on line help is available on every WebView page Each help page provides a descript
336. o insert a character between characters already typed use the Left and Right Arrow keys to place the cursor into position then type the new character Once the command is correct execute it by pressing Enter In the following example the user enters the wrong syntax to execute the show microcode command The result is an error message gt show microcode ERROR flash no such directory To correct the syntax without retyping the entire command line use the command to recall the previous syntax Then use the Left Arrow key to position the cursor between the and the characters To insert the missing character type gt gt show microcode To execute the corrected command press Enter OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 12 CLI Services Using the CLI Syntax Checking If you make a mistake while entering command syntax the CLI gives you clues about how to correct your error Whenever you enter an invalid command two indicators are displayed The Error message tells you what the error is The caret character tells you where the error is in your syntax The following example of the syntax checking feature shows an attempt to set IP routing If you enter the command set ip routing the following is displayed gt set ip routing enable ERROR Invalid entry set The set ip routing command is not valid so the CLI error message states what the prob
337. o the switch during the current login session Note A user must have read and write permission for the configuration family of commands to generate a snapshot file for those commands See the Switch Security chapter of this manual for further informa tion on permissions to specific command families Snapshot Feature List You can specify the snapshot file so that it will capture the CLI commands for one or more switch features or for all network features To generate a snapshot file for all network features use the following syntax gt configuration snapshot all To generate a snapshot file for specific features select the appropriate syntax from the following list Snapshot Keywords 802 1Q ipmr rip aaa ip helper ripng aip interface rdp all ip routing session bridge linkagg snmp chassis module stp health ntp system ip pmm vlan ipms policy webmgt ipv6 qos You may enter more than one network feature in the command line Separate each feature with a space and no comma The following command will generate a snapshot file listing current configurations for the vlan qos and snmp command families gt configuration snapshot vlan qos snmp You can verify that a new snapshot file is created by using the ls command to list all files in the flash directory page 7 10 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Working With Configuration Files Creating Snapshot Configuration Files User Defined
338. ommands allow you to create copy move remove rename and display directories e File commands allow you copy secure copy edit rename remove change and display file attributes e Utility commands display memory and system diagnostic information The following illustration represents a sample flash directory that contains three directories and six files at the top level The sample working directory and the certified directory both hold five files The sample network directory holds one file This sample flash directory is used in the explanations of the directory file and utility CLI commands described in the following section The switch may show files and directories different from the ones shown in this boot params Sample Flash Directory cs_system pmd Flash Files Network Directory boot slot cfg boot cfg 1 err policy cfg swlog1 log swlog 2 log Working Directory Certified Directory IKadvrout img Ksecu img Ksecu img Krelease img Kbase img Kos img Kos img Kbase img boot cfg boot cfg OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 5 File and Directory Management Managing System Files To list all the files and directories in your current directory use the ls command Here is a sample display of the flas
339. ommands in the network domain as well as Telnet and IP helper DHCP relay commands The user will not be able to execute any other commands on the switch Use the keyword all to specify access to all commands In the following example the user is given read access to all commands gt user lindy read only all Note When modifying an existing user the user password is not required If you are configuring a new user with privileges the password is required The default user privileges can also be modified See Default User Settings on page 9 9 OmniS witch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 27 Setting Up SNMP Access for a User Account Managing Switch User Accounts Setting Up SNMP Access for a User Account By default users can access the switch based on the SNMP setting specified for the default user account The user command however can be used to configure SNMP access for a particular user SNMP access can be configured without authentication and encryption required supported by SNMPv1 SNMPv2 SNMPv3 Or the user command can be configured with authentication or authentication encryption required SNMPv3 only SNMP authentication specifies the algorithm that must be used for computing the SNMP authentication key It can also specify DES encryption The following options can be configured for a user s SNMP access with authentication or authentication encryption e SHA The SHA authenticatio
340. on 2 8 17 August 2003 Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation Software with or without modi fication are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain copyright statements and notices 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document 4 The names and trademarks of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealing in this Software without specific written prior permis sion 5 Due credit should be given to the OpenLDAP Project 6 The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time Each revision is distinguished by a version number You may use the Software under terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the license THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATIO OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEM PLARY
341. on page Global Configuration Page Global configuration pages display drop down menus and fields that you complete to configure global parameters The fields display the current configuration To change the configuration 1 Select a new value from one of the drop down lists or enter a new value in a field 2 Click Apply to apply the changes to the switch The new configuration takes effect immediately Repeat the procedure to make additional configuration changes Note If you update a field and want to return it to the previous configuration click Restore However you must click Restore before applying the new configuration If you apply the new configuration and want to return to the previous configuration you must re enter the old configuration in the applicable fields 0 Internet Baines 5 x File Edit View Favorites Tools a Qa x T O search Sie Favorites 2 27 9 Address ja http 10 255 73 12 webjcontent login html z BE Links a i F WebView gt nfiguration Help About Telnet Log Out lt Home Interfaces Denial of Service Service Statistics Networking a Global IP Parameters Enter a value Primary Router IP Address 102557312 apply restore Applies new configuration Router ID 0 255 73 12 apply restore Select item IP Directed Broadcast Of from drop 30 apply restore Es down men
342. one channel for each Secure Shell connection This channel can be used for a Secure Shell session or a Secure Shell FTP session Using Secure Shell DSA Public Key Authentication The following procedure is used to set up Secure Shell SSH DSA public key authentication PKA between an OmniSwitch and a client device Note Note that if PKA fails the user is prompted for a password This is the password that was specified when the user name was created on the OmniSwitch 1 Use the PuTTYgen SSH software on the client device to generate a type SSH2 DSA private and public key pair 2 Do not save the public key on the client device using PutTTY gen Instead copy the key from the PuTTY gen public key window and paste the key into a text file with the filename userid_dsa pub Spec ify a valid OmniSwitch user login name for the userid portion of the filename For example the following public key filename is for OmniSwitch user Thomas thomas_dsa pub 3 Use PuTTY gen to save the private key on the client device 4 Verify that the userid specified as part of the filename in Step 2 is a valid user name on the OmniSwitch If the username does not already exist in the switch configuration create the user name with the appropriate privileges 5 FTP in ASCII mode the wserid_dsa pub file from the client device to the flash network pub directory on the OmniSwitch Create the flash network pub directory first if it does not already exist 6 Using PuTTY
343. onfiguration lt dhcp relay txt gt completed with no errors File configuration none scheduled Running configuration and saved configuration are different Note If the configuration file applied with the configuration apply command results in no changes to the saved configuration the message will state that the running configuration and saved configuration are identical To synchronize the running configuration and the saved configuration use the write memory command For more information about these displays refer to the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide 5 Use a the show ip helper command to verify that the DHCP Relay parameters defined in the configu ration files were actually implemented on the switch The display is similar to the one shown here gt show ip helper Forward Delay seconds 15 Max number of hops 3 Forwarding option standard Forwarding Address 128 251 16 52 These results confirm that the commands specified in the file dhcp_relay txt configuration file were successfully applied to the switch OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 7 3 Quick Steps for Applying Configuration Files Working With Configuration Files Quick Steps for Applying Configuration Files Setting a File for Immediate Application In this example the configuration file configfile_1 exists on the switch in the flash directory When these steps are followed the file will be immediately
344. onfiguration Load process may be delayed for at least 30 secs if no OXO response is found within 30 secs page 8 20 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Nearest Edge Mode Operation Nearest Edge Mode Operation In order for the network to propagate Nearest Edge mode LLDP PDUs a Management Switch must be configured to send the LLDP PDUs with the Management VLAN information Additionally the peer switches are automatically configured to process the Nearest Edge Mode LLDP PDU frames by the Automatic Configuration Download feature An OmniSwitch running the Automatic Remote Configuration feature is automatically enabled to process LLDP PDUs with the unique Nearest Edge destination MAC address In Nearest Edge mode the Management OmniSwitch uses a unique MAC address when sending LLDP PDUs The network OmniSwitch also looks for these unique packets to determine a Management VLAN It then creates a DHCP client interface on that tagged VLAN LLDP Transmisson from Management Switch e The Management Switch is configured to use the Nearest Edge Mode MAC address using the destination mac address command and is connected to the network using an untagged interface e LLDP is configured on the untagged port of the Management Switch so that the LLDP PDUs are sent with the Management VLAN information e The LLDP interval must not be set higher than 30 seconds default T
345. opIfIndex pktDropCount pktDropFrag pktDropType Reason index for why the packet was dropped This trap is sent when any given port detaches from the link aggregate group This trap is sent when any given port of the link aggregate group is removed due to an invalid con figuration The pktDrop trap indicates that the sending agent has dropped certain packets to blocked IP ports from spoofed addresses etc pktDropIfIndex Interface index if_index of the ingress port of the dropped pkt pktDropCount The number of packet drops within a configured time interval of the pktDropType that trig gered this particular trap instance pktDropFrag Less than or equal to 512 bytes of the dropped packet dsmac 12 tag 4 etype 2 pay load 512 0 if DropCount only OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 15 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information No Trap Name Objects mirmonPrima rySlot mirmonPrimary Port monitorFile Name monitorFileSize 66 monitorFileWritten mirmonPrimarySlot Slot of mirrored or monitored interface mirmonPrimaryPort Port of mirrored or monitored interface Family pmm Description A File Written Trap is sent when the amount of data requested by the user has been written by the port monitoring instance monitor FileName The name of the file in which the traffic will be stored the default is PMONITOR ENC monitorF
346. or User ID enter the username of your login account on the switch Where the FTP client asks for Password enter your switch password You can use the switch as an FTP client in a case where you do not have access to a workstation with an FTP client You can establish an FTP session locally by connecting a terminal to the switch console port You can also establish an FTP session to a remote switch by using a Telnet session Once you are logged into the switch as an FTP client you can use standard FTP commands You can use the switch ftp command to start an FTP session followed by the relevant IP address or host name and the ftp6 command to start an FTPV6 session followed by relevant IPv6 address or hostname over an IPv6 environment You have to specify the name of the particular IPv6 interface if the target has been specified using the link local address Note If you are using Authenticated Switch Access ASA the port interface must be authenticated for FTP use and the username profile must have permission to use FTP Otherwise the switch does not accept an FTP login For information about ASA refer to Chapter 10 Managing Switch Security The following is an example of how to start an FTP session to an OmniSwitch with an IP address of 198 23 9 101 gt ftp 198 23 9 101 Connecting to 198 23 9 101 connected 220 cosmo FTP server UNIX r System V Release 4 1 ready Name You need to enter a valid user name and pa
347. or by changing the user password page 9 26 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Configuring Privileges for a User Configuring Privileges for a User To configure privileges for a user enter the user command with the read only or read write option and the desired CLI command domain names or command family names The read only option provides access to show commands the read write option provides access to configuration commands and show commands Command families are subsets of command domains If you create a user without specifying any privileges the user s account will be configured with the privi leges specified for the default user account Command domains and families are listed here Domain Corresponding Families domain admin file telnet debug domain system system aip snmp rmon webmgt config domain physical chassis module interface pmm health domain network ip rip ip routing ipmr ipms rdp ipv6 domain layer2 vlan bridge stp 802 1q linkagg ip helper domain service dns domain policy qos policy domain security session aaa In addition to command families the keywords all or none can be used to set privileges for all command families or no command families respectively An example of setting up user privileges gt user thomas read write domain network ip helper telnet User thomas will have write access to all the configuration commands and show c
348. or it can provide a secure mechanism for managing network servers through the OmniSwitch The drawing below illustrates the Secure Shell being used as an access protocol replacing Telnet to manage the OmniSwitch Here the user terminal is connected through the network to the switch Secure Shell Network Terminal OmniSwitch Secure Shell Used as an Access Protocol The drawing below shows a slightly different application Here a terminal connected to a single OmniSwitch which acts as a Secure Shell client is an entry point to the network In this scenario the client portion of the Secure Shell software is used on the connecting OmniSwitch and the server portion of Secure Shell is used on the switches or servers being managed Secure Shell Access Protocol Secure Shell m o rr Tre E Terminal OmniSwitch Secure Secure Shell Shell Client Server OmniSwitch as a Secure Shell Client page 2 14 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Logging Into the Switch Using Secure Shell Secure Shell Authentication Secure Shell authentication is accomplished in several phases using industry standard algorithms and exchange mechanisms The authentication phase is identical for Secure Shell and Secure Shell FTP The following sections describe the process in detail Protocol Identification When the Secure Shell client in the
349. ork The switches are automatically upgraded with the set license for a trial period This feature can be implemented by running a script file with the license unlock metro command Note This upgrade procedure does not affect OmniSwitch Metro models as they already have the metro features activated The metro features are activated on the switch for a trial period of 15 days In order to get a permanent license the customer must identify the MAC address or serial number of the newly installed switches in the network and obtain the license file from the Alcatel Lucent portal and install it Note For detailed procedure on manual license upgrade see the Installing Software Licenses section in the Managing System Files chapter Also see the different types of license upgrades available The reboot of the switch or stack occurs at the end of automatic remote configuration process If any of the switches in the network already have the metro license installed then the automatic license upgrade does not occur Specifically the switch or stack does not reboot again Script File Example For Zero Touch License Upgrade to occur the script file must contain the license unlock metro command For details on the command see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide vlan 100 enable name VLAN 100 vlan 100 port default 1 1 license unlock metro write memory reload working no rollback timeout OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Gui
350. ort number on the management station This identifies the port to which the switch sends traps e The SNMP version used by the switch to send traps e user account name that the management station recognizes Procedures for configuring a management station can be found in Quick Steps for Setting Up An SNMP Management Station on page 3 4 SNMP Versions The SNMP agent in the switch can communicate with multiple managers You can configure the switch to communicate with different management stations by using different versions of SNMP The switch supports three versions of SNMP v1 v2 and v3 SNMPv1 SNMPv1 is the original implementation of the SNMP protocol and network management model It is characterized by the Get Set GetNext and Trap protocol operations SNMPv1 uses a rudimentary security system where each PDU contains information called a community string The community string acts like a combination username and password When you configure a device for SNMP management you normally specify one community string that provides read write access to objects within the device and another community string that limits access to read only If the community string in a data unit matches one of these strings the request is granted If not the request is denied page 3 8 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using SNMP SNMP Overview The community string security standard offers minimal security and is gene
351. ository for the most reliable software When the switch is booted the certified directory is loaded into the running configuration and used to manage switch functionality Changes made to the configuration file in the running configuration alters the switch functionality These changes are not saved unless explicitly done so by the user using the copy running config working command described in Copying the Running Configuration to the Working Directory on page 5 16 If the switch reboots before the configuration file in the running configuration is saved then the certified directory is reloaded to the running configuration and changes made to the configuration file in the running configuration prior to the reboot are lost Changes to the configuration file have to be initially saved to the working directory by using the copy running config working or the write memory commands Once the configuration file is saved to the working directory the switch can be rebooted from the working directory To reboot use the reload working command described in Rebooting from the Working Directory on page 5 18 Likewise new image files are always placed in the working directory first The switch can then be reboo ted from the working directory When this is done the contents of the working directory are loaded and used to set up the running configuration which is used to control switch functionality New image or configuration files can now be tested
352. ossing event is recovered ogOui dot3OamEventL ogType dot30amEventL ogLocation dot3OamEventL ogEventTotal dot30amEventLogTimestamp the value of sysUpTime at the time of the logged event dot30amEventLogOui The OUI of the entity defining the object type All IEEE 802 3 defined events as appearing in 802 3ah except for the Organizationally Unique Event TLVs use the IEEE 802 3 OUI of 0x0180C2 Organizations defining their own Event Notification TLVs include their OUI in the Event Notifica tion TLV that gets reflected here dot3O0amEventLogType tThe type of event that generated this entry in the event log When the OUI 15 the IEEE 802 3 OUI of 0x0180C2 the following event types are defined erroredSymbolEvent 1 erroredFramePe riodEvent 2 erroredFrameEvent 3 erroredFrameSecondsEvent 4 linkFault 256 dyingGaspEvent 257 criticalLinkEvent 258 dot3O0amEventLogLocation Indicates whether this event occurred locally local 1 or was received from the OAM peer via Ethernet OAM remote 2 dot30amEventLogEventTotal The total number of times this event has resulted in a notification 123 Reserved 146 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 23 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information No Trap Name Objects Family Description 147 alaHashCollisionTrap ifIndex port This trap is sent when an SFP ddmNotification XFP SFP Rx optical power has Type crossed any threshold or reverted dd
353. ow 802 1q show vlan rules show vlan port mobile show vlan show vlan port show vlan router mac status mac filtering table mac address table mac address table aging time show mac address table show mac address table count show mac address aging time spantree show spantree show spantree ports basic ip routing show arp ip routes table show ip route page 9 32 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Setting Up End User Profiles Creating End User Profiles To set up an end user profile use the aaa admin logout command and enter a name for the profile Spec ify read only or read write access to particular command areas The profile can also specify port ranges and or VLAN ranges The port ranges and VLAN ranges must be configured on separate command lines and are discussed in the next sections In this example a profile is created with access to physical commands on the switch gt end user profile Profile3 read write physical A profile named Profile3 is now available on the switch and can be associated with a user through the user command If port ranges or VLAN ranges are not configured a user with this profile will not be able to use any commands that require port or VLAN values or view any show outputs that contain port or VLAN values OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 33 Setting Up End User Profiles Managi
354. owfish Cast 3DES Arcfour Rijndael Signature Algorithms MDS SHA1 Compression Algorithms None Supported Key Exchange Algorithms diffie hellman group exchange shal diffie hellman group1 shal Note The OmniSwitch generates a 512 bit DSA host key at initial startup The DSA key on the switch is made up of two files contained in the flash network directory the public key is called ssh_host_dsa_key pub and the private key is called ssh_host_dsa_key To generate a different DSA key use the Secure Shell tools available on your Unix or Windows system and copy the files to the flash network directory on your switch The new DSA key takes effect after the OmniSwitch is rebooted Authentication Phase When the client tries to authenticate the server determines the process used by telling the client which authentication methods can be used The client has the freedom to attempt several methods listed by the server The server disconnects itself from the client if a certain number of failed authentications are attempted or if a time out period expires Authentication is performed independent of whether the Secure Shell interface or the SFTP file transfer protocol is implemented OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 2 15 Using Secure Shell Logging Into the Switch Connection Phase After successful authentication both the client and the server process the Secure Shell connection protocol The OmniSwitch supports
355. pears in the table If there is an error the window remains and an error message is displayed Repeat the procedure to modify additional entries E http 10 255 73 12 Modify LAN Microsoft Internet Explor Modify VLAN VLAN 73 Description 7 Admin Status Enabled STP Status A Flat STP Status Enabled gt 1x1 STP Status Enabled gt Authentication Disabled gt VLAN Tag Mobile Port Status Disabled Apply Restore Cancel ie Gore Modify Window OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 11 15 Configuring the Switch With WebView Using WebView Deleting an Existing Entry To delete an existing entry 1 Click on the checkbox to the left of the entry on the Configuration page 2 Click Delete The entry is immediately deleted from the table Note You can delete multiple entries by selecting the checkbox next to each entry Click on the top box to select all entries in the table page 11 16 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using WebView Configuring the Switch With WebView Table Features Table Views Some table configuration pages can be expanded to view additional configuration information If this option is available a toggle switch appears at the bottom left corner of the table To change views click on the toggle switch e g Expanded View For example if the table is in summary view click on Expa
356. pies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name University of Delaware not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The University of Delaware makes no representations about the suitability this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty FF OH OF kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkxk page A 12 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Software License and Copyright Statements Third Party Licenses and Notices Remote ni Provided with this product is a file part of GDB the GNU debugger and is licensed from Free Software Foundation Inc whose copyright notice is as follows Copyright C 1989 1991 1992 by Free Software Foundation Inc Licensee can redistribute this software and modify it under the terms of General Public License as published by Free Software Foundation Inc This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details O GNU Zip GNU Zip A compression utility which compresses the files with zip algorithm Copyright C 1992 1993
357. piration aluLicensedA pplication String displaying the application for which this license is valid aluLicenseTimeRemaining Number of days remaining to evaluate this demo license 199 Reserved 225 226 configSaveSucceededTrap configMegrTraps config Group configMgrTra pReasonGroup configSaveSuc ceededTrap configSaveSuc ceededTrapRea son manager This trap is sent from existing Configuration Manager Task when configuration is saved Existing socket between the Configuration Manager and the Trap Manager is used for sending trap SAM is informed of the changes in switch configuration with SNMP traps allowing Switches are polled when the configuration is saved This is done by checking the configuration file periodically using CLI SNMPor Webview The trap can also be raised using debug trap generate command write memory write memory flash synchro and copy running config working commands configSaveSucceededTrap Generated when the saving of configuration finishes without errors configSaveSucceededTrapReason S pecifies the reason of trap for successful execution of write memory command configMgrTrapsGroup Collection of Traps for Configuration Manager configMgrTrapReasonGroup Configurations saved successfully by write memory command OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 31 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information page B 32 OmniSwitch 6
358. policy TrapEventCode The code of the event OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 3 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information No Trap Name Objects Family Description 9 chassisTrapsStr chassisTrapsStr chassis A software trouble report STR Level was sent by an application chassis encountering a problem during TrapsStrAp its execution pID chassisTrapsStr SnapID chassisTrapsStr fileName chassisTrapsStr fileLineNb chassisTrapsStr ErrorNb chassis TrapsStrcom ments chassisTrapsStr dataInfo chassis TrapsStrLevel An enumerated value that provides the urgency level of the STR chassisTrapsStrA ppID The application identification number chassis TrapsStrSnapID The subapplication identification number You can have multiple snapIDs Subap plication task but only one is to be used to send STRs chassisTrapsStrfileName Name of the source file where the fault was detected This is given by the C ANSI macro __ FILE __ The path shouldn t appear chassisTrapsStrfileLineNb Line number in the source file where the fault was detected This is given by the C ANSI macro __ LINE _ chassisTrapsStrErrorNb The fault identificator The error number identifies the kind the detected fault and allows a mapping of the data contained in chassisTrapsdataInfo chassisTrapsStrcomments Comment text explaining the fault chassisTrapsStrdataInfo Additional data provided to help to find o
359. primary switch becomes idle and the next available idle switch becomes the secondary CMM For more information on stacks see the Managing Stacks chapter found in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Hardware Users Guide You can specify a reboot of the secondary CMM by using the secondary keyword in conjunction with the reload command for example to reboot the secondary CMM enter the reload command as shown gt reload secondary In this case the current primary CMM continues to run while the secondary CMM reboots Scheduling a Reboot It is possible to cause a reboot of the primary or secondary CMM at a future time by setting time parameters in conjunction with the reload command For example to schedule a reboot of the secondary CMM in 8 hours and 15 minutes on the same day enter the following at the prompt gt reload secondary in 08 15 Note Scheduled reboot times should be entered in military format a twenty four hour clock Cancelling a Scheduled Reboot To cancel a scheduled reboot use the cancel keyword A cancel command can be specified for a primary reboot a secondary reboot or all currently scheduled reboots For example to cancel the primary reboot set in the preceeding example enter the following gt reload secondary cancel Secondary CMM Fail Over While rebooting the switch during normal operation a secondary CMM is installed the switch will fail over to the secondary CMM Fail ov
360. psObjectType An enumerated value that provides the object type involved in the alert trap chassisTrapsObjectNumber A number defining the order of the object in the set e g the number of the con sidered fan or power supply This intends to clarify as much as possible the location of the failure or alert An instance of the appearance of the trap could be failure on a module Power supply 3 chasEntPhysOperStatus An enumerated value that indicates the operational status of installed modules includes empty slots 12 chassisTrapsMacOverlap physicalIndex module A MAC range overlap was found chasTrapMacRa in the backplane eeprom ngeIndex physicalIndex The physical index of the involved object chasTrapMacRangeIndex The MAC range index of the involved object 15 healthMonDeviceTrap healthMonRx health Indicates a device level threshold Status was crossed healthMonRxTx Status healthMonMem oryStatus healthMonC puStatus healthMonCm mTempStatus healthMonCm mCpuTemp Status healthMonRxStatus Rx threshold status indicating if threshold was crossed or no change healthMonRxTxStatus RxTx threshold status indicating if threshold was crossed or no change healthMonMemoryStatus Memory threshold status indicating if threshold was crossed or no change healthMonCpuStatus CPU threshold status indicating if threshold was crossed no change healthMonCmmTempStatus CMM temperature threshold status indicating if thr
361. pt automatically re appears Enter filter pattern vlan More next screen lt sp gt next line lt cr gt filter pattern lt gt quit lt q gt OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 25 Using the CLI Application Example 4 Press the spacebar lt sp gt key to execute the filter option The following is displayed Enter filter pattern vlan 8193 1 vlan 8194 dotiqVlan vlan 8195 dotiqVlanCurrentTable vlan 8196 dotigVlanStaticTable vlan 8197 vlanMgrVlanSet vlan 8198 vlanTable vlan 8199 vpaTable vlan 9217 vCustomRuleTable vlan 9218 vDhcpGenericRuleTable vlan 9219 vDhcpMacRuleTable vlan More next screen lt sp gt next line lt cr gt filter pattern lt gt quit lt q gt The screen displays ten table rows each of which contain the text pattern vlan Alcatel Lucent CLI uses a single level command hierarchy The screen rows shown above and below the table are not counted as part of the 10 rows If you want to display the rows one line at a time press Enter instead of the space bar key To exit the table type the q character and the CLI exits the more mode and return you to the system prompt OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 26 Using the CLI Verifying CLI Usage Verifying CLI Usage To display information about CLI commands and the configuration status of your switch use the show commands listed here s
362. r s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page A 5 Third Party Licenses and Notices Software License and Copyright Statements verbatim or with modif
363. r the following command at the prompt gt copy flash synchro The copy flash synchro command is described in detail in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Note When synchronizing the primary and secondary CMMs it is important to remember that the boot params file and the switch date and time are not automatically synchronized See the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Getting Started Guide for information on the boot params file and Chapter 1 Managing System Files for information on setting the switch date and time The date and time are synchronized using the system time and date synchro command Synchronizing the System Date and Time To synchronize the system date and time use the system time and date synchro command This command synchronizes the secondary CMM date and time to the primary CMM date and time Enter the command as shown gt system time and date synchro page 5 28 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content Managing Redundancy in a Stack and CMM Swapping the Primary CMM for the Secondary CMM If the primary CMM is having problems or if it needs to be shut down then the secondary CMM can be instructed to take over the switch operation as the primary CMM is shut down Note It is important that the software for the secondary CMM has been synchronized with the primary CMM before you initiate a secondary CMM takeover If the CMMs are not synchronized the
364. racies within a millisecond on LANs and up to a few tens of milliseconds on WANs relative to a primary server synchronized to Universal Coordinated Time UTC via a Global Positioning Service receiver for exam ple Typical NTP configurations utilize multiple redundant servers and diverse network paths in order to achieve high accuracy and reliability Some configurations include cryptographic authentication to prevent accidental or malicious protocol attacks It is important for networks to maintain accurate time synchronization between network nodes The stan dard timescale used by most nations of the world is based on a combination of UTC representing the Earth s rotation about its axis and the Gregorian Calendar representing the Earth s rotation about the Sun The UTC timescale is disciplined with respect to International Atomic Time by inserting leap seconds at intervals of about 18 months UTC time is disseminated by various means including radio and satellite navigation systems telephone modems and portable clocks Special purpose receivers are available for many time dissemination services including the Global Posi tion System GPS and other services operated by various national governments For reasons of cost and convenience it is not possible to equip every computer with one of these receivers However it is possi ble to equip some computers with these clocks which then act as primary time servers to synchronize a
365. rad1 becomes unavailable the switch will use Idap2 If Idap2 then becomes unavailable the switch will use the local user database to authenti cate users 4 Repeat step 3 for each management interface to which you want to configure access or use the default keyword to specify access for all interfaces for which access is not specifically denied For example if you want to configure access for all management interfaces except HTTP you would enter gt no aaa authentication http gt aaa authentication default 1 local Note the following e SNMP access can only use LDAP servers or the local user database If you configure the default management access with only RADIUS and or ACE SNMP will not be enabled It is recommended that Telnet and FTP be disabled if Secure Shell ssh is enabled Ifyou want to use WebView to manage the switch make sure HTTP is enabled 5 Specify an accounting server if a RADIUS or LDAP server will be used for accounting Specify local if accounting can be done on the switch through the Switch Logging feature Multiple servers can be specified as backups gt aaa accounting session ldap2 local OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 10 7 Quick Steps for Setting Up ASA Managing Switch Security The order of the server names is important here as well In this example the switch will use ldap2 for logging switch access sessions If Idap2 becomes unavailable the switch
366. rally insufficient for networks where the need for security is high Although SNMPv1 lacks bulk message retrieval capabilities and secu rity features it is widely used and is a de facto standard in the Internet environment SNMPv2 SNMPv2 is a later version of the SNMP protocol It uses the same Get Set GetNext and Trap operations as SNMPv1 and supports the same community based security standard SNMPv1 is incompatible with SNMPv 2 in certain applications due to the following enhancements e Management Information Structure SNMPv2 includes new macros for defining object groups traps compliance characteristics and capability characteristics Protocol Operations SNMPv2 has two new PDUs not supported by SNMPv1 The GetBulkRequest PDU enables the manager to retrieve large blocks of data efficiently In particular it is well suited to retrieving multiple rows in a table The InformRequest PDU enables one manager to send trap information to another manager SNMPv3 SNMPv3 supports the View Based Access Control Model VACM and User Based Security Model USM security models along with these added security features Message integrity Ensuring that a packet has not been tampered with in transit Time Frame Protection Limiting requests to specified time frames The user can specify a time frame so that any PDU bearing an out of date timestamp is ignored Encryption Scrambling the contents of a packet to prevent it from being learn
367. rally two situations that would require you to use the switch console serial port to load software by using Zmodem e Your system is having problems and the FTP transfer method does not work e The switch Ethernet Management port is either not functioning or not configured To use Zmodem you must have a terminal emulator that supports the Zmodem protocol There are many Zmodem products available that operate differently You should consult the user manual that came with your terminal emulation software for details OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 25 Loading Software onto the Switch Managing System Files Note If a file you are transferring already exists in the switch flash memory you must remove the file before transferring the new file via Zmodem Workstation OmniSwitch gt 0 Zmodem is used to transfer a file from a workstation to the OmniSwitch Zmodem Zmodem File Transfer To transfer a file via Zmodem complete the following steps 1 Connect your terminal emulation device containing the Zmodem protocol to the switch console port 2 Start the Zmodem process on your switch by executing the rz command gt YZ A screen similar to the following will appear Upload directory flash rz ready to receive file please start upload or send 5 CTRL X to abort B000000023be50 3 Transfer the files by using your terminal emulation software The following wil
368. re information refer to the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide 3 Specify the IP addresses of to three servers with the ip name server CLI command These servers will be queried when a host lookup is requested gt ip name server 189 202 191 114 189 202 191 15 189 255 19 1 You can also specify IPv6 DNS servers to query on a host lookup The following example describes the steps to enable the IPv6 DNS resolver service on the switch 1 Set the default domain name for IPv6 DNS lookups with the ip domain name CLI command gt ip domain name mycompanyl com 2 Use the ip domain lookup CLI command to enable the IPv6 DNS resolver service gt ip domain lookup You can disable the IPv6 DNS resolver by using the no form of the ip domain lookup command For more information refer to the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide 3 Specify the IPv6 addresses of up to three servers with the ipv6 name server CLI command These IPv6 servers will be queried when a host lookup is requested gt ipv name server fe2d 2c 302 3del 1 flbc 202 f d40 f 3 Note You cannot use multicast loopback link local and unspecified IPv6 addresses for specifying IPv6 DNS servers page 2 24 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Logging Into the Switch Veritying Login Settings Verifying Login Settings To display information about login sessions use the following CLI commands who Displays all active login
369. reating a User on page 9 12 For information about creating end user profiles see Setting Up End User Profiles on page 9 32 Note Optional To verify the user account enter the show user command The display is similar to the following User name Customerl END user profile Profilel SNMP authentication NONE Snmp encryption NONE User name default END user profile Profiles Snmp not allowed For more information about the show user command see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide page 9 8 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Overview of User Accounts Default User Settings The default user account on the switch is used for storing new user defaults for privileges and profile information This account does not include a password and cannot be used to log into the switch At the first switch startup the default user account is configured for e No read or write access No SNMP access No end user profile Any new users created on the switch will inherit the privileges or the end user profile of the default user unless the user is configured with specific privileges or a profile The default user settings can be modified Enter the user command with default as the user name The default user can only store default functional privileges or a default end user profile The default user cannot be configured with both privileges and a profile Th
370. red by the administrator The synchronization process is shown in the following diagram f a 1 Working Certified p Certified 3 Primary CMM 2 Secondary Running In the above diagram 1 The primary CMM copies its certified directory to the secondary CMM working directory remember that you cannot copy files directly to the certified directory they must first be copied to the working directory 2 An automatic reboot is then triggered on the secondary CMM loading the new contents of the working directory to the running configuration If no problems exist then the working directory is automatically copied to the certified directory of the secondary CMM If the secondary CMM fails to boot properly then the contents of the secondary CMM s certified direc tory overwrite the new software on the working directory of the secondary CMM This causes denying the attempted synchronization process This process copies the files in the certified directory of the primary CMM to the certified directory of the secondary CMM This prevents the secondary CMM from rebooting using incorrect or out of date soft ware if the primary CMM goes down This command synchronizes all switches in a stack OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 27 Managing Redundancy in a Stack and CMM Managing CMM Directory Content To synchronize the secondary CMM to the primary CMM ente
371. redundancy one switch is designated as the primary CMM and one is designated as the secondary CMM One CMM or the other runs the switch but never at the same time All other switches in a stack are designated idle for the purposes of CMM control Note Mixing OmniSwitch 6250 and OmniSwitch 6450 models in the same stack is not supported Management of the stack is run by the stack configuration software A detailed description of the stack configuration software and how it works is provided in the Managing Stacks chapter found in the related OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Hardware Users Guide In This Chapter This chapter describes the basic functions of CMM software directory management and how to implement them by using the Command Line Interface CLI CLI commands are used in the configuration examples for more details about the syntax of commands see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide This chapter contains the following information e The interaction between the running configuration the working directory and the certified directory is described in CMM Files on page 5 3 e A description of how to restore older versions of files and prevent switch downtime is described in Software Rollback Feature on page 5 4 e The CLI commands available for use and the correct way to implement them are listed in Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant on page 5 13 e The CLI commands and issues involved i
372. required for the switch include valid password syntax in the configuration file or immediately issue a new password using the password command at the command prompt For more information on configuration snapshots refer to Creating Snapshot Configuration Files on page 7 10 For more information on passwords refer to User Configured Password page 9 14 Note When you enter a command using debug set or debug show keyword syntax the switch writes the command output to a separate file that also ends with the err extension This does not mean that a config uration apply error has occurred it is merely the switch s standard method for displaying debug set or debug show command output OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 7 7 Configuration Files Overview Working With Configuration Files Setting the Error File Limit The number of files ending with the err extension present in the switch s flash directory is set with the configuration error file limit command You can set the switch to allow up to 25 error files in the flash directory Once the error file limit has been reached the next error file generated will cause the error file with the oldest time stamp to be deleted The following command sets the error file limit to 5 files gt configuration error file limit 5 If you need to save files with the err extension you can either rename them so they no longer end with the err extensio
373. results in thomas no longer having SNMP access to manage the switch OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 31 Setting Up End User Profiles Managing Switch User Accounts Setting Up End User Profiles End user profiles are designed for user accounts in the carrier market With end user profiles a network administrator can configure customer login accounts that restrict users to particular command areas over particular ports and or VLANs End user profiles are only managed and stored on the switch profiles are not stored on external servers Note End user profiles cannot be used in conjunction with user partitioned management the features are mutually exclusive The following table shows the end user command areas and the commands associated with each area Area Keyword Available Commands physical flow interfaces alias flow wait interfaces no L2 statistics interfaces trap port link interfaces admin show interfaces vlan table vlan vlan ip vlan 802 1q vlan port default vlan 802 1q frame type vlan 802 19 force tag internal vlan authentication vlan binding mac ip port vlan binding mac port protocol vlan binding mac port vlan binding mac ip vlan binding ip port vlan dhcp mac vlan dhcp mac range vlan dhcp port vlan dhcp generic vlan mac vlan mac range vlan protocol vlan port vlan port mobile vlan port default vlan restore vlan port authenticate vlan stp vlan user sh
374. ring port 154 Reserved 158 159 alaDhcpClientAddressAddTrap alaDhcpClien ip helper tAddress alaDhcpClientAddress The current IP address of the DHCP client This trap is sent when a new IP address is assigned to a DHCP client interface ialaDhcpClien tAddress 160 alaDhcpClientAddressExpiryTrap ip helper alaDhcpClientA ddress The current IP address of the DHCP client This trap is sent when the lease time expires or when a DHCP client unable to renew rebind an IP address alaDhcpClien tAddress alaDhcpClient NewAddress 161 alaDhepClientAddressModifyTrap ip helper This trap is sent when the DHCP client unable to obtain the exist ing IP address and a new IP address is assigned to the DHCP client alaDhcpClientAddress The current IP address of the DHCP client alaDhcpClientNewAddress The new IP address assigned to the DHCP client alaDying interface GaspSlot alaDyingGasp PowerSupply Type alaDyingGasp Time This trap is sent when a switch has lost all power 162 alaDyingGaspTrap alaDyingGaspSlot The slot number of the chassis whose NI is going down alaDyingGaspPowerSupplyType tThe type of the power supply alaDyingGaspTime The time of the failure alaTestOamCon bridge 163 alaTestOamTxDoneTrap After a configured time interval figTestld this trap is sent to the NMS from alaTestOamCon Generator switch when the test figSourceEnd duration expires poin
375. rmat a twenty four hour clock OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 19 Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant Managing CMM Directory Content Cancelling a Rollback Timeout To cancel a rollback time out enter the reload cancel command as shown gt reload primary cancel or gt reload cancel The reload working command is described in detail in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide page 5 20 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant Copying the Working Directory to the Certified Directory When the running configuration is saved to the working directory the working and certified directories of the switch are now different This difference if the CMM reboots causes the switch to boot and run from the certified directory When the switch is booted and run from the certified directory changes made to switch functionality cannot be saved and files cannot be moved between directories The boot cfg file saved on the working directory has to be saved to the certified directory as shown Primary CMM i 2 1 1 The switch boots from the certified directory and changes are made to the running configuration In this diagram 2 The changes are saved to the working directory as the boot cfg file The contents of the workin
376. rrent directory is the flash file directory Note You must have read write privileges to a file to change that file privileges To set the permission for the config1 txt file to read only use the following syntax gt chmod w flash configl txt To set the permission for the config1 txt file to read write use the following syntax gt chmod w flash configl txt Delete an Existing File The delete command deletes an existing file If you use the delete command from the directory containing the file you do not need to specify a path If you are in another directory you must specify the path and name for the file being deleted The user of this command must have write privileges for any file being deleted gt delete flash config txt page 1 16 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files File and Directory Management Managing Files on Switches On OmniSwitch stackable switches you can copy a file from a non primary switch to the primary switch in a stack using the rep command To use this command enter rep followed by the slot number of the non primary switch the path and file name of the source file on the non primary switch and the destina tion file name on the primary switch For example to copy the boot params file to the flash directory on Switch 4 in a stack to the primary switch and name it boot params bak enter gt rep 4 flash file txt file txt On OmniSwitch chas
377. rs as is necessary to identify the keyword uniquely then press the Tab key The CLI completes the keyword and place the cursor at the end of the keyword When you press Tab to complete a command keyword one of four things can happen e You enter enough characters prior to Tab to identify the command keyword uniquely In this case pressing Tab causes the CLI to complete the keyword and place a space followed by the cursor at the end of the completed keyword e You do not enter enough characters prior to Tab to identify the command keyword uniquely In this case pressing Tab has no effect e You enter characters that do not belong to a keyword that can be used in this instance In this case pressing Tab removes the characters and place the cursor back to its previous position e You enter enough characters prior to Tab to identify a group of keywords uniquely such that all keywords in the group share a common prefix In this case pressing Tab causes the CLI to complete the common prefix and place the cursor at the end of the prefix In this case no space is placed at the end of the keyword Note The keyword completion feature accepts wildcards OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 6 Command Help Using the CLI Command Help The CLI has an internal help feature you can invoke by using the question mark character as a command The CLI help feature provides progressive information on how to bui
378. s 6 12 Inserting Characters s cescisccesssssiescosdusscctecesstesconssuadutescvsobessentuyesuieseesstudesontess 6 12 Syma k CHECKING 6 13 Preti RECOM OE eth snes 6 13 Example for Using Prefix Recognition 2 6 14 Prefix 6 15 Command HIStory A A E A 6 15 Logging CLI Commands and Entry 6 17 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 vii Contents Enabling Command Logging oo eee eccesceeeeeeceeeeseeeceecesesaeseeseeseseeseeesaee 6 17 Disabling Command Logging 6 17 Viewing the Current Command Logging Status 6 18 Viewing Logged CLI Commands and Command Entry Results 6 18 Customizing the Screen Display eresie 6 19 Changing the Screen 5126 a eT E 6 19 Changing 6 19 Setting Session Prompt as System Name 6 20 Displaying Table Information 6 20 Filtering Table Information 6 21 Multiple User SESSIONS unin
379. s WebView through any NI on the switch page 11 8 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using WebView Configuring the Switch With WebView To configure a feature in WebView click on the feature icon in the toolbar on the left side of the screen The first page displayed is the Home Page Each configuration feature in WebView has a Home Page and a number of configuration pages The Home Page provides an overview of the feature and its current configuration The configuration pages are used to configure the feature Accessing WebView with Internet Explorer Version 7 When using Windows Internet Explorer Version 7 IE7 browser software to access WebView with HTTPS the following certificate warning message is displayed 2 Certificate Error Navigation Blocked Windows Internet Explorer oj x N 3 https 10 255 73 13 X Search Py File Edit View Favorites Tools Certificate Error Navigation Feeds 2 pap Print Page Gt Tools be We Ge Certificate Error Navigation Blocked Print gt G Tools 5 There is a problem with this website s security certificate The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted certificate authority The security certificate presented by this website was issued for a different website s address Security certificate problems may indicate an attempt to fool you or i
380. s listed gt ls Listing Directory rw drw drw rw rw drw rw drw rw 308 2048 2048 64000 64000 2048 30 2048 0 Aug Aug Aug Aug Aug Sep Aug Aug Sep flash 12 14 T5 15 15 24 19 25 13 10 16 16 14 07 33 45 24 19 05 57 2023 T6 25 24 08 00 boot params certified working swlog1 log swlog2 log switch policy cfg resources boot cfg 3 Use the ls command to list the contents of the flash working directory gt ls flash working Listing Directory flash working drw drw rw rw rw rw 2048 2048 880 6 6 6 Aug Aug Sep Aug Aug Aug 5 17 03 5 16 25 31 13 05 boot cfg 5 17 03 test1l txt 5 17 03 test2 txt 5 17 03 test3 txt 4 Use the mv command to move the test files from flash working to flash resources gt mv testli txt flash resources gt mv test2 txt flash resources gt mv test3 txt flash resources page 1 30 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files Application Examples for File Management 5 Use the ls command to verify that the files are now located in the flash resources directory gt ls flash resources flash resources Listing Directory drw drw rw rw rw 2048 Jul 2048 Jul 6 Jul 6 Jul 6 Jul 17995776 bytes free 17 16 I7 17 17 20 25 03 03 03 saf test1 txt test2 txt test3 t
381. s of the user See the table beginning on page 6 24 for a listing of valid families page 6 23 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using the CLI Multiple User Sessions Possible values for command domains and families are listed here domain families domain admin file telnet debug domain system system aip snmp rmon webmet config domain physical chassis module interface pmm health domain network ip rip ip routing ipmr ipms rdp ipv6 domain layer2 vlan bridge stp 802 1q linkagg ip helper domain service dns domain policy qos policy slb domain security session aaa Terminating Another Session If you are logged in with administrative privileges you can terminate the session of another user by using the kill command The following command terminates the login session number 4 gt kill 4 The command syntax requires you to specify the number of the session you want to kill You can use the who command for a list of all current user sessions and their numbers The kill command takes effect immediately OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 24 Using the CLI Application Example Application Example Using a Wildcard to Filter Table Information The wildcard character allows you to substitute the asterisk character for text patterns while using the filter mode Note Type the wildcard character in front of and after the filter text pattern un
382. s shown te Certified Primary CMM ad The certified directory software should be the best most reliable versions of both the image files and the boot cfg file configuration file The switch runs from the certified directory after boot if the working and certified directories are not the same If they are the same then the switch runs from the working directory allowing changes made to the running configuration to be saved If the switch is running from the certified directory you cannot save any changes to the running configuration or copy files between the directories OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 13 Managing the Directory Structure Non Redundant Managing CMM Directory Content To reboot the switch from the certified directory enter the reload command at the prompt gt reload This command loads the image and configuration files in the certified directory into the RAM memory These files control the operation of the switch Note When the switch reboots using the reload command it boots up from the certified directory Any information in the running configuration that has not been saved to the working directory is lost Scheduling a Reboot It is possible to cause a reboot of the primary or secondary CMM at a future time by setting time parameters in conjunction with the reload command using the in or at keywords To schedule
383. s the following steps 1 Make sure the key file is located in the networking directory of the switch This file must contain the key for the server that provides the switch with its timestamp information 2 Make sure the key file with the NTP server s MDS key is loaded into the switch memory by issuing the ntp key load command as shown gt ntp key load 3 Set the server authentication key identification number using the ntp server command with the key keyword This key identification number must be the one the server uses for MD5 encryption For exam ple to specify key identification number 2 for an NTP server with an IP address of 1 1 1 1 enter gt ntp server 1 1 1 1 key 2 4 Specify the key identification set above as trusted A key that has been labeled as trusted is ready for use in the authentication process To set a key identification to be trusted enter the ntp key command with the key identification number and trusted keyword For example to set key ID 5 to trusted status enter the following gt ntp key 5 trusted Untrusted keys even if they are in the switch memory and match an NTP server does not authenticate NTP messages 5 key can be set to untrusted status by using the ntp key command with the untrusted keyword For example to set key ID 5 to untrusted status enter the following gt ntp key 5 untrusted page 4 12 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Configuring Network Tim
384. s0 a00 20ff feas8 8961 gt telnet6 fe80 a00 20ff fea8 8961 intfl Trying fe80 a00 20ff fea8 8961 Connected to fe80 a00 20ff fea8 8961 Escape character is login Note It is mandatory to specify the name of the particular IPv6 interface if the target has been specified using the link local address page 2 8 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Logging Into the Switch Using Telnet Here you must enter a valid username and password Once login is complete the OmniSwitch welcome banner is displayed as follows login admin password Welcome to the Alcatel Lucent OmniSwitch 6450 Software Version 6 6 1 R01 Development October 05 2007 Copyright c 1994 2007 Alcatel Lucent All Rights reserved OmniSwitch TM is a trademark of Alcatel Lucent registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 2 9 Using FTP Logging Into the Switch Using FTP The OmniSwitch can function as an FTP server Any standard FTP client may be used Note An FTP connection is not secure Secure Shell is recommended instead of FTP or Telnet as a secure method of accessing the switch Using FTP to Log Into the Switch You can access the OmniSwitch with a standard FTP application To log in to the switch start your FTP client Where the FTP client asks for Name enter the IP address of your switch Where the FTP client asks f
385. sample after this entry becomes valid is less than or equal to this threshold and the associated alarmStartupAlarm is equal to fallingAlarm 2 or risingOrFall ingAlarm 3 26 stpNewRoot vStpNumber stp Sent by a bridge that became the new root of the spanning tree vStpNumber The Spanning Tree number identifying this instance 27 stpRootPortChange vStpNumber stp A root port has changed for a vStpRootPort spanning tree bridge The root Number port is the port that offers the lowest cost path from this bridge to the root bridge vStpNumber The Spanning Tree number identifying this instance vStpRootPortNumber tThe port ifindex of the port which offers the lowest cost path from this bridge to the root bridge for this spanning tree instance 28 mirrorConfigError mirmonPrima The mirroring configuration rySlot failed on an NI This trap is sent mirmonPrimary when any NI fails to configure Port mirroring Due to this error port mirroringSlot mirroring session will be termi mirroringPort nated mirMonErrorNi mirMonError mirmonPrimarySlot Slot of mirrored or monitored interface mirmonPrimaryPort Port of mirrored or monitored interface mirroringSlot Slot of mirroring interface mirroringPort Port of mirroring interface mirMonErrorNi The NI slot number mirMonError tThe Error returned by the NI which failed to configure Mirroring Monitoring page B 8 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management
386. satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circum stances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page A 7 Third Party Licenses and Notices Software License and Copyright Statements consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distrib ute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroug
387. saved to the working directory Running Configuration Saved to Working Directory factory configura tion settings saved configuration file is still in the work ing directory Since the working and certified direc tories are not the same it will be running from the certified directory It is important to note that in the preceding scenario the switch is using the configuration file from the certified directory and not the working directory The changes made and saved to the working directory are not in effect The switch can be booted from the working directory by using the reload working command page 5 6 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content Files Scenario 3 Saving the Working Directory to the Certified Directory After running the modified configuration settings and checking that there are no problems the network administrator decides that the modified configuration settings stored in the working directory are reli able The administrator then decides to save the contents of the working directory to the certified direc tory Once the working directory is saved to the certified directory the modified configuration file is included in a normal reboot Since the working and certified directories are the same the switch is running from the working directory R W C R W C
388. se use the no form of the command gt no user thomas The user account for thomas is removed from the local user database OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 13 Creating a User Managing Switch User Accounts User Configured Password Users can change their own passwords by using the password command In this example the current user wants to change her password to my_passwd Follow these steps to change the password 1 Enter the password command The system displays a prompt for the new password gt password enter old password 2 Enter the old password The password is concealed with asterisks A prompt displays for the new password gt password enter old password enter new password page 9 14 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Creating a User 3 Enter the desired password The system then displays a prompt to verify the password gt password enter old password enter new password kkkkkkkk reenter new password 4 Enter the password again gt password enter old password enter new password KKKKKKKKE reenter new password kk gt The password is now reset for the current user At the next switch login the user must enter the new pass word Note A new password cannot be identical to the current password it cannot be identical to any of the three passwords t
389. se commands see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide An example of the output for the show aaa authentication command is also given in Quick Steps for Setting Up ASA on page 10 7 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 10 13 Verifying the ASA Configuration Managing Switch Security page 10 14 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 11 Using WebView The switch can be monitored and configured using WebView Alcatel Lucent web based device management tool The WebView application is embedded in the switch and is accessible through the following web browsers e Internet Explorer 6 or later e Firefox2 or later Note For information about setting up browser preferences and options see Browser Setup on page 11 2 In This Chapter This chapter provides an overview of WebView and WebView functionality and includes information about the following procedures e Configuring the Switch with WebView WebView Login see page 11 8 Home Page see page 11 9 Configuration Page see page 11 12 e Using WebView Help Global Configuration Page see page 11 12 Table Configuration Page see page 11 13 Note For detailed configuration information on each feature see other chapters in this guide the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 11 1 WebView CLI Defaults Using WebView
390. secret key like a code or a password The sending device encrypts or scrambles the message by running it through an encryption algorithm along with the key The message is then transmitted over the network in its encrypted state The receiving device then takes the transmitted message and un scram bles it by running it through a decryption algorithm The receiving device cannot un scramble the coded message without the key The switch uses the Data Encryption Standard DES encryption scheme in its SNMPv3 implementation For DES the data is encrypted in 64 bit blocks by using a 56 bit key The algorithm transforms a 64 bit input into a 64 bit output The same steps with the same key are used to reverse the encryption The authentication process ensures that the switch receives accurate messages from authorized sources Authentication is accomplished between the switch and the SNMP management station through the use of a username and password identified via the snmp station CLI syntax The username and password are used by the SNMP management station along with an authentication algorithm SHA or MDS5 to compute a hash that is transmitted in the PDU The switch receives the PDU and computes the hash to verify that the management station knows the password The switch also verifyies the checksum contained in the PDU Authentication and encryption are combined when the PDU is first authenticated by either the SHA or MDS method Then the
391. sed merely for description The key format indicates an MDS key written as a 1 to 31 character ASCII string with each character standing for a key octet The key file with identical MD5 keys must be located on both the local NTP client and the client s server page 4 8 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP Configuring NTP Configuring NTP The following sections detail the various commands used to configure and view the NTP client software in an OmniSwitch Configuring the OmniSwitch as a Client The NTP software is disabled on the switch by default To activate the switch as an NTP client enter the ntp client command as shown gt ntp client enable This sets the switch to act as an NTP client in the passive mode meaning the client receives updates from a designated NTP server To disable the NTP software enter the ntp client command as shown gt ntp client disable Setting the Client to Broadcast Mode It is possible to configure an NTP client to operate in the broadcast mode Broadcast mode specifies that a client switch listens on all interfaces for server broadcast timestamp information It uses these messages to update its time To set an OmniSwitch to operate in the broadcast mode enter the ntp broadcast command as shown gt ntp broadcast enable A client in the broadcast mode does not need to have a specified server Setting the Broadcast
392. sent aipAMAPLastTrapPort The ifindex number of the port that most recently changed 7 aipGMAPConflictTrap aipGMAPLast Indicates a Group Mobility TrapReason Advertisement Protocol GMAP aipGMAPLast port update conflict TrapPort aipGMAPLast TrapMac aipGMAPLast TrapProtocol aipGMAPLast Trap Vlan aipGMAPLastTrapReason Reason for last update to not be applied Valid reasons are 1 Target VLAN is an authenticated VLAN 2 update would conflict with a binding rule 3 update would create two different VLAN entries for the same protocol 4 update would create two different protocol entries for the same VLAN 5 target VLAN is not mobile and 6 no trap has been sent aipGMAPLastTrapPort The ifindex number of the last port on which the GMAP was not applied because of a conflict aipGMAPLastTrapMac The last MAC address for which a GMAP change was not applied because of a conflict aipGMAPLastTrapProtocol tThe protocol identifier of the last change that was not applied because of a conflict aipGMAPLastTrapVlan The VLAN identifier of the last GMAP change that was not applied because of a conflict Note This trap GMAP is not supported 8 policyEventNotification policyTrapE qos The switch notifies the NMS ventDetail when a significant event happens String that involves the policy manager policyTrapE ventCode policy TrapEventDetailString Details about the event that took place
393. ser Accounts 1 Set up a user profile through the aaa admin logout command For example configure a profile called Profile1 that specifies read write access to the physical and basic ip routing command areas gt end user profile Profilel read write physical basic ip routing 2 Specify ports to which the profile will allow access In this example Profile1 will be configured with access to ports on slot and slot 2 gt end user profile Profilel port list 1 1 2 1 4 5 2 1 8 3 Specify VLANs VLAN ranges to which the profile will allow access In this example Profile1 will be configured with access to VLANs 3 through 8 gt end user profile Profilel vlan range 3 8 Note Optional To verify the end user profile enter the show end user profile command The display is similar to the following End user profile Profilel Area accessible with read and write rights physical basic ip routing Slot 1 ports allowed 1 2 4 5 Slot 2 ports allowed 1 8 Vlan Id 3 8 For more information about the show end user profile command see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide 4 Associate the profile with a user account Enter the user command with the relevant username and password and specify Profile1 In this example the user name is Customer and the password is my_passwd gt user Customerl password my passwd end user profile Profilel For more information about creating a user and setting up a password see C
394. ser Managing Switch User Accounts Creating a User To create a new user enter the user command with the desired username and password Use the password keyword For example gt user thomas password techpubs In this example a user account with a user name of thomas and a password of techpubs is stored in the local user database The password must be a string of non repeating characters The CLI uses the first occurrence of the char acter series to uniquely identify the password For example the password tpubtpub is the same as tpub A better password might be tpub3457 Note The exclamation point is not a valid password character In addition specifying an asterisk as one or more characters in a password is allowed as long as every character is not an asterisk For example password 123456 is allowed password is not allowed If privileges are not specified for the user the user will inherit all of the privileges of the default user account See Default User Settings on page 9 9 The password does not display in clear text in an ASCII configuration file produced by the snapshot command Instead it displays in encrypted form See Chapter 7 Working With Configuration Files for information about using the snapshot command page 9 12 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Creating a User Removing a User To remove a user from the local databa
395. sh drw 2048 Aug 21 17 49 certified drw 2048 Aug 12 18 51 working rw 31 Jul 29 2001 policy cfg drw 2048 Jul 28 12 17 switch Single Characters The question mark is used as a wildcard for a single character in a text pattern The following command will locate all entries containing swlog followed by any single character and the log extension gt ls swlog log Listing Directory flash rw 64000 Jul 21 19 49 swlogl log rw 64000 Aug 12 19 06 swlog2 log The single and multiple character wildcards can be used in combination The following command lists all entries containing the letter i followed by any two single characters gt ls i Listing Directory flash drw 2048 Aug 12 18 51 working OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 7 File and Directory Management Managing System Files Directory Commands The directory commands are applied to the switch file system and to files contained within the file system When you first enter the flash directory your login is located at the top of the directory tree You may navigate within this directory by using the pwd and cd commands discussed below The location of your login within the directory structure is called your current directory You need to observe your login location because when you issue a command that command applies only to directories and files in your current directory unless another path is specified The following drawing
396. sing SNMP The next sections describe how to configure SNMP access for users Note the following e SNMP access cannot be specified for the admin user e When modifying user s SNMP access the user password must be re entered or a new one config ured This is required because the hash algorithm used to save the password in the switch depends on the SNMP authentication level page 9 28 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Switch User Accounts Setting Up SNMP Access for a User Account SNMP Access Without Authentication Encryption To give a user SNMP access without SNMP authentication required enter the user command with the no auth option For example to give existing user thomas SNMP access without SNMP authentication enter the following gt user thomas password techpubs no auth For this user if the SNMP community map mode is enabled the default the SNMP community map must include a mapping for this user to a community string In this example the community string is our_group gt snmp community map our group user thomas In addition the global SNMP security level on the switch must allow non authenticated SNMP frames through the switch By default the SNMP security level is privacy all this is the highest level of SNMP security which allows only SNMPv3 frames through the switch Use the snmp security command to change the SNMP security level For more information about configurin
397. sing SNMP For Switch Security on page 3 10 e Working with SNMP Traps on page 3 13 This chapter also includes lists of Industry Standard and Enterprise Proprietary MIBs used to manage the OmniSwitch OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 3 1 SNMP Specifications Using SNMP SNMP Specifications The following table lists specifications for the SNMP protocol RFCs Supported for SNMPv2 1902 through 1907 SNMPv2c Management Framework 1908 Coexistence and transitions relating to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c RFCs Supported for SNMPv3 2570 Version 3 of the Internet Standard Network Management Framework 2571 Architecture for Describing SNMP Management Frameworks 2572 Message Processing and Dispatching for SNMP 2573 SNMPv3 Applications 2574 User based Security Model USM for version 3 SNMP 2575 View based Access Control Model VACM for SNMP 2576 Coexistence between SNMP versions Platforms Supported OmniSwitch 6250 6450 SNMPv1 SNMPv2 SNMPv3 The SNMPvV3 protocol is ascending compatible with SNMPv1 and v2 and supports all the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 PDUs SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 Community Strings Authentication SNMPv1 SNMPv2 Encryption None SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 Security Sets and Gets requests accepted by the switch SNMPv3 Authentication SHA MD5 SNMPv3 Encryption DES SNMPv3 Security requests Non authenticated Sets Non authenticated Gets and Get Nexts
398. sis based switches you can copy a file from a secondary management module to a primary management module or from a primary management module to a secondary management module with the rep command To use this command enter rep followed the secondary management module of the switch the path and file name of the source file on the secondary management module of the switch and the destination file name on the primary management module of the switch For example to copy the boot params file to the flash directory on primary management module in a switch and name it boot params bak enter gt rep cmm b flash boot params boot params bak To delete a file on a secondary management module of the non primary switch use the rrm command To use this command enter rrm followed by the path and file name of the file on the secondary management module of the non primary switch to be deleted For example to delete the boot params file in the flash directory on a secondary management module of the non primary switch enter gt rrm 4 flash boot params To list the directory contents of a secondary management module of the non primary switch use the rls command by entering rls followed by the path name of the directory you want to display As an option you can also specify a specific file name to be displayed For example to display the contents of the flash directory on a secondary management module non primary switch enter gt rls 4
399. snmp statistics show snmp mib family Displays current SNMP security status Displays SNMP statistics Each MIB object is listed along with its status Displays SNMP MIB information Information includes MIP ID num ber MIB table name and command family show snmp trap replay Displays SNMP trap replay information This includes the IP address of the SNMP station manager that replayed each trap and the number of the oldest replayed trap show snmp trap filter Displays the current SNMP trap filter status This includes the IP address of the SNMP station that recorded the traps and the identifica tion list for the traps being filtered show snmp authentication trap Displays the current authentication failure trap forwarding status that is enable or disable show snmp trap config Displays SNMP trap information including trap ID numbers trap names command families and absorption rate This command also dis plays the Enabled Disabled status of SNMP absorption and the Traps to WebView service For more information about the resulting displays from these commands see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 3 25 Verifying the SNMP Configuration Using SNMP page 3 26 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 4 Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP Network Time Protocol NTP is used to synchronize the time of
400. ssword for the host you specified with the ftp command after which you will get a screen similar to the following display Name Jsmith 331 Password required for Jsmith Password 230 User Jsmith logged in The following is an example of how to start an FTPVv6 session to OmniSwitch with an IPv6 address of fe80 a00 20ff fea8 8961 gt ftp6 fe80 a00 20ff fea8 8961 intf1 Connecting to fe80 a00 20ff fea8 8961 connected 220 cosmo FTP server UNIX r System V Release 4 1 ready Name page 2 10 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Logging Into the Switch Using FTP You have to enter a valid user name and password for the host you specified with the ftp6 command after which you will get a screen similar to the following display Name Jsmith 331 Password required for Jsmith Password 230 User Jsmith logged in Note It is mandatory to specify the name of the particular IPv6 interface if the target has been specified using the link local address After logging in you see the ftp gt prompt where you can execute the FTP commands that are supported on the switch For further information refer to the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Note You must use the binary mode bin to transfer image files through FTP OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 2 11 Using Secure Shell Logging Into the Switch Using Secure Shell The OmniSwitch Secure Shel
401. t alaTestOamCon figTestIdStatus alaTestOamConfigTestId A unique name to identify the entries in the table alaTestOamConfigSourceEndpoint The the local or transmitting switch For bidirectional test this also iden tifies the analyzer switch alaTestOamConfigTestIdStatus The test status not started running stopped ended OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 25 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information No Trap Name Objects Family Description 164 alaTestOamRxReadyTrap alaTestOamCon bridge This trap is sent to the NMS once figTestId the switch with Analyzer or alaTestOamCon Loopback Role is ready to figSourceEnd receive test traffic Once this trap point is received the Generator is acti alaTestOamCon vated for generating test traffic figTestIdStatus alaTestOamConfigTestId A unique name to identify the entries in the table alaTestOamConfigSourceEndpoint The the local or transmitting switch For bidirectional test this also iden tifies the analyzer switch alaTestOamConfigTestIdStatus The test status not started running stopped ended 165 alaTestOamTest AbortTrap alaTestOamCon _ bridge This trap is sent to the NMS from figTestId the switch if the test is aborted during takeover alaTestOamConfigTestId A unique name to identify the entries in the table 166 Reserved 167 Reserved 168 alaSaalPIterationCompleteTrap alaSaaCtrlOwn system This trap is sen
402. t is important to certify the working directory and synchronize the stack as soon as the validity of the software is established Stacks booted from the working directory or unsynchronized stacks are at risk of mismanaging data traffic due to incompatibilities in different versions of switch software Certifying the working directory is described in Copying the Working Directory to the Certified Directory on page 5 21 while synchronizing the switch is described in Synchronizing the Primary and Secondary CMMs on page 5 27 Rebooting the Switch from the Working Directory with No Rollback Timeout It is possible to reboot from the working directory without setting a rollback timeout in the following manner gt reload working no rollback timeout Scheduling a Working Directory Reboot It is possible to cause a working directory reboot of the CMM at a future time by setting time parameters in conjunction with the reload working command using the in or at keywords You still need to specify a rollback time out time or that there is no rollback To schedule a working directory reboot of the CMM in 3 hr and 3 min with no rollback time out you would enter gt reload working no rollback timeout in 3 03 To schedule a working directory reboot of the CMM at 8 00pm with a rollback time out of 10 minutes you would enter gt reload working rollback timeout 10 at 20 00 Note Scheduled reboot times should be entered in military fo
403. t when an IP SAA iteration is completed alaSaaCtrlT estIndex alaSaalpResult sTestRunIn dex alaSaaCtrlLas tRunResult alaSaaCtrlLas tRunTime alaSaaCtrl1OwnerIndex An owner to identify entries in the table This is currently not supported and its value will always be the string USER alaSaaCtrlTestIndex A unique name to identify the entries in the table The name is unique across various SNMP users alaSaalIpResultsTestRunIndex lIdentifies the row entry that reports results for a single OAM test run The value of this object starts from 1 and go upto a maximum of alaSaaCtr1MaxHistoryRows alaSaaCtrlLastRunResult tThe result of the latest SAA test iteration 1 Undetermined 2 Success 3 Failed 4 Aborted alaSaaCtrlLastRunTime tThe date and time at which the last iteration of the SAA was run 169 alaSaaEthIterationCompleteTrap alaSaaCtrlOwn system This trap is sent is sent when a Eth LB or Eth DMM SAA itera alaSaaCtrlT tion is completed estIndex alaSaaEthoam ResultsT estRunIndex alaSaaCtrlLas tRunResult alaSaaCtrlLas tRunTime page B 26 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name Objects Family Description alaSaaCtrlOwnerIndex An owner name to identify entries in the table This is currently not supported and its value will always be the string USER alaSaa
404. tabase is used for user login information set up user accounts through the user command User accounts includes user privileges or an end user profile In this example user privileges are configured gt user thomas password pubs read write domain network ip helper telnet If SNMP access is configured for the user the global SNMP setting for the switch can be configured through the snmp security command See Chapter 9 Managing Switch User Accounts for more information about setting up user accounts 2 If an external RADIUS or LDAP server will is used for user login information use the aaa radius server or aaa tacacs server commands to configure the switch to communicate with these servers For example gt aaa radius server radl host 10 10 1 2 timeout 3 For more information see the Managing Authentication Servers chapter in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide 3 Use the aaa authentication command to specify the management interface through which switch access is permitted such as console telnet ftp http or ssh Specify the server and backup servers to be used for checking user login and privilege information Multiple servers of different types can be specified For example gt aaa authentication telnet radl ldap2 local The order of the server names is important The switch uses the first available server in the list In this example the switch would use rad1 to authenticate Telnet users If
405. tailed information Syntax Error Display Alias Command Option More Command OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 2 CLI Overview Using the CLI CLI Overview The CLI uses single line text commands that are similar to other industry standard switch interfaces However the Alcatel Lucent CLI is different from industry standard interfaces in that the Alcatel Lucent uses a single level command hierarchy Unlike other switch interfaces the Alcatel Lucent CLI has no concept of command modes Other CLIs require you to step your way down a tree type hierarchy to access commands Once you enter a command mode go back to the top of the hierarchy before you enter a command in a different mode The Alcatel Lucent switch answers any CLI command at any time because there is no hierarchy Online Configuration To configure parameters and view statistics connect the switch to a terminal such as a PC or UNIX workstation using terminal emulation software This connection can be made directly to the serial port of the switch through a modem or over a network through Telnet For information about connecting a terminal to the switch see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Getting Started Guide Note If you are using an OmniSwitch 6250 6450 switch in a stacked configuration you must be connected to the console port of the primary switch For detailed information on primary switch status refer to the Managing Stacks chapter in
406. takeover could result in the switch running old or out of date software Synchronizing the primary and secondary CMMs is described in Synchronizing the Primary and Secondary CMMs on page 5 27 To instruct the secondary CMM to takeover switch functions from the primary CMM enter the following command at the prompt gt takeover The takeover command is described in detail in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide In a stack with three or more switches the secondary CMM takes over as primary and the original primary becomes idle The next available idle switch becomes the new secondary CMM For more information on stacks see the Managing Stacks chapter found in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Hardware Users Guide Note The saved boot cfg file is overwritten if the takeover command is executed after the copy running config working or write memory command on an OmniSwitch 6250 6450 switch set up with redundant CMMs OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 29 Managing Redundancy in a Stack and CMM Managing CMM Directory Content Show Currently Used Configuration In a chassis with a redundant CMM the display for the currently running configuration tells the user if the primary and secondary CMMs are synchronized To check the directory from where the switch is currently running and if the primary and secondary CMMs are synchronized enter the following command gt show running directory
407. tarting download of Script file lt File name and pathname gt from Secondary Server Download failed lt File name and Script file cannot be downloaded from both pathname gt using Pri and Sec IP primary secondary server Script File Unable to remove Instruction Instruction file cannot be removed from flash Command file lt File name and pathname gt due to error in running the script file Failure commands Error in executing the downloaded script file The downloaded script file cannot be run page 8 26 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 9 Managing Switch User Accounts Switch user accounts can be set up locally on the switch for users to log into and manage the switch The accounts specify login information combinations of usernames and passwords and privilege or profile information depending on the type of user The switch has several interfaces console Telnet HTTP FTP Secure Shell and SNMP through which users can access the switch The switch can be set up to allow or deny access through any of these interfaces See Chapter 10 Managing Switch Security for information about setting up management interfaces In This Chapter This chapter describes how to set up user accounts locally on the switch through the Command Line Inter face CLI CLI commands are used in the configuration examples for more details about the syntax of commands see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference
408. tch Note If the primary server is down or if there is any failure in downloading the files from the primary file server then a connection is established with the secondary file server The secondary file server is used for file download 6 All the required files are downloaded Note If a specific filename for firmware and configuration debug script files is not found an error is logged The download process continues with the next available file File transfer is tried three times and if file transfer still fails an error is logged and download process is stopped In such instances the working folder of the switch will contain an incomplete set of image files configuration debug or script files For details on troubleshooting under such instances see Troubleshooting on page 8 24 7 Now the DHCP client configured on the related VLAN is removed 8 The script file is downloaded and the commands in the script file are run All the commands in the script file are implemented on the switch in the order specified For other detailed steps that are part of the automatic remote configuration download process see Automatic Remote Configuration Download Process on page 8 9 LED Status The LED status during different stages of the Automatic Remote Configuration download process is as follows e DHCP phase OK LED is flashing green e DHCP lease obtained OK LED is solid green e DHCP phase stopped by console login OK LED
409. tch s flash direc tory e You can use the switch s text editor to create or edit a configuration file located in the switch s flash file directory Applying Configuration Files to the Switch Once you have a configuration file located in the switch s file system you must load the file into running memory to make it run on the switch You do this by using configuration apply command You may apply configuration files to the switch immediately or you can specify a timer session In a timer session you schedule a file to be applied in the future at a specific date and time or after a specific period of time has passed like a countdown Timer sessions are very useful for certain management tasks espe cially synchronized batch updates e For information on applying a file immediately refer to Setting a File for Immediate Application on page 7 4 e For information on applying a file at a specified date and time refer to Setting an Application Session for a Date and Time on page 7 4 e For information on applying a file after a specified period of time has elapsed refer to Setting an Application Session for a Specified Time Period on page 7 5 Verifying a Timed Session To verify that a timed session is running use the show configuration status command The following displays where the timed session was set using the configuration apply qos_pol at 11 30 october 31 syntax gt show configuration status F
410. tch When Telnet is used to log in the switch acts as a Telnet server If a Telnet session is initiated from the switch itself during a login session then the switch acts as a Telnet client Logging Into the Switch Through Telnet Before you can log into the OmniSwitch using a Telnet interface the telnet option of the aaa authentication command must be enabled Once enabled any standard Telnet client may be used to log into the switch To log into the switch open your Telnet application and enter the switch s IP address the IP address is the same as the one configured for the EMP The switch s welcome banner and login prompt is displayed Note A Telnet connection is not secure Secure Shell is recommended instead of Telnet or FTP as a secure method of accessing the switch Starting a Telnet Session from the Switch At any time during a login session on the switch you can initiate a Telnet session to another switch or some other device by using the telnet CLI command and the relevant IP address or hostname You can also establish a Telnetv6 session by using the telnet6 command and the relevant IPv6 address or host name The following shows an example of telnetting to another OmniSwitch with an IP address of 10 255 10 123 gt telnet 10 255 10 123 Trying 10 255 10 123 Connected to 10 255 10 123 Escape character is login The following is an example of telnetting to another OmniSwitch with an IPv6 address of fe8
411. tch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 10 CLI Services Using the CLI CLI Services There are several services built into the CLI that help you use the interface The Command Line Editing service makes it easy for you to enter and edit repetitive commands Other CLI services such as syntax checking command help prefix prompt and history assist you in selecting and using the correct command syntax for the task you are performing Command Line Editing CLI commands are entered from your keyboard and are executed when you press Enter The CLI also has several editing features that make it easier for you to enter the correct commands either by allowing you to correct entry mistakes or by helping you enter the correct command Deleting Characters You can delete CLI command characters by using the Backspace key or the Delete key The Backspace key deletes each character in the line one at a time from right to left Note the following command entry gt show macrocode The correct syntax is show microcode To change the spelling in this entry use the Backspace key to delete all of the characters after the m gt show m Type the correct syntax then press Enter to execute the command To change incorrect syntax with the Delete key use the Left Arrow key to move the cursor to the left of the character to be deleted then use the Delete key to remove characters to the right of the cursor Note the follow
412. tch has a directory structure that allows you to install new software while maintaining a backup copy of your old configuration This directory structure is explained in the Switch Directories section on page 1 4 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 3 Switch Administration Overview Managing System Files Switch Directories You can create your own directories in the switch flash directory This allows you to organize your config uration and text files on the switch You can also use the vi command to create files This chapter tells you how to make copy move and delete both files and directories Listing Directory flash Directory flash certified Directory flash network Files Files Directory flash working Files Switch Flash Directory Files boot params cs_system pmd boot slot cfg boot cfg 1 err swlog1 log swlog2 log page 1 4 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files File and Directory Management File and Directory Management A number of CLI commands allow you to manage files on your switch by grouping them into sub directories within the switch flash directory These commands perform the same functions as file manage ment software applications such as Microsoft Explorer perform on a workstation For documentation purposes we have categorized the commands into the following three groups e Directory c
413. tches has the primary role and the other switch has the secondary role at any given time The primary and secondary roles are determined by the switch number indicated on the LED on the front panel the lowest number switch becomes the primary switch in the stack The primary switch manages the current switch operations while the secondary switch provides backup also referred to as fail over Additional switches in a stack are set to idle for the purposes of redundancy For more information on managing a stack of switches see the Managing Stacks chapter found in the related OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Hardware Users Guide When two CMMs are running in a stack one CMM has the primary role and the other has the secondary role at any given time The primary CMM manages the current switch operations while the secondary CMM provides backup also referred to as fail over Redundancy Scenarios The following scenarios demonstrate how the CMM software is propagated to other switches in a stack for the purposes of coherent redundancy In the examples below W represents the working directory and C represents the certified directory Scenario 1 Booting the Stack The following diagram illustrates what occurs when a stack powers up The stack displayed is a three switch stack Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 W C W C W C 1 Stack is pow ered up
414. ter these commands are executed the CLI displays no more than six lines to the screen at a time followed by the More prompt The following is a sample display gt show snmp mib family MIP ID MIB TABLE NAME FAMILY aes ioe ae aie ae sine lee eee eee See Saeed eee ee ee eee 6145 esmConfTrap NO SNMP ACCESS 6146 alcetherStatsTable interface 6147 esmConfTable interface More next screen lt sp gt next line lt cr gt filter pattern lt gt quit lt q gt At the More prompt you are given a list of options The output formats are described here lt sp gt Press lt sp gt space bar to display the next page of information lt cr gt Press lt cr gt character return to display the next line of information Press to enter the filter mode See Filtering Table Information on page 6 21 lt q gt Press the character q to exit More and return you to the system prompt OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 6 20 Customizing the Screen Display Using the CLI To exit the more mode use the no more CLI command Note The value set with the more size command applies to the screen display when the CLI is in the more mode or when you are using the Vi text editor of the switch Filtering Table Information The CLI allows you to define filters for displaying table information This is useful in cases where a vast amount of display data exists but you are interested in on
415. th newpath lmkdir path lpwd ls path mkdir path put local path remote path pwd exit quit rename oldpath newpath rmdir path rm path symlink oldpath newpath version 2 Change remote directory to path Change local directory to path Change permissions of file path Display this help text Download file Display local directory listing Symlink remote file Create local directory Print local working directory Display remote directory listing Create remote directory Upload file Display remote working directory Quit sftp Quit sftp Rename remote file Remove remote directory Delete remote file Symlink remote file Show SFTP version Synonym for help to mode Note Although Secure Shell FTP has commands similar to the industry standard FTP the underlying protocol is different Closing a Secure Shell FTP Session To terminate the Secure Shell FTP session issue the exit command The following will display gt exit Connection to 11 333 30 135 closed This display indicates the Secure Shell FTP session with IP address 11 333 20 135 is closed The user is now logged into the OmniSwitch as a local device with no active remote connection page 1 24 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files Loading Software onto the Switch Using TFTP to Transfer Files Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP a client server protocol can be used to transfer fi
416. the Ether esmPortIF net code drops the link because ifInErrors of excessive errors ifOutErrors esmDrvTrap Drops esmPortSlot tThe physical slot number for this Ethernet Port The slot number has been added to be used by the private trap esmPortIF The on board interface number for this Ethernet port The port number has been added to be used by the private trap ifInErrors For packet oriented interfaces the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol For character oriented or fixed length interfaces the number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re initialization of the management sys tem and at other times as indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime ifOutErrors For packet oriented interfaces the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors For character oriented or fixed length interfaces the number of outbound transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re ini tialization of the management system and at other times as indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuity Time esmDrvTrapDrops Partitioned port separated due to errors page B 6 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide Ju
417. the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Hardware Users Guide Once you are logged in to the switch configure the switch directly using CLI commands Commands executed in this manner normally take effect immediately The majority of CLI commands are independent single line commands and therefore can be entered in any order However some functions require you to configure specific network information before other commands can be entered For example before you can assign a port to a VLAN first create the VLAN For information about CLI command requirements refer to the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Offline Configuration Using Configuration Files CLI configuration commands can be typed into a generic text file When the text file is placed in the switch flash working directory its commands are applied to the switch when the configuration apply command is issued Files used in this manner are called configuration files A configuration file can be viewed or edited offline using a standard text editor It can then be uploaded and applied to additional switches in the network This allows you to clone switch configurations easily This ability to store comprehensive network information in a single text file facilitates troubleshooting testing and overall network reliability See Chapter 7 Working With Configuration Files for detailed information about configuration files page 6 3 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013
418. the above display indicates the Enabled Disabled status of the DST setting on the switch The last three lines describe the date and time parameters for the selected time zone or the custom parameters set with the CLI To enable daylight savings time use the following command gt system daylight savings time enable Note If your time zone shows No default in the Time Zone and DST Information Table refer to Daylight Savings Time Configuration on page 1 41 for information on configuring and enabling DST The following table shows a list of supported time zone abbreviations and DST parameters Time Zone and DST Information Table Hours from Abbreviation Name UTC DST Start DST End DST Change nzst New Zealand 12 00 1st Sunday in Oct 3rd Sunday in Mar 1 00 2 00 a m at 3 00 a m zp11 No standard name 11 00 No default No default No default aest Australia East 10 00 Last Sunday in Oct Last Sunday in Mar 1 00 at 2 00 a m at 3 00 a m gst Guam 10 00 No default No default No default acst Australia Central 09 30 Last Sunday in Oct Last Sunday in Mar 1 00 Time at 2 00 a m at 3 00 a m jst Japan 09 00 No default No default No default kst Korea 09 00 No default No default No default awst Australia West 08 00 No default No default No default 7 8 China 08 00 No default No default No default Manila Philippines 7 7 Bangkok 07 00 No default No default No
419. the event when it exceeded a threshold limit dot3O0amEventLogRunningTotal the total number of times this event has happened since the last reset dot3O0amEventLogEventTotal The total number of times this event has resulted in a notification OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 21 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information No Trap Name Objects Family Description 120 dot30amNonThresholdEvent dot30amEventL dot3 oam This trap is sent when a local ogTimestamp remote non threshold crossing dot3OamEventL event is detected A local event is ogOui detected by the local entity while dot3OamEventL a remote event is detected by the ogType reception of an Ethernet OAM dot3OamEventL Event Notification OAMPDU ogLocation that indicates a non threshold dot3OamEventL crossing event ogEventTotal dot3O0amEventLogTimestamp tThe value of sysUpTime at the time of the logged event dot30amEventLogOui The OUI of the entity defining the object type All IEEE 802 3 defined events as appearing in 802 3ah except for the Organizationally Unique Event TLVs use the IEEE 802 3 OUI of 0x0180C2 Organizations defining their own Event Notification TLVs include their OUI in the Event Notifica tion TLV that gets reflected here dot3O0amEventLogType tThe type of event that generated this entry in the event log When the OUI is the IEEE 802 3 OUI of 0x0180C2 the following event types are defined erroredSymbolEvent 1 error
420. the file system check on the flash directory and also repairs any errors found on the file system If none of the options are specified then the no repair option is applied by default If you want to repair any errors found automatically while performing the file system check you must specify the flash directory as follows gt fsck flash repair The screen displays the following output flash disk check in progress flash Volume is OK Change volume Id from 0 0 to Oxef2e3c total of clusters 29 758 of free clusters 18 886 of bad clusters 0 total free space 77 357 056 max contiguous free space 55 451 648 bytes of files 59 of folders 5 total bytes in files 44 357 695 of lost chains 0 total bytes in lost chains 0 While performing the repair operation the switch will display the errors found and specify those errors that have been repaired If there are no errors found then just the file system information is displayed page 1 18 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing System Files File and Directory Management Deleting the Entire File System The newfs command deletes the flash file system and all the files and directories contained in it This command is used when you want to reload all files in the file system Caution This command will delete all of the switch system files All configurations programmed into the switch will be lost Do not use this command unless
421. the synchronization process of a working directory reboot The stack displayed is a three switch stack Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 W C W C 1 Stack is booted 2 The primary 3 The primary up from the work CMM switch cop CMM switch cop ing directory ies its working ies its working directory to the directory to the secondary CMM other switch work switch working ing directories directory Booting from the Working Directory This synchronization process occurs automatically on a working directory reboot Note It is important to certify the working directory and synchronize the stack as soon as the validity of the software is established Stacks booted from the working directory or unsynchronized stacks are at risk of mismanaging data traffic due to incompatibilities in different versions of switch software Certifying the working directory is described in Copying the Working Directory to the Certified Directory on page 5 21 while synchronizing the switch is described in Synchronizing the Primary and Secondary CMMs on page 5 27 page 5 10 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content CMM Files Scenario 3 Synchronizing Switches in a Stack When changes have been made to the primary CMM switch certified directory these changes have to be propagated to the other switches in the stack This could be done b
422. the user account name and the authentication type for that user For example gt user NMSuserV3MD5DES md5 des password x 2 Specify the UDP destination port number in this case 8010 the IP address of the management station 199 199 100 200 a user account name NMSuserV3MDS5DES and the SNMP version number v3 For example gt snmp station 199 199 100 200 8010 NMSuserV3MD5DES v3 enable Use the same command as above for specifying the IPv6 address of the management station For example gt snmp station 300 1 enable Note Optional To verify the SNMP Management Station enter the show snmp station command The display is similar to the one shown here gt show snmp station ipAddress udpPort status protocol user 199 199 100 200 8010 enable v3 NMSuserV3MD5DES 199 199 101 201 111 disable v2 NMSuserV3MD5 199 199 102 202 8002 enable vil NMSuserV3SHADES gt show snmp station ipAddress udpPort status protocol user 172 21 160 32 4000 enable v3 abc 172 21 160 12 5000 enable y3 user1 0300 0000 0000 0000 0211 d8ff fe47 470b 4001 enable v3 user2 0300 0000 0000 0000 0211 d8ff fe47 470c 5001 enable v2 abc For more information about this display see the SNMP Commands chapter in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide page 3 4 OmniSwitch 6250 64
423. thenticated Switch Access Setup An external RADIUS or LDAP server can supply both user login and authorization information ACE Server can provide login information user authorization information is available through the switch s local user database External servers can also be used for accounting which includes logging statistics about user sessions For information about configuring the switch to communicate with external servers see the Managing Authentication Servers chapter in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide If an external server is not available or is not configured user login information and user authorization can be provided through the local user database on the switch The user database is described in Chapter 9 Managing Switch User Accounts Logging can also be accomplished directly on the switch For information about configuring local logging for switch access see Configuring Accounting for ASA on page 10 12 For complete details about local logging see the Using Switch Logging chapter in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 10 3 Authenticated Switch Access Managing Switch Security Authenticated Switch Access Authenticated Switch Access ASA is a way of authenticating users who want to manage the switch With authenticated access all switch login attempts using the console or modem port Teln
424. tified by MerSlotNI alaStackMgrSlotNINumber Number detected the presence of two ele alaStackMgr ments with the same primary or ChasRole secondary role as specified by alaStackMgrChasRole on the stack alaStackMgrSlotNINumber Numbers allocated for the stack NIs as follows 0 invalid slot number 1 8 valid and assigned slot numbers corresponding to values from the entPhysicalTable 1001 1008 switches operating in pass through mode 255 unassigned slot number alaStackMgrChasRole The current role of the chassis as follows unassigned 0 primary 1 secondary 2 idle 3 standalone 4 passthrough 5 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 13 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information No Trap Name Objects Family Description 55 alaStackMgrClearedSlotTrap alaStack chassis The element identified by MegrSlotNI alaStackMgrSlotNINumber will Number enter the pass through mode because its operational slot was cleared with immediate effect alaStackMgrSlotNINumber Numbers allocated for the stack NIs as follows 0 invalid slot number 1 8 valid and assigned slot numbers corresponding to values from the entPhysicalTable 1001 1008 switches operating in pass through mode 255 unassigned slot number 56 alaStackMgrOutOfSlotsTrap N A chassis One element of the stack will enter the pass through mode because there are no slot num bers available to be assigned to t
425. time synchronize the software of the primary and secondary CMM use the following command gt copy working certified flash synchro Note This command does not function if the switch is running from the certified directory See Where is the Switch Running From on page 5 4 for an explanation The copy working certified command synchronizes all switches in a stack This command is described in detail in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide Note When synchronizing the primary and secondary CMMs it is important to remember that the boot params file and the switch date and time are not automatically synchronized See the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Getting Started Guide for information on the boot params file and Chapter 1 Managing System Files for information on setting the switch date and time The date and time are synchronized using the system time and date synchro command page 5 26 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing CMM Directory Content Managing Redundancy in a Stack and CMM Synchronizing the Primary and Secondary CMMs If you have a secondary CMM in your switch it is necessary to synchronize the software between the primary and secondary CMMs If the primary CMM goes down for example during a reboot then the switch fails over to the secondary CMM If the software in the secondary CMM is not synchronized with the software in the primary CMM the switch does not function as configu
426. ting For example gt aaa authentication telnet default In this example Telnet users will now be authenticated through the servers that are specified for the default interface Using Secure Shell Secure Shell is recommended instead of Telnet and FTP as a method for accessing the switch Telnet and FTP are not secure Secure Shell contains a secure FTP application that can be used after a Secure Shell session is initiated If Secure Shell is enabled it is recommended that Telnet and FTP be disabled For example gt no aaa authentication telnet gt no aaa authentication ftp gt aaa authentication ssh 1 ldap2 local In addition to enabling Secure Shell on the switch you can replace the DSA key on the switch The DSA key is generated at initial switch startup and copied to the secondary CMM it includes a private key that generates a digital signature against a public key The Secure Shell client will verify this signature when the client attempts to log into the switch The DSA key on the switch is made up of two files contained in the flash network directory the public key is called ssh_host_dsa_key pub and the private key is called ssh_host_dsa_key To generate a different DSA key use the Secure Shell tools available on your Unix or Windows system and copy the files to the flash network directory For more information about Secure Shell see Chapter 2 Logging Into the Switch Note Secure Shell cannot be
427. tion and binary image files They will be used in the event of a non specified reload Do not attempt to edit these files The path to this directory is flash certified e Working directory The working directory is a repository for configuration files that you are work ing on If you are working on configuration files to develop a custom switch application you may want to test them before certifying them as the switch default To do this you can boot from the files in the working directory while preserving the files in the certified directory When the files in the working directory are tested and working properly you may certify them as the switch default files The files are then copied into the certified directory to replace the old ones The path to this directory is flash working e Network directory This directory holds files that may be required by servers used for authentica tion Other files can be put into this directory if desired The path to this directory is flash network For more information on switch directories refer to the Managing CMM Directory Content chapter of this manual OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 27 Registering Software Image Files Managing System Files Available Image Files The following table lists the image files for the OmniSwitch 6450 Series switches Most of the files listed here are part of the base switch configuration Files that support an optional sw
428. tion file provides the following information e Firmware version and file location e Configuration file name and location e Debug configuration file name and location e Script file name and location e Primary FTP SFTP file server address type username e Secondary FTP SFTP file server address type username For more details on all the component files downloaded during the automatic remote configuration download process see Download Component Files on page 8 13 page 8 6 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Overview File Servers and Download Process The download process from the file servers is as follows 1 The username required to connect to the FTP SFTP enabled servers is provided in the instruction file The password required to connect to the servers is same as the username 2 The required files mentioned in the instruction file are downloaded from the primary FTP SFTP file server 3 If the configuration debug and script file names are specified in the instruction file then they are downloaded to the flash working directory of the switch 4 The Remote Configuration Manager now compares the current firmware version on the switch to the one mentioned in the instruction file If the firmware version is different then firmware upgrade is performed 5 The new firmware or image files are downloaded to the working directory of the swi
429. tion options can be performed using the CLI These configuration options are also available in WebView but changing the web server port or secured port can only be done through the CLI or SNMP Enabling Disabling WebView WebView is enabled on the switch by default If necessary use the http server command to enable WebView For example gt http server Use the no http server command to disable WebView on the switch If web management is disabled you will not be able to access the switch using WebView Use the show http command to view WebView status As an alternative you can use the https keyword instead of the http keyword to enable WebView For example gt https server When using this format of the command use the no https server command to disable WebView on the switch Changing the HTTP Port The default HTTP port is 80 the well known port number for Web servers You can change the port to a number in the range 0 to 65535 using the http port command Well known port numbers which are in the range 0 to 1023 cannot be configured Note All WebView sessions must be terminated before the switch accepts the command For example gt http port 2000 This command changes the HTTP port to 2000 To restore an HTTP port to its default value use the default keyword as shown below gt http port default OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 11 3 WebView CLI Commands Using WebView E
430. tions Platforms Supported DHCP Specifications OmniSwitch 6250 6450 DHCP Server required Temporary DHCP Client on VLAN 1 or VLAN 127 DHCP client on VLAN 127 only works on combo and uplink ports File Servers TFTP FTP SFTP Clients supported TFTP FTP SFTP Instruction file Maximum length of e Pathname 255 characters e Filename 63 characters Maximum length of username for FTP SFTP file server Nearest Edge MAC Address Feature Supported only on switch bootup in Remote Configuration Load Mode no boot cfg file present 15 characters 01 20 da 02 01 73 LACP Auto Detection and Link Aggregate Association operates only on combo ports and uplink ports Unsupported Features e ISSU and IPv6 are not supported e Upgrade of uboot miniboot or FPGA files is not supported page 8 2 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Managing Automatic Remote Configuration Download Automatic Remote Configuration Defaults Automatic Remote Configuration Defaults Description Default Management VLAN VLAN 1 Untagged Management VLAN DHCP broadcast VLAN VLAN 127 802 1q tagged VLAN Default Auto Link Aggregate Creation Between VLAN 1 and VLAN 127 Instruction file Configuration file Location TFTP Server File name alu represents any instruction filename Download location flash directory Downloaded as a temporary file File name Any name
431. ts under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automati cally receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or other wise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to
432. tton This displays a list of certificate stores OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 11 9 Configuring the Switch With WebView Using WebView 6 Select Trusted Root Certification Authorities from the list of stores and continue with the wizard installation process A Security Warning window is displayed containing a warning about installing the certificate 7 Click the Yes button in the Security Warning window to finish installing the certificate After the certificate is installed the browser window no longer displays the certificate error message Home Page The first page displayed for each feature is the Home Page e g IP Home The Home Page describes the feature and provides an overview of that feature s current configuration If applicable home pages display the feature s current configuration and can also be used to configure global parameters Each Home Page also provides a Site Map shown below which displays all of the configuration options available for that feature These are the same configuration options available in the drop down menus at the top of the page Webview 10 255 73 12 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q a 2 Olpe Perot OZ a aga WebView guration Help About Telnet Log Out Click to Displ splays display Sit feature
433. ttp or ftp and the desired number of minutes In the following example the CLI time out is changed from the default to 8 minutes gt session timeout cli 8 This command changes the inactivity timer for new CLI sessions to 8 minutes Current CLI sessions are not affected In this example current CLI sessions will be timed out after 4 minutes CLI sessions are initiated through Telnet Secure Shell or through the switch console port For information about connecting to the CLI through Telnet or Secure Shell see Using Telnet on page 2 8 and Using Secure Shell on page 2 12 For information about connecting to the CLI through the console port see your Getting Started Guide For information about using the CLI in general see Chapter 6 Using the CLI The ftp option sets the time out for FTP sessions For example to change the FTP time out to 5 minutes enter the following command gt session timeout ftp 5 This command changes the time out for new FTP sessions to 5 minutes Current FTP sessions are not affected For more information about FTP sessions see Using FTP on page 2 10 The http option sets the time out for WebView sessions For example to change the WebView inactivity timer to 10 minutes enter the following command gt session timeout http 10 In this example any new WebView session will have a time out of 10 minutes Current WebView sessions are not affected For more information about We
434. u za IP Route Preference ce Local fy Static 2 Restores Services apply restore apply restore original field Policy values Security OSPF 110 RIP 120 __ System apply restore apply restore vile E intenet Global Configuration Page page 11 12 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using WebView Configuring the Switch With WebView Table Configuration Page Table configuration pages show current configurations in tabular form Entries can be added modified or deleted You can delete multiple entries but you can only modify one entry at a time aes Tost L O O A 0 krs OS a Aag Address http 1 55 web content login html WebView Options Save Configuration Help About Telnet Log Out wxTarget 10 255 73 12 VLAN Administration VLAN Mgmt VLAN SVLAN Description Admin Traffic Operational Flat STP 1 1 STP Authentication VLAN Tag Click i y Status Type Status Status Status Mobile Port cktoselect Status item to 4 1 1 Enabled Active Enabled Enabled Disabled Off Disabled modify or 73 VLAN73 Enabled Active Enabled Enabled Disabled On Disabled Link Aggregation delete Summary View fa ia Port Security Admin Status Flat STP Status 1x1 STP Status _AddsviAN Enabled
435. ual Traps 000 0 ina E nA 3 6 E 3 7 SNMP Operations 3 7 Using SNMP for Switch Management 2 000 esceceeseceseceeceeceseeeseceaeceaseneceaeeeaeeaees 3 8 Setting Up an SNMP Management Station 3 8 SINIMP VerSiOms cis 222522 56 2 2 eect ost eds cite decd tee 3 8 SNMP Vie 3 8 2 3 9 SNIMIP V3 3 9 Using SNMP For Switch Security 3 10 Community Strings SNMPv1 SNMPV2 3 10 Configuring Community Strings 3 10 Encryption and Authentication SNMPV3 3 11 Configuring Encryption and Authentication 3 11 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Contents Setting SNMP Secar 3 12 Working with SNMP Traps eeeeeeseessseeesseeeseeseseesrsestserstecrresesteessesiseestsestseeserenstsereeeseees 3 13 Tr p fests 3 13 Filtering by Trap Families 3 13 Filtering By Individual Trap 3 13 Authentication ESEE E eis 3 14 Trap M
436. ue of this object is deltaValue 2 the value of the selected variable at the last sample will be subtracted from the current value and the differ ence compared with the thresholds alarm Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period For example if the sample type is deltaValue this value will be the difference between the samples at the beginning and end of the period If the sample type is absolute Value this value will be the sampled value at the end of the period alarmRisingThreshold A threshold for the sampled statistic When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold a single event will be generated A single event will also be generated if the first sample after this entry becomes valid is greater than or equal to this threshold and the associated alarmStartupAlarm is equal to risingAlarm 1 or risin gOrFallingAlarm 3 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 7 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information No Trap Name Objects Family Description 25 fallingAlarm alarmIndex rmon An Ethernet statistical variable alarm Variable has dipped below its falling alarmSample threshold The variable s falling Type threshold and whether it will alarm Value issue an SNMP trap for this con alarmFallingTh dition are configured by an NMS reshold station running RMON alarmIndex An index th
437. uires you to identify the IP address for the device you are connecting to The following command establishes a Secure Shell FTP interface from the local OmniSwitch to IP address 10 222 30 125 gt sftp 10 222 30 125 login as Note If SFTP is not enabled on the switch use the scp sftp command to enable it You can use the sftp6 command followed by the IPv6 address or hostname of SFTPv6 server to start an SFTPv6 session over an IPv6 environment For example OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 23 Loading Software onto the Switch Managing System Files gt sftp6 fe80 a00 20ff fea8 8961 intl login as Note SFTPV6 sessions are supported only on the OmniSwitch 6250 It is mandatory to specify the name of the particular IPv6 interface if SFTPv6 server has been specified using its link local address 2 You must have a login and password that is recognized by the IP address you specify When you enter your login the device you are logging in to will request your password as shown here gt sftp 10 222 30 125 login as rrlogin2 rrlogin2 s password for keyboard interactive method 3 After logging in you will receive the sftp gt prompt You may enter a question mark to view available Secure Shell FTP commands and their definitions as shown here sftp gt Available commands cd path led path chmod mode path help get remote path local path lls path ln oldpa
438. um number of alphanumeric characters in an 32 end user profile name Maximum number of user accounts 64 Maximum number of end user profiles 128 User Account Defaults Two user accounts are available on the switch by default admin and default For more information about these accounts see Startup Defaults on page 9 6 and Default User Settings on page 9 9 e Password defaults are as follows New users inherit the privileges of the default user if the specific privileges for the user are not config ured the default user is modifiable Description Command Default Minimum password length user password size min 8 characters Default password expiration for any user password expiration disabled user Username is not allowed in pass user password policy cannot con disabled word tain username Minimum number of uppercase char user password policy min upper 0 disabled acters allowed in a password case Minimum number of lowercase char user password policy min lower 0 disabled acters allowed in a password case Minimum number of base 10 digits user password policy min digit 0 disabled allowed in a password Minimum number of non alphanu user password policy min nonal 0 disabled meric characters allowed in a pass pha word Maximum number of old passwords user password history 4 to retain in the password history Minimum number of days user is user password min age 0 disa
439. uration examples for more details about the syntax of commands see the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide In This Chapter Configuration procedures described in this chapter include e Loading Software onto the Switch on page 1 20 e Creating a File Directory on the Switch on page 1 30 e Registering Software Image Files on page 1 27 e Installing Software Licenses on page 1 36 e Setting the System Clock on page 1 39 For related information about connecting a terminal to the switch see your Getting Started Guide For information about switch command privileges see Chapter 10 Managing Switch Security OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 1 File Management Specifications Managing System Files File Management Specifications The functionality described in this chapter is supported unless otherwise stated in the following Specifica tions table or specifically noted within any section of this chapter File Transfer Methods FTP TFTP Zmodem Switch Software Utility OmniSwitch as an FTP Client FTP server or TFTP Client Configuration Recovery Switch flash Directory The flash certified directory holds configurations that are certified as the default start up files for the switch They will be used in the event of a non specified reload 128 MB flash memory available for switch files and directories e Contains the certified and working dir
440. ure The directory structure that stores the image and configuration files is divided into two parts e The certified directory contains files that have been certified by an authorized user as the default files for the switch If the switch reboots it would reload the files in the certified directory to reactivate its functionality e The working directory contains files that can or cannot be altered from the certified directory The working directory is a holding place for new files Files in the working directory must be tested before committing them to the certified directory You can save configuration changes to the working direc tory You can reboot the switch from the working directory by using the reload working command as described in Rebooting from the Working Directory on page 5 18 The running configuration is the current operating parameters of the switch obtained from information from the image and configuration files The running configuration is in the RAM OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 5 3 CMM Files Managing CMM Directory Content Where is the Switch Running From When a switch has booted and is running the software used comes either from the certified directory or the working directory In most instances the switch boots from the certified directory A switch can be booted from the working directory by using the reload working command described in Rebooting from the Working Dir
441. urity on page 3 10 For more information on the CLI commands and the displays in these examples refer to the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide page 3 6 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Using SNMP SNMP Overview SNMP Overview SNMP provides an industry standard communications model used by network administrators to manage and monitor their network devices The SNMP model defines two components the SNMP Manager and the SNMP Agent Network Management Station OmniSwitch gt SNMP Manager SNMP Agent SNMP Network Model The SNMP Manager resides a workstation hosting the management application It can query agents by using SNMP operations An SNMP manager is commonly called a Network Management System NMS NMS refers to a system made up of a network device such as a workstation and the NMS software It provides an interface that allows users to request data or see alarms resulting from traps or informs It can also store data that can be used for network analysis e The SNMP Agent 15 the software entity that resides within the switch on the network It maintains the management data about a particular network device and reports this data as needed to the managing systems The agent also responds to requests for data from the SNMP Manager Along with the SNMP agent the switch also contains Management Information Bases MIBs MIBs are databases of managed o
442. used for Authenticated VLANs OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 10 11 Configuring Accounting for ASA Managing Switch Security Configuring Accounting for ASA Accounting servers track network resources such as time packets bytes and user activity when a user logs in and out how many login attempts were made session length and so on The accounting servers can be located anywhere in the network Note the following e Up to four servers be configured The servers can be of different types ACE cannot be used as an accounting server e The keyword local must be specified if you want accounting to be performed via the Switch Logging feature in the switch If local is specified it must be the last server in the list External accounting servers are configured through the aaa radius server and aaa tacacs server commands These commands are described in Managing Authentication Servers in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide To enable accounting logging a user session for Authenticated Switch Access use the aaa accounting mac command with the relevant server name s In this example the RADIUS and LDAP servers have already been configured through the aaa radius server and aaa Idap server commands gt aaa accounting session 1 ldap2 local After this command is entered accounting will be performed through the rad1 RADIUS server If that server is unava
443. ustomized user accounts e SNMP e Web based management WebView page xii OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 About This Guide What is Not in this Manual What is Not in this Manual The configuration procedures in this manual primarily use Command Line Interface CLI commands in examples CLI commands are text based commands used to manage the switch through serial console port connections or through Telnet sessions This guide does include introductory chapters for alternative methods of managing the switch such as web based WebView and SNMP management However the primary focus of this guide is managing the switch through the CLI Further information on WebView can be found in the context sensitive on line help available with that application This guide does not include documentation for the OmniVista network management system However OmniVista includes a complete context sensitive on line help system This guide provides overview material on software features how to procedures and tutorials that will enable you to begin configuring your OmniSwitch However it is not intended as a comprehensive refer ence to all CLI commands available in the OmniSwitch For such a reference to all CLI commands consult the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 CLI Reference Guide How is the Information Organized Each chapter in this guide includes sections that will satisfy the information requirements of casual read ers rush
444. ut Window The lockout window is basically a moving observation window of time in which failed login attempts are counted If the number of failed login attempts exceeds the lockout threshold setting see Configuring the User Lockout Threshold Number on page 9 24 during any given observation window period of time the user account is locked out of the switch If a failed login attempt ages beyond the observation window of time that attempt is no longer counted towards the threshold number For example if the lockout window is set for 10 minutes and a failed login attempt occurred 11 minutes ago then that attempt has aged beyond the lockout window time and is not counted In addition the failed login count is decremented when the failed attempt ages out By default the lockout window is set to 0 this means that there is no observation window and failed login attempts are not counted The user is allowed an unlimited number of failed login attempts To configure the lockout window time in minutes use the user lockout window command For example gt user lockout window 30 Do not configure an observation window time period that is greater than the lockout duration time period see Configuring the User Lockout Duration Time on page 9 25 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 9 23 Configuring Global User Lockout Settings Managing Switch User Accounts Configuring the User Lockout Threshold Number
445. ut the origin of the fault The contained and the significant portion are varying in accordance with chassisTrapsStrErrorNb The length of this field is expressed in bytes 10 chassisTrapsAlert physicalIndex chassis A notification that some change chassis TrapsOb has occurred in the chassis jectType chassis TrapsOb jectNumber chassis TrapsA lertNumber chassis TrapsA lertDescr physicalIndex The physical index of the involved object chassis TrapsObjectType An enumerated value that provides the object type involved in the alert trap chassisTrapsObjectNumber A number defining the order of the object in the set e g the number of the con sidered fan or power supply This is intended to clarify as much as possible the location of the failure or alert An instance of the appearance of the trap could be failure on a module Power supply 3 chassisTrapsAlertNumber This number that identifies the alert among all the possible chassis alert causes chassisTrapsAlertDescr The description of the alert matching ChassisTrapsA lertNumber page B 4 OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 SNMP Trap Information SNMP Traps Table No Trap Name Objects Family Description 11 chassisTrapsStateChange physicalIndex chassis An NI status change was chassis TrapsOb detected jectType chassis TrapsOb jectNumber chasEntPhysOp erStatus physicalIndex tThe physical index of the involved object chassis Tra
446. vailable and at least one should be close to you in terms of network topology It is also suggested that each NTP client is peered with at least three other same stratum clients so that time information crosschecking is performed Note Alcatel Lucent current implementation of NTP only allows the OmniSwitch to act as a passive client not as a server A passive client only receives NTP information and adjusts its time accordingly In the above example an OmniSwitch could be either Server 3a or 3b An OmniSwitch as Server 3a or 3b would also not be able to peer with other servers on the same stratum OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 4 7 NTP Overview Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP When planning your network it is helpful to use the following general rules e Jtis usually not a good idea to synchronize a local time server with a peer in other words a server at the same stratum unless the latter is receiving time updates from a source that has a lower stratum than from where the former is receiving time updates This minimizes common points of failure e Peer associations should only be configured between servers at the same stratum level Higher Strata should configure lower Strata not the reverse e It is inadvisable to configure time servers in a domain to a single time source Doing so invites common points of failure Note NTP does not support year date values greater than 2035 the re
447. variable mappings OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide Includes procedures for readying an individual switch for integration into a network Topics include the software directory architecture image rollback protections authenticated switch access managing switch files system configuration using SNMP and using web management software WebView OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide Includes network configuration procedures and descriptive information on all the major software features and protocols included in the base software package Chapters cover Layer 2 information Ethernet and VLAN configuration Layer 3 information routing protocols such as RIP security options authenticated VLANs Quality of Service QoS and link aggregation OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Transceivers Guide Includes information on Small Form Factor Pluggable SFPs and 10 Gbps Small Form Factor Plugga bles XFPs transceivers Technical Tips Field Notices Includes information published by Alcatel Lucent s Customer Support group page xvi OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 About This Guide Related Documentation e AOS Release 6 6 4 Release Notes Includes critical Open Problem Reports feature exceptions and other important information on the features supported in the current release and any limitations to their support OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page xvii User Manual
448. w a real time graphical representation of the switch displays all of the switch s current components The feature configuration options on this page are used to config ure the switch OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 11 7 Configuring the Switch With WebView Using WebView Configuring the Switch With WebView The following sections provide an overview of WebView functionality For detailed configuration proce dures see other chapters in this guide the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide Accessing WebView WebView is accessed using any of the browsers listed on page 11 1 All of the necessary WebView files are stored on the switch To access WebView and login to a switch 1 Open a web browser 2 Enter the IP address of the switch you want to configure in the browser Address field and press Enter The login screen appears Webview Logon Page Microsoft Internet Explorer oj x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 0 58 01 Address 110 255 73 12 webjcontent lagin t html zi gt Go Links gt 21 Alcatel Lucent NS E Done T 1 WebView Login Page Enter the appropriate user ID and password at the login prompt the initial user name is admin and the initial password is switch and click Login After successful login the Chassis Management Home Page appears Note You can acces
449. w Management Tool oo eee ce eececseceeeeseeseteeeeeeeaeseeeeeeas 2 7 Using SNMP to Manage the Switch 2 7 User 2 7 Using Feline A id an dat ented auth ein EA 2 8 Logging Into the Switch Through 2 8 Starting a Telnet Session from the Switch 2 8 iv OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 Contents T Perelu 2 10 Using FTP to Log Into the Switch inii A A 2 10 Weme Secure SHEL ENE 2 12 Secure Shell Components kp E EE 2 12 Secure Shell Interface eh taeda OAE A A 2 13 Secure Shell File Transfer Protocol eseeseeeeeeeeeeessssssssssssssssssssssssereseerrerersns 2 13 Secure Shell Application Overview 2 2 14 Secure Shell Authentication 2 15 Protocol Ident FICATION 550 0503 2 15 Algorithm and Key Exchange sinian 2 15 Alithentic ations Vase 2 15 Connec om Phase 2 16 Using Secure Shell DSA Public Key Authentication 2 16 Starting a Secure Shell Session
450. ware Foundation Inc 675 Mass Ave Cambridge MA 02139 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program is interactive make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode Gnomovision version 69 Copyright 19 name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course the commands you use may be called something other than show w and show c they could even be mouse clicks or menu items whatever suits your program You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copy right disclaimer for the program if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program Gnomovision which makes passes at compilers written by James Hacker lt signature of Ty Coon gt 1 April 1989 Ty Coon President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary appli cations with the library If this is what you want
451. was 171 aaaHicServerChangeTrap aaaHS vriIpAd aaa This trap is sent when the active HIC dress server is changed from to primary aaaHSvrCurrl pAddress aaaHSvrIpAddress The HIC Rem WebDL server s IP address aaaHSvrCurrIpAddress The current active HIC server s IP address 172 aaaHicServerUpTrap aaaHSvripAd This trap is sent when at least one dress of the HIC servers comes UP aaaHSvrRole aaaHSvrName aaaHSvrIpAddress The HIC Rem WebDL server s IP address aaaHSvrRole tThe Server s role aaaHSvrName The HIC Server s name 173 alaLldpTrustViolation agentalreadyex This trap is sent when there is an istonport LLDP Trust Violation and gives agentalreadyex the reason for the violation istonotherport chassisidsub typemissmatch OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page B 27 SNMP Traps Table SNMP Trap Information No Trap Name Objects Family Description agentalreadyexistonport 1 There is already one trust agent exists on the port Only one trust agent can be allowed on a port agentalreadyexistonotherport 2 The same agent is already present on another port Any given remote agent shall be part of only on port chassisidsubtypemissmatch 3 The Chassis ID subtype does not match the configured subtype 174 alaStackMgrIncompatibleModeTrap chassis Not Supported 175 Reserved 176 alaDHLVlanMoveTrap alaDHLSes vlan When linkA or linkB goes
452. witch Quick Steps for Logging Into the Switch The following procedure assumes that you have set up the switch as described in your OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Getting Started Guide and OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Hardware Users Guide Setup includes e Connecting to the switch through the console port e Setting up the Ethernet Management Port EMP through the switch s boot prompt e Enabling or unlocking management interfaces types Telnet FTP HTTP SNMP and Secure Shell through the aaa authentication command for the interface you are using Note that Telnet FTP and Secure Shell are used to log into the switch s Command Line Interface CLI For detailed infor mation about enabling session types see Chapter 10 Managing Switch Security 1 If you are connected to the switch through the console port your terminal automatically displays the switch login prompt If you are connected remotely you must enter the switch IP address in your Telnet FTP or Secure Shell client typically the IP or IPv6 address of the EMP The login prompt then displays 2 At the login prompt enter the admin username At the password prompt enter the switch password Alternately you may enter any valid username and password The switch s default welcome banner is displayed followed by the CLI prompt Welcome to the Alcatel Lucent OmniSwitch 6450 Software Version 6 6 1 R01 Development October 05 2007 Copyright c 1994 2007 Alcatel Lucent
453. witch out to a subnet Authenticated Switch Access authenticates users into the switch to manage it The features are independent of each other however user databases for each feature can be located on the same authentica tion server For more information on authenticated VLANs and authentication servers see Configuring Authenti cated VLANs and Configuring Authentication Servers in the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 10 5 Configuring Authenticated Switch Access Managing Switch Security Configuring Authenticated Switch Access Setting up Authenticated Switch Access involves the following general steps 1 Set Up the Authentication Servers This procedure is described briefly in this chapter See the Managing Authentication Servers chapter of the OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Network Configuration Guide for complete details 2 Set Up the Local User Database Set up user information on the switch if user login or privilege infor mation will be pulled from the switch See Chapter 9 Managing Switch User Accounts 3 Set Up the Management Interfaces This procedure is described in Setting Up Management Inter faces for ASA on page 10 9 4 Set Up Accounting This step is optional and is described in Configuring Accounting for ASA on page 10 12 Additional configuration is required to set up the switch to communicate with external
454. working infrastructure products ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the Chassis Man SNMPv2 SMI CHASSIS MIB agement subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB ENTITY MIB ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the Configuration SNMPv2 SMI CONFG MGR MIB Manager subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of chassis and modules SNMP SMI DEVICES ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the IEEE 802 1Q SNMPv2 SMI DOT1Q MIB subsystem SNMPv2 TC SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND1 Definitions of managed objects for the IEEE 802 1X SNMPv2 SMI DOT1X MIB subsystem SNMPv2 TC ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the Dynamic Rout SNMPv2 SMI DRCTM MIB ing and Control DRC subsystems SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for Group Mobility SNMPv2 TC GROUP MOBILITY SNMPv2 SMI MIB SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the Health Moni SNMPv2 SMI HEALTH MIB toring subsystem SNMPv2 CONF ALCATEL IND1 IGMP Definitions of managed objects for the IPv4 Multicast SNMPv2 TC MIB MIB SNMPv2 SMI SNMPv2 CONF INET ADDRESS MIB IF MIB OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 3 21 SNMP MIB Information Using SNMP MIB Name Description Dependencies ALCATEL IND 1 Definitions of managed objects for the Interswitch SNMPv2 SMI INTERS WITCH Protocol that is GMAP XMAP
455. xt FTP Client Application Example The following example shows how to transfer a file named rrtext txt from the switch flash working directory to another host by using the switch as an FTP client 1 Log into the switch Use the ls command to verify that your current directory is flash gt ls rw drw drw drw rw rw rw rw rw rw drw rw Listing Directory 272 Jun 2048 Jun 2048 Jun 2048 Jul 10000 Jun 10000 Jun 445 Jun 7298 Jul 2662306 Jun 543 Jun 2048 Jun 1452 Jun 1452 Jun rw flash 12 12 13 12 12 12 21 24 28 28 28 29 29 16480256 bytes free T5 173 12 16 15 17 iis 16 16 12 173 12 12 57 52 32 22 58 50 43 51 44 02 50 50 42 boot params certified working switch swlog1 log swlog2 log aaasnap websnap1024 cs_system pmd aaapublic newdir nssnap76 76 2 Use the command to change your current directory to flash working Use the Is or pwd command to verify gt cd working gt ls Listing Directory flash working drw drw rw 2048 Aug 3 12 32 2048 Aug 14 10 58 450 Aug 13 10 02 rrtest1 txt i OmniSwitch 6250 6450 Switch Management Guide June 2013 page 1 31 Application Examples for File Management Managing System Files 3 Enter the FTP mode by using the ftp command followed by the IP address or the name of the host you are connecting to If you enter a host name please refer t
456. y rebooting the stack However a loss of switch functionality is to be avoided a copy flash synchro command can be issued The following diagram illustrates the process that occurs when using a copy flash synchro command The stack shown is a three switch stack Switch 1 1 A copy flash synchro com mand is issued on the primary CMM switch Switch 2 W C 2 The contents of the certified direc tory of the primary CMM switch are copied to the working directory of the secondary CMM switch The working directory is then copied to the certi fied directory Switch 3 3 The contents of the certified direc tory of the pri mary CMM switch are copied to the working directory of additional switches The working directory is then copied to the certified direc tory Synchronizing Switches in a Stack The copy flash synchro command described in Synchronizing the Primary and Secondary CMMs on page 5 27 can be issued on its own or in conjunction with the copy working certified command described in Copying the Working Directory to the Certified Directory on page 5 26 Note It is important to certify the working directory and synchronize the stack as soon as the validity of the software is established Stacks booted from the working directory or unsynchronized stacks are at risk of mismanaging dat
457. you are using Authenticated Switch Access ASA the port interface must be authenticated for FTP use and the username profile must have permission to use FTP Otherwise the switch will not accept an FTP login For information about ASA refer to Chapter 10 Managing Switch Security 2 Specify the transfer mode If you are transferring a switch image file you must specify the binary transfer mode on your FTP client If you are transferring a configuration file you must specify the ASCII transfer mode 3 Transfer the file Use the FTP put command or click the client download button to send the file to the switch When you use FTP to transfer a file to the switch the file is automatically placed in the switch flash working directory For details on using CLI commands to managing files once they are on the switch see File and Directory Management on page 1 5 Note You must use the binary mode bin to transfer files via FTP Using the Switch as an FTP Client Using the switch as an FTP client is useful in cases where you do not have access to a workstation with an FTP client You can establish an FTP session locally by connecting a terminal to the switch console port You can also establish an FTP session to a remote switch by using a Telnet session Once you are logged into the switch as an FTP client you can use standard FTP commands Note If you are using Authenticated Switch Access ASA the port interface must be auth

OmniSwitch 6250/6450 Switch Management Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents